JP6915274B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a picture display device that displays a variable picture. In this type of gaming machine, for example, when a prize is won in the operating port provided in the gaming area, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a hit state, and a pattern is drawn. The variable display is started. When the lottery is won, a specific pattern combination or the like is stopped and displayed, and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-074175

Here, there is still room for improvement in improving the interest.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a technical machine capable of improving interest.

The first invention of the present gun,
An acquisition method for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
An acquisition information storage means that stores the special information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers.
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the given information, and if a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information With respect to the grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination
A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting response result that the special information corresponds to the grant information.
A pattern display means that can display a pattern in a variable manner,
Based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the symbol, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped and displayed as one of the game times. , A display control means that controls the display of the pattern display means so that each game is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
With
The display control means
Stop display period setting means for setting the stop display period for displaying the stop of the pattern, and
A stop display executing means that executes the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means, and a stop display executing means.
With
The stop display period setting means, when the storage number of the special information in the acquired information storage unit at variable display in or stopped and displayed in the immediately changes, changes the stop display period of the stop immediately display Is possible,
A means for setting the stop display period as the first period when the number of stored items is less than a predetermined number, and
A means for setting the stop display period to a second period shorter than the first period when the number of stored items is equal to or greater than the predetermined number.
It is characterized by having.
Further, the second invention of the present application is
An acquisition method for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
An acquisition information storage means that stores the special information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers.
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the given information, and if a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information With respect to the grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination
A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting response result that the special information corresponds to the grant information.
A pattern display means that can display a pattern in a variable manner,
Based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the symbol, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped and displayed as one of the game times. , A display control means that controls the display of the pattern display means so that each game is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
With
The display control means
Stop display period setting means for setting the stop display period for displaying the stop of the pattern, and
A stop display executing means that executes the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means, and a stop display executing means.
With
The stop display period setting means changes the stop display period of the stop display immediately after the change when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means changes during the variable display or the stop display immediately after the variable display. Is possible,
A means for setting the stop display period as the first predetermined period when the number of stored items is larger than a predetermined reference number, and
A means for setting the stop display period to a second predetermined period longer than the first predetermined period when the number of stored items is equal to or less than the reference number.
It is characterized by having.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a perspective view which shows the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. (a) is a front view showing the structure of a game board, and (b) is a schematic view showing the internal structure of a unit at an operating port. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the contents of various counters used for a winning / failing lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by the MPU of the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows the information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control process. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a variation display time. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for hold notice. It is the schematic for demonstrating the fixed display time. It is a flowchart which shows the process for confirmation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of stop start. (A) is a flowchart showing the process of grasping the number of executions of the special period setting, and (b) is a schematic diagram for explaining the number of pending grasps. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation display of a symbol string. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a type 1 notice effect, (b) is a schematic view showing a type 2 notice effect, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing execution timings of the first and second notice effects. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display control processing by MPU of a notification / effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the fluctuation start. It is a flowchart which shows the process for stop start. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is the schematic which shows the hold notice in the modification 1 of the 1st Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the re-variation effect. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display control processing by MPU of a notification / effect control device. It is the schematic for demonstrating the information included in the 1st stop display command. It is a flowchart which shows the process for stop start. It is a flowchart which shows the process for re-variation. It is a schematic diagram which shows the stop result table for hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the process for stop display. It is a flowchart which shows the stop result setting process for complete disconnection. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is the schematic which shows the hold notice in the modification 2 of the 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the stop start processing by MPU of a main control unit. (A) is a flowchart showing the process of grasping the number of executions of the special period setting on the stop side, and (b) is a flowchart showing the process of setting the hold notice on the stop side and the variable side. It is the schematic for demonstrating the execution mode of the hold notice. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a variation display time. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the variation display time for complete deviation. (A) is a flowchart showing the process of grasping the number of executions of the variable side special period setting, and (b) is a flowchart showing the process of setting the hold notice on the variable side and the stop side. It is the schematic for demonstrating the execution mode of the hold notice. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is the schematic for demonstrating the information form of the variation command in the modification 3 of the 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the contents of the various counters used for the winning / failing lottery in the 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a pass / fail table for general drawing, (b) is a general drawing open pattern, and (c) and (d) are schematic views showing a distribution table for general drawing. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variable display time and the fixed display time of the normal figure game times. It is a schematic diagram which shows the state of the display screen in the normal drawing game times. It is a schematic diagram which shows the distribution table for the ordinary figure fixed display time. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service support process by the MPU of the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure game time control process. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the normal drawing confirmation display time. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of an accessory. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for each round. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure variation display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for starting the fluctuation of a normal figure by the MPU of a notification / effect control device. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the special display effect, and (b) is a timing chart showing the relationship between the execution start timing of the special display effect and the final display time. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation display time and the final display time of the general drawing game times in the modification of the 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game pause determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the normal drawing confirmation display time. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is a flowchart which shows the error correspondence processing by the MPU of the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of stop start. It is a flowchart which shows the process for stop start. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how the delay effect is performed. It is a timing chart which shows a state that a delay effect is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the error correspondence processing in the modification of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of stop start. It is a flowchart which shows the error resolution processing by the MPU of the main control unit. (A) is a front view showing the pachinko machine according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a flowchart showing the operation correspondence processing by the MPU of the main control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the process at the start of stop, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the delay effect is performed. (A) is a flowchart showing the stop start processing in the modified example of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of stop start. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board. It is a front view for demonstrating the operation of the 2nd ball entry part. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view seen from the side surface side of the variable winning device according to the fifth embodiment, and (b) is a vertical cross-sectional view seen from the back side of the variable winning device. It is the schematic which shows the distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process for a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the process for changing. It is a flowchart which shows the deceleration processing of a middle symbol string. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol row. It is the schematic which shows the execution timing of the prior result notification and the immediate result notification. It is a flowchart which shows the stop process of a middle symbol string. It is the schematic which shows the driving notification effect. It is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the prior result notification and the immediate result notification. It is a flowchart which shows the stop start processing in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for V operation by the MPU of the main control device in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing the process at the start of stop, and (b) is a flowchart showing the process for starting V distribution. (A) and (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first fixed display time according to the number of holds, and (c) and (d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the number of holds and the V occurrence rate. Is. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of a game. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation display time table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the winning / failing table and the distribution table in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the time of stop start. It is a flowchart which shows the opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the stop result determination processing for a jackpot. It is a flowchart which shows the stop result determination process for reach. It is a timing chart for explaining the flow of a game.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first form of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10 in an unfolded manner. In FIG. 2, for convenience, the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the game area is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main body 12 rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 in the forward direction. .. The outer frame 11 is formed by connecting a plate-shaped frame material or the like on all four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment. The outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration in the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in the island equipment of the amusement park.

The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view.

As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side in front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation tip side when viewed from the front. It is supposed to be movable.

As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at the rotating tip portion thereof, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 so as not to be openable. In addition, it has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. When the game board 24 is attached to the resin base 21, the game area PE formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21. Here, the configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. 4A. FIG. 4A is a front view of the game board 24.

The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an operating port unit 33 having an upper operating port 33a and a lower operating port 33b, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a main display unit 43, and a display unit for accessories. 44 and the like are provided respectively.

When a ball is entered into the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, and the operating ports 33a and 33b, it is detected by a detection sensor arranged on the back side of the game board 24 and the like, and is determined based on the detection result. A number of prize balls are paid out.

In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 24, and a game ball that does not enter various winning openings or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out port 37. Further, on the game board 24, a large number of nails 38 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through the predetermined opening, and not only the mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PE after passing through the opening, but also the game area PE after passing through the opening. It also includes aspects that are not discharged from. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the ball from entering the game ball into the out port 37, the ball entering the variable winning device 32, the operating ports 33a, 33b or the through gate 35 is referred to as winning. Express.

The upper actuating port 33a and the lower actuating port 33b are arranged side by side in the upper and lower parts, and both are opened upward. Further, the actuating port unit 33 is provided with an electric accessory 34 having a pair of left and right movable pieces 34a and a drive unit for operating the movable pieces 34a.

The electric accessory 34 (specifically, the drive unit) is connected to the main control device described later, and is in an open state (support state or guide) that allows the ball to enter the lower operating port 33b based on the signal from the main control device. The state) and the closed state (non-supported state or non-guided state) in which the ball cannot enter the lower operating port 33b are switched. Regarding the electric accessory 34, it is sufficient if it is possible to switch between the first state and the second state in which winning is more likely to occur than in the first state, and it is not always necessary to be able to switch between the open state and the closed state. ..

In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes having different support modes by the electric accessory 34 are set. Specifically, in the support mode, the frequency with which the electric accessory 34 is opened per unit time is compared in a situation where the game ball is continuously launched to the game area PE in the same manner. A low frequency support mode (or a low frequency guide state) and a high frequency support mode (or a high frequency guide state) are set so as to be relatively high and low.

In the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize in the operating port is higher than in the low frequency support mode. Then, when a prize is won in the operating port, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player can play the game while suppressing the consumption (investment) of the ball.

Here, the operating port unit 33 provided with the operating ports 33a and 33b will be supplementarily described with reference to FIG. 4B. FIG. 4B is a schematic view showing the internal structure of the operating port unit 33.

The operating port unit 33 is formed with a guide passage 33c that guides the game ball that has flowed into the upper operating port 33a to the collection passage provided on the back side of the game board 24. The guide passage 33c branches into the first branch passage 33d and the second branch passage 33e at an intermediate position thereof.

At the branch position in the guide passage 33c, a distribution means 33g for alternately distributing the game ball that has reached the branch position to the first branch passage 33d and the second branch passage 33e is provided. The distribution means 33g can be switched between a first guide state for guiding the game ball reaching the branch position to the first branch passage 33d and a second guide state for guiding the game ball to the second branch passage 33e. The sorting means 33g is configured to switch from one guiding state to the other guiding state based on guiding the game ball. Therefore, the game balls that have flowed into the upper operating port 33a are sequentially distributed to the first branch passage 33d / the second branch passage 33e.

The lower operating port 33b is connected to the second branch passage via the connecting passage 33f, and the game ball that has flowed into the lower operating port 33b directly flows into the second branch passage. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the upper operating port 33a flows into both branch passages, while the game ball that has flowed into the lower operating port 33b flows into only the second branch passage.

A detection sensor 211c for detecting a game ball is provided in the first branch passage 33d (hereinafter, also referred to as the first entry portion 33d), and in the second branch passage 33e (hereinafter, also referred to as the second entry portion 33e). A detection sensor 211d for detecting a game ball is arranged at a position downstream of the communication portion of the communication passage 33f. These detection sensors 211c and 211d are connected to the main control device, and the main control device enters the branch passages 33d and 33e based on the detection information (detection signal) from the detection sensors 211c and 211d, that is, the operation port 33a. , 33b is grasped whether or not there is a prize.

The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a leading to the back side of the game board 24, and an opening / closing door 32b for opening and closing the large winning opening 32a. The opening / closing door 32b is normally in a closed state in which it is not possible to win a game ball into the large winning opening 32a, and when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution state) is won in the internal lottery, the large winning opening It is possible to switch to an open state in which the winning of the game ball to 32a is allowed. Here, the open / close execution mode is a mode that shifts when a big hit is won. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined time (for example, 30 sec) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings is set as one round, and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) are set as the upper limit for variable winning. There is an embodiment in which the device 32 is repeatedly opened. It is sufficient that the variable winning device 32 can be switched between the first state and the second state in which winning is more likely to occur, and it is not always necessary that the variable winning device 32 can be switched between the open state and the closed state.

The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are provided on the decorative member 39 arranged along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area PE. The decorative member 39 projects forward from the pachinko machine 10 from the board surface of the game board 24. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 in order to make the game area PE visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and further, the window panel 62 The distance between them is narrower than one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 39. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and the game ball can be seen in front of both the display units 43 and 44. Falling is suppressed. In addition, on the upper surface of the decorative member 39, a part of the above-mentioned general winning openings 31 is installed in a state of being opened upward.

Although detailed description by illustration is omitted, the main display unit 43 has a segment display unit, and the segment display unit is provided with a result display unit for an operation port. The result display unit for the operation port has a display area for the first ball entry unit 33d and a display area for the second ball entry unit 33e in a one-to-one correspondence with the ball entry units 33d and 33e. In these display areas, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the operating ports 33a and 33b (specifically, the winning of the ball into the ball entry portions 33d and 33e) is clearly shown. In this case, in the same display area, the variable display (variable display) of the pattern is performed by sequentially turning on and off the lights in each display segment, triggered by the winning of the operating ports 33a and 33b, and the variable display is stopped. As a result, the result of the internal lottery conducted based on the winning prize will be clearly shown. That is, the lottery result based on the entry into the first entry section 33d is clearly indicated in the display area for the first entry section, and the lottery result based on the entry into the second entry section 33e is the second entry. Specified in the display area for the part.

The accessory display unit 44 also has a segment display like the main display unit 43, and the segment display is provided with a accessory result display unit. The accessory result display unit is a display unit for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35. In this case, in the result display unit for the accessory, the variable display (or variable display or switching display) of the pattern is performed by sequentially turning on and off the lights in each display segment with the winning of the through gate 35 as a trigger. As a result of stopping the variable display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 is clearly indicated by the display. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the electric service open state, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory result display unit and the variable display is displayed. After being stopped, it shifts to the electric service open state. In the electric service open state, the electric accessory 34 attached to the lower operating port 33b is in the open state in a predetermined mode.

The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 having a display screen 41a and variablely displaying (variablely displaying) the symbols on the display screen 41a. Further, in the variable display unit 36, a center frame 42 is arranged so as to surround the symbol display device 41 (specifically, the display screen 41a). The upper portion of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is suppressed from falling in front of the display screen 41a, and the drop of the game ball reduces the visibility of the display screen 41a (for example, the above-mentioned symbol or the image for holding described later). Is less likely to occur.

The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbol rows are displayed side by side in the upper, middle, and lower directions, and these symbol rows are variably displayed so as to be scrolled in the left-right direction. In this case, the variation display in the symbol display device 41 is started based on the winning of the operating ports 33a and 33b. Then, for example, the symbol display device 41 presets the opening / closing execution mode for the game to shift to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 16 rounds in which the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened 16 times. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line.

At the lower part of the center frame 42, a holding lamp portion 47 corresponding to the accessory result display portion of the accessory display unit 44 is provided. The number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is held up to four times, and the number of times the game ball is held is displayed by lighting the hold lamp unit 47. The hold information corresponding to the through gate 35 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

An inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the game board 24, and a guide rail is formed by the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52, and the game is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 53. The ball is guided to the upper part of the game area PE. As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launch mechanism 53 is attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21, and the game ball is launched by operating the launch handle 54 provided on the front door frame 14. The operation is performed.

The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 has a window portion 61 so that almost the entire area of the game area PE can be visually recognized from the front. It is formed (see FIG. 1 or 2). As shown in FIG. 1, the window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 described above is fitted therein. The window panel 62 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the window panel 62 may be formed colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the window portion 61. An indicator lamp unit 63 is provided above the window unit 61 as a part of the various lamp units. Further, on both the left and right sides of the indicator lamp unit 63, speaker units 64 for outputting sound effects and the like according to the game state are provided.

Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 bulging toward the front side are arranged vertically. The upper bulging portion 65 is provided with an upper plate 71 that is open upward, and the lower bulging portion 66 is provided with a lower plate 72 that is also open upward. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 53 side while arranging them in a row. Further, the lower plate 72 has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper plate 71. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 of the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper plate 71 and the lower plate 72 through the passage forming unit 73 (see FIG. 2) provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14.

Further, in the area of the upper bulging portion 65 facing the front of the pachinko machine 10, an effect operating unit 75 (specifically, an operation button) manually operated by the player is provided. For example, by manually operating the effect operation unit 75 according to the suggestion displayed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41, the effect content on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41 corresponds to the operation. It will be the production content of.

Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 81 and a notification / effect control device 82 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

The main control device 81 includes a main control board that controls the main control of the game and a power failure monitoring board that monitors the power supply, and the main control board and the power failure monitoring board are formed in a board box 83 made of a transparent resin material or the like. It is housed and constructed. The substrate box 83 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are inseparably connected by a box coupling portion 85 as a separation preventing means (or a coupling means), whereby the substrate box 83 is sealed. Since they are inseparably connected by the box coupling portions 85, the substrate box 83 needs to be destroyed or partially cut off when the internal space of the substrate box 83 is opened. A plurality of box coupling portions 85 are provided on the long side portions of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used to perform the coupling treatment.

Any configuration can be applied to the box connecting portion 85 as long as the box base and the box cover cannot be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the elongated hole constituting the box connecting portion 85, the box base and the box cover can be connected. It is designed so that it cannot be opened and is connected to the box cover. The joining process by the box joining portion 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the joining, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the illegal opening is performed. Even after opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting the locking claw into at least one elongated hole among the plurality of box coupling portions 85. Then, when the board box 83 is opened when a defect occurs in the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box joint 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box joint 85 Cut the connecting part of the box and the connecting part with the box body. As a result, the box base of the board box 83 and the box cover are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the elongated hole of the other box coupling portion 85. If the history of the opening of the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 83 has been opened illegally by looking at the board box 83.

A plurality of coupling pieces 86 are provided on one short side portion of the substrate box 83 so as to project to the side thereof. These coupling pieces 86 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main control device 81, and the coupling pieces 86 and the coupling pieces 87 form a substrate box 83 and a mounting base. The joining process is performed between them.

As a trace means for detecting unauthorized opening of the substrate box 83, a sealing sticker may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the sealing sticker is peeled off from the sticking portion, the adhesive layer of the sealing sticker remains on the substrate box 83 side, and a trace thereof remains. Further, the seal seal is provided with an IC tag that transmits a response wave including identification information to a ring wave of a predetermined frequency, and when the seal seal is removed, the antenna of the IC tag is cut off and the response is described above. It may be configured so that the transmission of waves is impossible.

The notification / effect control device 82 includes a notification / effect control board that controls voice and lamp display and control of the display control device (not shown) according to an instruction from the main control device 81. It is housed in a substrate box 84 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a payout mechanism unit 92 and a control device collecting unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the notification / effect control device 82, and the like from the rear. Have.

The payout mechanism unit 92 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover unit 94, and is a tank 95 in which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the amusement park are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95. It is equipped with a payout device 96 for paying out balls. The game ball paid out from the payout device 96 is discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, the payout mechanism unit 92 is equipped with a back pack board provided with a power switch for turning on and off the power supply while supplying, for example, an AC 24 volt main power supply.

Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal plate 99 on the rotation shaft side of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal plate 99 has an output terminal for outputting a signal when the number of game balls is insufficient in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. Output terminal for outputting a signal each time the machine is rented, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine main body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and a state transition such as an opening / closing execution mode. An output terminal is provided for outputting a signal at the time (or during the transition to the state). Then, through these output terminals, a signal regarding the state of the frame side is output to the management control device on the game hall side. It should be noted that an output terminal for outputting a signal each time a predetermined number of game balls are rented is not required in a so-called cash machine.

The control device collective unit 93 includes a payout control device 97 and a power supply / emission control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power supply / launch control device 98 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 97 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is housed in a board box. In this case, the same fraud suppression means as the board box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the board box of the payout control device 97.

The power supply / launch control device 98 is configured by accommodating a power supply / launch control board in a board box, and the board generates and outputs predetermined electric power required by various control devices and the like, and is further produced by a player. The launch of the game ball is controlled according to the operation of the launch handle 54. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a storage and retention function for various data, and can maintain the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can return to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure. It has become like.

<Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 202 is mounted on the main control board 201 provided in the main control device 81. The MPU 202 is a ROM 203 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 202, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 203 is executed. It is an element having a built-in RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. It should be noted that a configuration may be configured in which a part of the functions of the MPU 202, for example, the function of the ROM 203 and the function of the RAM 204 are provided as another element.

The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, various detection sensors 211a to 211e, etc. provided in the main control device 81 are connected to the input side of the MPU 202. In this case, the power supply / emission control device 98 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205. Further, as a part of various detection sensors 211a to 211e, a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, operating ports 33a, 33b (specifically, the first entry section 33d and the second entry section 33e), a through gate 35, etc. The detection sensors provided in the various prize-winning ball-entry units (payout-compatible ball-entry units) are connected to each other, and each entry is made by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 based on the detection information (detection signal) from these detection sensors. The winning judgment (ball winning judgment) for the ball part is performed. Further, in the MPU 202, the jackpot generation lottery is executed based on the winning of the operating ports 33a and 33b, and the support generation lottery is executed based on the winning of the through gate 35.

A power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, and a notification / effect control device 82 are connected to the output side of the MPU 202. The payout control device 97 outputs a prize ball command based on, for example, a prize-winning determination result to the prize-winning ball-winning portions such as the above-mentioned operating ports 33a and 33b. In this case, the command information storage area 224 of the ROM 203 is referred to when the prize ball command is output. Then, when the winning to the general winning opening 31 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when the winning to the variable winning device 32 is specified, 15 game balls are output. The prize ball command corresponding to the payout is output, and when the winning to the first ball entry section 33d is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output to the second entry section 33e. When the prize is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is output.

Various commands such as a change command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, an ending command, a hold command, and a shift command are output from the main control device 81 to the notification / effect control device 82. In this case, the command information storage area 224 of the ROM 203 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each of the above commands is configured as information on a predetermined number of bytes, and includes various information as information on the predetermined number of bytes.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning drive unit 32c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 32b of the variable winning device 32, an electric accessory driving unit 34b that opens and closes the movable piece 34a of the electric accessory 34, and a main display unit. 43 is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 201, and the MPU 202 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c is executed in the MPU 202 so that the large winning opening 32a is opened and closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the support lottery for the electric accessory 34 is won, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b is executed in the MPU 202 so that the electric accessory 34 is opened and closed. Further, the display control of the main display unit 43 is executed by the MPU 202.

Further, an external output terminal board 99 is connected to the output side of the MPU 202, and through this external output terminal board 99, the management control device (hall computer HC) on the game hall side is informed of the entry into various ball entry sections. Information about lottery results such as jackpots and jackpots is output. This makes it possible for the hall computer HC to grasp the state of the pachinko machine 10 and the like.

The power failure monitoring board 205 relays the main control board 201 and the power supply / emission control device 98, and the power failure monitoring board 205 has a DC stable 24 volt voltage which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 98. The function to monitor is given. The payout control device 97 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

The power supply / launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a playground or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 201, the payout control device 97, and the like is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. do. Further, the power supply / launch control device 98 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 53, and the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

The notification / effect control device 82 has a hold lamp unit 47 provided in the variable display unit 36, a display lamp unit 63 provided in the front door frame 14, and a speaker unit 64 based on various commands input from the main control device 81. Etc. are driven and controlled, and the display control device 212 is controlled.

The display control device 212 executes the display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command input from the notification / effect control device 82. In this case, in the notification / effect control device 82, based on various commands input from the main control device 81, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 (for example, the presence / absence of reach occurrence and the content of the reach effect), the symbol The outline of the stop display mode (the type of combination of symbols that are finally stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display) and the final display mode by the combination of the stop-displayed symbols are specified.

Here, the configuration related to the variable display of the symbol of each game and the content of the variable display will be described. In the following description, FIGS. 6 and 7 will be referred to as appropriate. 6 and 7 are schematic views for explaining the display contents on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41.

The display control device 212 is provided with a character ROM. In the character ROM, data of nine types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" (see FIGS. 6 (a) to 6 (i)) and data of sub-symbols without numbers are attached. (See FIG. 6J) is stored in advance.

As shown in FIG. 7A, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Then, on the display screen 41a, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left) with periodicity.

In the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, on the display screen 41a, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be done. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set on the display screen 41a. Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols with the same number) is formed on one of the effective lines. When the variable display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is completed in this state, a movie for big hit (for example, an opening movie) is displayed as a big hit result.

In view of the fact that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). (2 pattern rows), the middle symbol row Z2 can be referred to as a third symbol row (or a third symbol row).

Of the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to "specific symbols", and when a type 1 jackpot result (16R compatible jackpot result) occurs. For example, a combination of the same specific symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to "non-specific symbols", and when the second type jackpot result (4R compatible jackpot result) occurs, for example, they are the same. The combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed.

The mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be set to be arranged side by side, and the direction of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol row may be set to the vertical direction.

On the display screen 41a, a hold display area NE is set in a portion below the variable display area ME having the variable display area of the upper symbol row, the variable display area of the middle symbol, and the variable display area of the lower symbol. ing. In the hold display area NE, the same number of unit hold display areas Da1 to Da8 as the maximum number of holds when the game ball wins the operating ports 33a and 33b (when the ball enters the ball entry portions 33d and 33e) are provided. A hold number display area Da is provided so as to be arranged in the left-right direction.

Specifically, the maximum number of balls held when the game ball enters the first ball entry unit 33d is 4, and the maximum number of balls held when the game ball enters the second ball entry unit 33e is 4. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a total of eight hold information is stored in the order of winning the first ball entry unit 33d and the second ball entry unit 33e. Corresponding to this, the hold number display area Da includes the first unit hold display area Da1, the second unit hold display area Da2, the third unit hold display area Da3, the fourth unit hold display area Da4, and the fifth unit hold display. The area Da5, the sixth unit hold display area Da6, the seventh unit hold display area Da7, and the eighth unit hold display area Da8 are set.

For example, when the number of holdings (total number of holdings) when the game ball wins the operating ports 33a and 33b is 1, the predetermined holding display image MP is displayed only in the first unit holding display area Da1. , When the number of holdings is 4 when the game ball wins in the operating ports 33a and 33b, the predetermined holding display image MP is displayed in the 1st unit holding display area Da1 to the 4th unit holding display area Da4. It is configured to be. Note that FIG. 6B illustrates a case where the number of reserved items is three.

Further, in the hold display area NE, the hold display image corresponding to the game times to be executed (executed) is arranged side by side with the hold number display area Da (specifically, the first unit hold display area Da1). An execution target display area Db on which the MP is displayed is provided.

When the game round is completed and the game is moved to the next game round, the hold display image MP displayed in the hold number display area Da (first unit hold display area Da1) moves to the execution target display area Db. The hold display image MP displayed in the hold number display area Da is shifted to the lower side.

On the display screen 41a, a special display area OE is set in a portion above the variable display area ME. A display unit KP is provided in the special display area OE, and variable display is possible by switching the display color in the display unit KP. The special display area OE is smaller than the variable display area in each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3, and the display unit KP in the special display area OE is smaller than each symbol (main symbol and sub symbol).

The special display area OE corresponds to the main display unit 43, and when the main display unit 43 performs variable display, the special display area OE also performs variable display. Specifically, the variation display of the display unit KP is performed so that the variation display of the pattern on the main display unit 43 coincides with the variation display start timing and the variation display time. Further, regarding the stop display of the display unit KP (the state in which the display color is not switched and the display color is fixed), the stop display of the pattern on the main display unit 43 and the stop display start timing and stop display time are matched. It is done in this way.

In the present embodiment, the stop display of the display unit KP does not show the result of the winning / failing determination based on the winning of the operating ports 33a and 33b, but a plurality of types of stop display modes of the display unit KP are used. It may be provided so as to clearly or suggest the above result. Further, the display unit KP is not limited to one composed of a single display image, and may be composed of a plurality of display images.

<About various counters>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

The MPU 202 uses various counter information during the game to perform a jackpot generation lottery, a display setting of the main display unit 43, an outline setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41, a display setting of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 8, when determining the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery for generating jackpots and the jackpot type such as the first-class jackpot result and the second-class jackpot result. The jackpot type counter C2 to be used, the reach random number counter C3 used for the reach lottery when the symbol display device 41 deviates and fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the main display unit. As a result display unit for the operation port of 43, a variation type counter CS for determining the variation display time of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 in the variation display area ME of the symbol display device 41 and the display unit KP in the special display area OE are used. There is. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 used for lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 34 of the lower operating port 33b is to be in the electric service open state is used.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 204. In the lottery counter buffer 231, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is used to win prizes in the operating ports 33a and 33b (specifically, the first ball-entry unit 33d or the second ball-entry unit). When a ball enters the 33e) occurs, it is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 as the acquisition information storage means.

The holding ball storage area 232 includes a holding area RE for the operating port and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first area Ra1, a second area Ra2, a third area Ra3, a fourth area Ra4, a fifth area Ra5, a sixth area Ra6, a seventh area Ra7, and an eighth area Ra8, and operates. The jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 according to the winning history of the mouths 33a and 33b (specifically, the history of winning the first ball 33d and the second ball 33e). Each numerical information of the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as hold information in any of the areas Ra1 to Ra8. The reserved information corresponds to special information.

In the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8, when the operating ports 33a and 33b are awarded (specifically, the first ball entry 33d and the second ball entry 33e are entered) a plurality of times in succession. In addition, each numerical information is time-series in the order of 1st area Ra1 → 2nd area Ra2 → 3rd area Ra3 → 4th area Ra4 → 5th area Ra5 → 6th area Ra6 → 7th area Ra7 → 8th area Ra8. It will be stored in. By providing the eight areas Ra1 to Ra8 in this way, the entry history of the game ball into the first entry section 33d and the second entry section 33e is four, that is, to the operating ports 33a and 33b, respectively. Up to a total of 8 winning histories are stored on hold. Further, the reserved ball storage area 232 is provided with a total reserved number storage area, and the total reserved number storage area is acquired and acquired based on the entry into the first entry section 33d or the second entry section 33e. Information for specifying the number of stored pending information is stored.

For example, if only one of the first ball entry section 33d and the second ball entry section 33e is hit, and the number is 4 or more, the maximum number of stored balls related to winning the operating ports 33a and 33b. Is limited to four, but as long as the game ball alternately enters the first ball entry section 33d and the second ball entry section 33e by the distribution means 33g described above, the operating ports 33a and 33b are won. The maximum number of stored items will be increased to eight. That is, in the present embodiment, even in a situation where it is difficult for the lower operating port 33b to win a prize, it is possible to prevent the number of stored information from reaching a plateau at four. ..

The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area Ra1 of the hold area RE when the variable display of the main display unit 43 is started, and is an execution area at the start of one game round. Based on various numerical information stored in the AE, a hit / fail judgment or the like is performed.

More specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to add 1 in order within the range of 0 to 299, reach the maximum value (that is, 299), and then return to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 299). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when a game ball wins a prize in the operating ports 33a and 33b, more specifically, the timing at which the game ball flowing into the ball entry portions 33d and 33e is detected by the detection sensors 211c and 211d. Is stored in the hold ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area 221 as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the pass / fail table will be described.

In the pass / fail table, the address information consisting of binary information and the jackpot numerical information also consisting of binary information are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Specifically, the address information is represented by a decimal number and 10 types of "1" to "10" are set, and the jackpot numerical information is represented by a decimal number "7", "36", "67". , "100", "131", "164", "195", "223", "241", "272" are set, and these address information and jackpot numerical information are one-to-one. It is associated. The numerical value of each jackpot numerical information is included in "0" to "299", which is a numerical range of random number information that can be updated by the jackpot random number counter C1.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the winning / losing lottery means. The number of jackpot numerical information referenced in the low-probability mode is different from the number of jackpot numerical information referenced in the high-probability mode, and the former is smaller than the latter. Specifically, in the low-probability mode, only the jackpot numerical information whose address information is "1" is referred to in the winning / losing lottery, and in the high-probability mode, the jackpot numerical information corresponding to all the address information is referred to in the winning / losing lottery. Referenced. That is, in the low-probability mode, there is one numerical information that wins the jackpot, and in the high-probability mode, there are ten more than in the low-probability mode. As a result, the probability of winning a big hit in the low probability mode is 1/300, whereas the probability of winning a big hit in the high probability mode is 1/30, and the high probability mode is a big hit than the low probability mode. The probability of winning is high. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value (that is, 29), and then return to 0. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when a game ball wins a prize in the operating ports 33a and 33b, more specifically, the timing at which the game ball flowing into the ball entry portions 33d and 33e is detected by the detection sensors 211c and 211d. Is stored in the hold ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204.

The distribution destination of the game result for the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203. Then, as such distribution destinations, a first-class jackpot result (16R-compatible special game result) and a second-class jackpot result (4R-compatible special game result) are set.

If the first-class jackpot result and the second-class jackpot result are won, the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode. This is a jackpot result in which the high-frequency support mode is set until the number of games is the end reference number (specifically, 100 times). After the end reference number of times (specified number of times) has elapsed, the game shifts to the normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. In the following description, the gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode is referred to as a high probability gaming state.

The variable winning device 32 is opened 16 times when the result of the first-class big hit is obtained, and the variable winning device 32 is opened four times when the result of the second-class big hit is obtained. That is, the number of game balls that can be acquired in the opening / closing execution mode is set to be larger in the type 1 jackpot result than in the type 2 jackpot result, and the degree of advantage is set to be different.

In the distribution table corresponding to the first ball entry unit 33d, "0 to 9" corresponds to the first type jackpot result, "10 to 29" corresponds to the second type jackpot result, and the second In the distribution table corresponding to the ball entry unit 33e, "0 to 19" corresponds to the type 1 jackpot result, and "20 to 29" corresponds to the type 2 jackpot result. As a result, the difference is provided so that the distribution based on the ball entering the second ball 33e is more advantageous to the player than the distribution based on the ball entering the first ball 33d.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and when a game ball wins a prize in the operating ports 33a and 33b, more specifically, the timing at which the game ball flowing into the ball entry portions 33d and 33e is detected by the detection sensors 211c and 211d. Is stored in the hold ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204. Then, it is decided whether or not to generate the reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203. However, in the game round that shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, but may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be larger than that in the low-frequency support mode.

Here, the reach display (reach state) includes a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of a symbol (picture), and the open / close execution mode of the variable winning device 32 is a high-frequency winning mode. In the gaming machine in which the stop display result after the variation display is the special display result, the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variation display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) on the symbol display device 41 is started. This is a display state for the player to think that the display state is a variable display state in which the special display result is likely to occur before the display is performed.

In other words, by stopping and displaying some of the symbols among the plurality of symbol rows displayed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high frequency winning mode can be obtained. It is a display state in which a combination of reach symbols that may be established is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are variablely displayed in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a preliminary step to end the variable display of the symbol, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high frequency winning mode is placed on the preset effective line in the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols that may be established, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence.

With reference to FIG. 7, a display mode in the case of the above reach display will be illustrated. In the case of reach display, the fluctuation display of the symbol is first terminated (stopped display) in the upper symbol row Z1, and then the fluctuation display of the symbol is terminated (stopped display) in the lower symbol row Z3. In the state, the reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the same numbers on any of the effective lines L1 to L5. Then, in the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach display is obtained by performing the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2 in the middle row. Then, when the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol having the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2. The variable display of the symbol is finished.

Further, in the reach display, in the state where the combination of the reach symbols is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to reach the reach. Includes those that perform an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen after reducing or hiding the combination of reach symbols. Further, when the reach display is performed, or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to perform the precursor display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. It may be.

The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 202 to determine the variation display time in the main display unit 43 and the variation display time in the variation display area ME and the special display area OE of the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal processing described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, when the symbol display device 41 determines the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired.

When determining the fluctuation display time in the symbol display device 41 or the main display unit 43 (specifically, the result display unit for the operating port), the buffer value of the reach random number counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS, and the display time table storage area of ROM 203. 223 is referenced. Further, in the MPU 202, the stop result in the result display unit for the operation port is determined by using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. The stop result determination table stored in the ROM 203 is used.

The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, reach the maximum value (that is, 199), and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric service holding area 233 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34 to the open state according to the value of the stored electric accessory opening counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 99, the electric accessory 34 is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 100 to 199, the electric accessory 34 is not controlled to the open state.

(About various processes executed by the main controller 81)
Next, the timer interrupt process and the normal process executed in advancing the game in each game time by the MPU 202 in the main control device 81 will be described. In the MPU 202, in addition to the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing, the main processing activated when the power is turned on and the NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are executed. , The description of these various processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is periodically activated by the MPU 202 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S101, the reading process of various winning detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various winning detection sensors connected to the main control device 81 is read, the state of the winning detection sensor is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

After that, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the following step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the following step S104, a winning process for thru accompanying the winning of the thru gate 35 is executed. In the through winning process, it is determined whether or not the through gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, and if the flag is stored, it is stored in the electric service holding area. The value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric service holding area on condition that the number of stored characters on hold is less than 4. Further, the notification / effect control device 82 is subjected to a process for lighting the hold lamp unit 47 of the variable display unit 36 corresponding to the number of hold storages. When the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 235, the winning detection flag for the through gate is deleted and the winning process for the through gate is completed.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, and in the step S105, the winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning of the operating ports 33a and 33b is executed, and the timer interrupt process ends. do.

<Prize processing for operating port>
Here, the winning process for the operating port will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 10 and 11.

In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (winned) the first ball entry unit 33d. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the first ball entry unit 33d, the process proceeds to step S202, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out three game balls is set.

In the following step S203, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output information indicating that the game ball has entered the first ball entry unit 33d to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC grasps that the ball has entered the first ball entry unit 33d. After that, in step S204, information acquisition processing for storing each value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 is performed, and the main winning process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the first ball entry portion 33d, the process proceeds to step S205. In step S205, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (winned) the second entry portion 33e. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second ball entry unit 33e, the process proceeds to step S206, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out four game balls is set. The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S206 is transmitted to the payout control device 97 in the external output process S401 of the normal process described later.

In the following step S207, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output information indicating that the game ball has entered the second ball entry unit 33e to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC grasps that the ball has entered the second ball entry unit 33e. After that, the information acquisition process is performed in step S204, and the main winning process is completed.

If a negative determination is made in the process of step S205, that is, if none of the first ball entry section 33d and the second ball entry section 33e has entered the ball, the main winning process is terminated as it is.

Here, the information acquisition process in step S204 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Information acquisition process>
In the information acquisition process, first, in step S301, the start hold storage number N stored in the hold number storage area FE of the hold ball storage area 232, specifically, the first ball entry unit 33d and the second ball entry unit 33e. It is determined whether or not the start hold storage number N related to the ball entry portion that triggered the information acquisition process is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment). If the start hold storage number N is the upper limit value, the information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the start hold storage number N of the corresponding ball entry portion is incremented by 1 in step S302. At the same time, the total number of holds stored in the hold number storage area FE (hereinafter referred to as the common hold number CRN) is incremented by 1 in step S303.

In the following step S304, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS updated in step S103 are set to the first of the free storage area areas of the operation port hold area RE. Is stored in the storage area of, that is, the storage area corresponding to the common hold number CRN incremented by 1 in step S302.

In the following steps S305 and S306, the notification / effect control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side (sub side), indicates that a prize has been generated in the operating ports 33a and 33b (ball entry into the ball entry portions 33d and 33e). The information acquisition process is terminated by executing the confirmation process for the hold notice and the setting process for the hold command, which are the processes for causing the display control device 212 to recognize and execute the hold notice, which will be described later. The hold command includes information on which of the first ball entry section 33d and the second ball entry section 33e is based on winning a prize.

The hold command set in the hold command setting process in step S306 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process described later. By receiving the hold command, the display control device 212 executes a process for changing the display in the hold number display area Da described above in accordance with the increase in the hold number.

Specifically, when the display control device 212 receives the same command in the display control device 212 via the notification / effect control device 82, the display control device 212 displays the above-mentioned hold display image MP in the hold number display area Da. Execute the process for (for example, adding). In the hold number display area Da, the hold images are sequentially displayed from the left side. For example, if the common hold number CRN is 1, the hold image is displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1 at the left end, and the common hold image is displayed. If the number CRN is 8, the hold image is displayed in the eighth unit hold display area Da8, which is the eighth from the left.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S401 to S406 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S408 and S409 are executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, first, the external signal output processing is executed in step S401. In the external signal output process of step S401, output data such as a timer interrupt process or a command set in the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. In addition, if various commands such as a change command, a type command, a change end command, and other effects commands, a hold command, and a shift command, which will be described later, are set, they are transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82. do.

Next, in step S402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

In the following step S403, a game time control process for controlling the game in each game time is executed. In this game time control process, jackpot determination, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the main display unit 43, and the like are performed.

After executing the game times control process in step S403, the process proceeds to step S404 to execute the game state transition process. Although the details will be described later, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode (high probability game state), and the like by this game state transition process. The details of the game turn control process in step S403 and the game state transition process in step S404 will be described later.

In the following step S405, an electric service support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34 provided in the actuating port unit 33 is executed. In this electric service support process, the electric service is released depending on whether or not the electric service 34 is opened by using the numerical information acquired from the electric service release counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 233 of the RAM 204. A lottery is performed, and when the electric accessory is won in the open state, the electric accessory 34 is opened and closed. In addition, the display control of the accessory display unit 44 is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric service opening lottery.

As described above, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are set as the support modes by the electric accessory 34, and the game state transition process shifts to either support mode. Through this process, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, the high-frequency support mode is set, and when the flag is not set, the low-frequency support mode is set.

In the electric service support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. Then, in the case of the high-frequency support mode, the number of times the electric accessory 34 is opened is set more than in the case of the low-frequency support mode, and once the electric accessory 34 is opened, the number of times the electric accessory 34 is opened is set as compared with the case of the low-frequency support mode. Set a long opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric accessory open state is won and the electric accessory 34 is opened a plurality of times, the next open state is started after one open state is completed. The closing time is set to be shorter than the one-time opening time.

Incidentally, when the mode shifts to the open / close execution mode, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode even if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

After that, in step S406, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, once in a predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that the launch permission signal is input from the power supply / launch control device 98 (that is, the launch operation is performed). , The solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 53 is excited. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In the following step S407, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached.

That is, in step S408, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204. Further, in step S409, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is added by 1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter values are cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 204.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S406 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly. The variable type counter CS can also be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game rotation control process in step S403 will be described with reference to the flowcharts and the like of FIGS. 13 to 16.

In the game time control process, first, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 13, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress. When the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the main game rotation is performed without executing any of the processes after step S502, that is, the game rotation start processing of steps S503 to S506 and the game rotation progress processing of steps S507 to S510. End the control process.

If it is not in the open / close execution mode, in step S502, it is determined whether or not the result display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 43 is in the variable display. If the result display unit for the operation port is not displaying the fluctuation, the process proceeds to step S503. In step S503, it is determined whether or not the final display in the result display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 43 is completed. That is, after the above variation display is completed, the result display is continued for a predetermined period, but if the confirmation display is completed, an affirmative determination is made in the step S503 and the game round. End the control process. That is, the start of the next game is restricted during the confirmation display.

If a negative determination is made in both steps S502 and S503, the process proceeds to the game round start process of steps S504 to S506. In the game round start process, first, in step S504, it is determined whether or not the total number of start hold balls (common hold number CRN) is "0". When the common hold number CRN is "0", it means that the hold information is not stored in the hold ball storage area 232. Therefore, the main game times control process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the common hold number CRN is not "0", the data setting process for setting the data stored in the hold area RE of the hold ball storage area 232 for the variable display is executed in step S505. Further, in step S506, after executing the variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 43 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41, the game round control process is terminated.

Here, the data setting process in step S505 and the fluctuation start process in step S506 will be described in detail. First, the data setting process in step S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Data setting process>
In the data setting process, first, in step S601, among the start hold storage numbers N stored in the hold number storage area FE, the one that is the target of the current setting process and the common hold number CRN are decremented by one. In the following step S602, the data stored in the first area Ra1 of the hold area RE is moved to the execution area AE.

After that, in step S603, a process of shifting the data (that is, the hold information) stored in each area Ra1 to Ra8 of the hold area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process of shifting the data stored in the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8 in order to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first area Ra1 and the second area Ra2 → 1st area Ra1, 3rd area Ra3 → 2nd area Ra2, 4th area Ra4 → 3rd area Ra3, 5th area Ra5 → 4th area Ra4, 6th area Ra6 → 5th area Ra5, 7th area Ra7 → The data in each area is shifted such as 6th area Ra6, 8th area Ra8 → 7th area Ra7.

In the following step S604, a shift command is set, which is information for causing the notification / effect control device 82 to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. After that, this data setting process is terminated. The shift command set in step S604 is transmitted to the display control device 212 via the notification / effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). By receiving the shift command, the display control device 212 executes a process for changing the display in the hold number display area Da for the operation port in accordance with the decrease in the hold number.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start processing in step S506 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S701, a win / fail determination process for determining whether or not the hold information referred to in the current variation start process corresponds to the jackpot winning is executed. Specifically, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for determining the jackpot, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 is grasped. Then, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the low-probability mode, the winning / failing table for the low-probability mode stored in the winning / failing table storage area 221 of the ROM 203 is referred to, and the information grasped above becomes the information corresponding to the jackpot winning. If the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the winning / failing table for the high-probability mode stored in the winning / failing table storage area 221 of the ROM 203 is referred to, and the above-mentioned grasped information is a big hit. Identify whether it is included in the information corresponding to the winning.

In the following step S702, it is determined whether or not the result of the winning / failing determination process in step S701 is the result corresponding to the jackpot winning. If the result corresponds to the jackpot winning, the type determination process is executed in step S703.

In the type determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for type determination, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Further, with reference to the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 222 of the ROM 203, it is specified whether or not the above-identified information for type determination is included in the information corresponding to the type 1 jackpot result. For details, when the hold information corresponds to the entry into the first entry section 33d, the distribution table for the first entry section 33d is referred to, and the hold information is the second entry section 33e. If it corresponds to the entry into the ball, the type is determined by referring to the distribution table for the second entry section 33e.

In the following step S704, it is determined whether or not the type of the current jackpot winning is the type 1 jackpot result based on the information specified in the type determination process in step S703. If it is a first-class jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the first-class jackpot is executed in step S705, and if it is not a first-class jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the second-class jackpot is executed in step S706. Execute the result setting process. Further, if it is determined in step S702 that the jackpot is not won, the stop result setting process for the case of a loss is executed in step S707.

In each stop result setting process of steps S705 to S707, information on the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 43 is referred to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 203. It is specified, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 204. Further, in step S705 and step S706, various types of information (type 1 jackpot flag or type 2 jackpot flag) for specifying in the MPU 202 that the hit / fail determination result of the current game round is a jackpot result are provided in the RAM 204. It is stored in the flag storage area 235.

After executing any of the processes of steps S705 to S707, in step S708, the variable display time setting process for displaying the variable is executed. In the following step S709, the variation command and the type command are set. The fluctuation command includes information on the presence / absence of a jackpot, information on the presence / absence of reach, and information on the fluctuation display time. In addition, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes information on the type 1 jackpot result, information on the type 2 jackpot result, information on the missed result, and the like as information on the game result.

The variation command and the type command set in step S709 are transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 12). The notification / effect control device 82 determines the light emission pattern of the indicator lamp unit 63 and the sound output pattern from the speaker unit 64 in the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and determines the output pattern of the sound from the determined effect. The indicator lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled so that the contents are executed. Further, the notification / effect control device 82 transmits the variation command and the type command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 212 grasps the fluctuation display pattern in the symbol display device 41 in the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and the symbol display device so as to execute the grasped variation display pattern. Display control of 41. After that, in step S710, the variation display of the pattern is started on the operation port display unit of the main display unit 43, and then the variation start processing is ended.

Returning to the description of the game round control process (FIG. 13), when the main display unit 43 is in the variable display, the game round progress process of steps S507 to S510 is executed. In the game round progress process, first, in step S507, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game round has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation display time information stored in the fluctuation display time counter area of the RAM 204 is "0". As described above, the value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 17). Further, the value of the set fluctuation display time information is decremented (subtracted) by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated.

If the variation display time has not elapsed, the variation display process is executed in step S508. In the variable display process, the display mode on the main display unit 43 is changed. After that, the game times control process is terminated.

If the variable display time has elapsed, the confirmation display process is executed in step S509. The confirmation display processing is for confirming and displaying the design of the main display unit 43 based on the stop result set in any of the processes of steps S705 to S707. After the execution of step S509, the game times control process is terminated. The details of the final display process in step S509 will be described later.

<Game state transition process>
Next, the game state transition process in step S404 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the variation display → the confirmation display on the main display unit 43 (specifically, the result display unit for the operation port) of the game round 1 is completed. If it is not the timing when the confirmation display is finished, the game state transition process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, when the confirmation display is finished, in step S803, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game times corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first-class jackpot flag or the second-class jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If any of the above flags is stored, the opening process is executed in step S804. In the opening process, the opening time at the start of the open / close execution mode is set. Then, in step S805, the round counter area RC provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 has a value determined according to the jackpot type, specifically, "16" in the case of the first type jackpot. Set "4" for 2 types of jackpots. The round counter area RC is a counter area for counting the number of times the large winning opening 32a is opened. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the open / close execution mode is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S801, and the process proceeds to step S806. In step S806, the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed. In the large winning opening opening / closing process, when the large winning opening 32a is closed, the variable winning opening drive unit 32c is set to the driving state on condition that the round counter area RC is "1" or more, and the large winning opening is driven. The mouth 32a is opened. When the large winning opening 32a is open, a predetermined time (30 sec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the opening of the large winning opening 32a, or a predetermined number (10 in the present embodiment). On condition that the game balls (pieces) have won a prize, the driving state of the variable winning driving unit 32c is stopped, and the large winning opening 32a is closed.

In the following step S807, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is “0”. If the value of the round counter area RC is not "0", the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the value of the round counter area RC is "0", the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S808.

In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode, and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. In addition, these high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are terminated when the game times are continued a specified number of times (100 times) or when a big hit is won during the specified number of times, and then the winning / failing lottery mode is a low-probability mode. The support mode shifts to the normal gaming state, which is the low frequency support mode.

After that, in step S809, after executing the end processing of the open / close execution mode, the main game state transition process is ended. In the end processing of the open / close execution mode, the jackpot flag stored in the various flag storage areas 235 is erased, and an ending command as a command indicating that the open / close execution mode has ended is output to the notification / effect control device 82. Perform processing.

The notification / effect control device 82 displays a moving image (ending movie) indicating that the opening / closing execution mode ends based on this ending command. This moving image includes information that the open / close execution mode ends and the game shifts to the high-probability game state.

In the present embodiment, a device is devised to suppress the monotonousness of the game progress by changing the progress speed of the game according to the game situation. Here, the variation display time setting process shown in step S708 (see FIG. 15) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Variable display time setting process>
In the variable display time setting process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the winning or losing lottery has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the first special jackpot flag or the second special jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, if the result of the winning / failing lottery is a wrong result, the process proceeds to step S902. In step S902, it is determined whether or not the reach display is generated by the symbol display device 41 in this game round. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, an affirmative determination is made in step S902 as the occurrence of reach display. When specifying the presence / absence of reach occurrence using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to.

If an affirmative determination is made in either step S901 or step S902, the process proceeds to step S903, and the current variation is referred to by the reach generation variation display time table stored in the display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203. The fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the type counter CS is acquired, and in the following step S904, the fluctuation display time information is collected in the fluctuation display time counter area (variation display time measuring means) provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. Set to. After that, this setting process ends.

That is, in the present embodiment, the reach display is executed when the result of the winning / failing lottery is the jackpot winning result or when the result of the winning / failing lottery is out of order and the lottery for generating reach is won. ing.

Here, the reach display is provided with a normal reach display and a super reach display in which the variable display modes are different from each other. In the variation display time table for reach generation, variation display time information corresponding to each of the normal reach display and the super reach display is set, and by referring to the table, the variation display time information corresponding to each reach display can be obtained. To be acquired. Regarding the determination of the reach display type, a table corresponding to the reach display type and the value of the variable type counter CS is provided, and by referring to the table, the value of the variable type counter CS this time can be used. The corresponding reach display is determined.

More specifically, the variation display time table for reach generation corresponds to the type of jackpot. Specifically, in the case of the type 1 jackpot result, the variable display time is set so that the combination of specific symbols can be stopped and displayed, and in the case of the type 2 jackpot result, the combination of non-specific symbols is displayed. The variable display time is set so that the stop display can be performed. Incidentally, the reference variable display time table for reach generation is common to both the normal gaming state and the high-accuracy gaming state.

Returning to the description of step S902, if a negative determination is made in step S902, the process proceeds to step S905. In step S905, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the highly accurate gaming state. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S905, the process proceeds to step S906, and the variation type counter of this time is referred to with reference to the variation display time table for non-reach generation corresponding to the high probability gaming state stored in the display time table storage area 223. The fluctuation display time corresponding to the value of CS is acquired, and the fluctuation display time information is set in the fluctuation display time counter area in step S906. After that, this setting process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S905, the process proceeds to step S907, and the variation type of this time is referred to with reference to the variation display time table for non-reach generation corresponding to the normal game state stored in the display time table storage area 223. The fluctuation display time corresponding to the value of the counter CS is acquired, and the fluctuation display time information is set in the fluctuation display time counter area in step S906. After that, this setting process ends.

In the present embodiment, the fluctuation display time information when the reach does not occur is set to be, for example, 8 sec. Further, the fluctuation display time information when the reach does not occur is set so that the fluctuation display time becomes shorter as the number of common hold number CRNs increases. Specifically, when the number of holdings is 3 or more, the time is set to be shorter than 8sec (for example, 4sec) (holding number shortening function). Furthermore, when the high-probability game state (support mode is the high-frequency support mode), the number of pending information is the same as when the normal game state (support mode is the low-frequency support mode). The variation display time table for non-reach is set so that a shorter variation display time is selected in comparison in some cases.

As described above, the variation display time of each game is set with the presence / absence of reach occurrence, the type of reach display, the number of stored pending information (the number of subsequent pending information), the value of the variation type counter CS, and the like as parameters. It is decided (so-called time saving function). However, the variable display time of each game is set with the contents of other reserved information, specifically, the information for jackpot determination, the information for type determination, and the information for reach determination included in the other reserved information as parameters. Determined without doing.

In recent years, some pachinko machines are set so that the number of prize balls related to the ball entry section to which the electric accessory is attached is "3" or more. In this type of gaming machine, the electric accessory picks up a large number of gaming balls, so that the player can be given more benefits than expected. Therefore, in order to avoid such an event, the opening time in the high-frequency winning mode is suppressed so that the number of balls entering the electric accessory is not excessive, and the variable display time per game is adjusted accordingly. The degree of shortening of is determined. In other words, suppressing the occurrence of ball entry is a factor that hinders the shortening of the variable display time. Further, in such a configuration, it is possible to increase the number of balls held in a highly accurate game state by launching a game ball in accordance with the opening of the electric accessory by technical intervention such as so-called stop striking. If such an action becomes easy, there is a concern that the function of improving the digestion speed will not be utilized well and the speedy progress of the game will not be realized.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second entry section 33e is set to "1". By setting the number of prize balls for the entry of "1" to "1", the opening time of the electric accessory 34 is almost doubled (about "6 sec" in the present embodiment) as compared with the conventional gaming machine. Even if it is configured to be left as it is, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a privilege exceeding the above-mentioned assumption. That is, even if most of the launched game balls enter the electric accessory 34 → the second entry portion 33e, the above-mentioned inconvenience caused by the configuration does not occur. Therefore, the above-mentioned time saving function can be suitably exerted, and the digestion speed of the hold in the high-probability gaming state can be improved.

Here, in the present embodiment, the effect related to the hold notice suggesting the content of the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 is before the game round related to the hold information is started. It is configured to be executed. The production corresponding to the hold information that has not yet been the target of the lottery is executed at the timing before the game times related to the hold information. According to the above configuration, not only the game for confirming the lottery result of the hold information corresponding to the game times currently in progress, but also the result when the hold information to be the lottery target later becomes the lottery target is included in the content of the above effect. A game of confirming or predicting according to the situation is added, and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be increased.

<About hold notice>
Next, the flow of the hold notice will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. The hold notice is given by using the fixed display time in the game times before the game times (specific game times) that are the target of the hold notice. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 18 (a1) and 18 (a2), after the variation display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is completed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41, as shown in FIG. 18 (a3). It is configured to raise and display a plurality of effect images (bubble images) imitating bubbles from the lower end of the display screen 41a.

This bubble image is an opaque or semi-transparent display image, and is displayed on the front side of the symbol in a state where the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed. Therefore, when the bubble image passes in front of the symbol, the symbol is hidden behind the bubble image. However, the passing area of the bubble image does not overlap with the display unit KP in the special display area OE, or even if it overlaps, the amount is small, and the visibility of the display unit KP is not hindered or less likely to be hindered by the bubble image. ..

This notice display effect is executed over a plurality of game times prior to the specific game times. Specifically, two times are set as the number of times the advance notice effect is executed, and each game time is performed from the game time two times before the specific game time. That is, as shown in FIGS. 18 (a1) to 18 (a3), after displaying the bubble image in the definite display in the game times two times before, as shown in FIGS. 18 (a4) to (a6), the bubble image is displayed. The bubble image is displayed in the same manner in the final display in the next game.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 18 (a7) to 18 (a10), in the specific game times, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed with the stop result corresponding to the result of the hit / fail determination. At that time, the bubble image as a hold notice is not displayed in the confirmation display of the specific game times. Note that FIG. 18 shows a case where the jackpot result or the missed reach result is notified via the reach effect after the fluctuation of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is started as the specific game times.

As the process related to the hold notice, the confirmation process for the hold notice (step S305 in FIG. 11) is set, and this process is for the operation port set as a part of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). The winning process (FIG. 10), more specifically, is executed as a part of the information acquisition process in step S204. That is, the confirmation process for the hold notice is executed based on the winning of the operating ports 33a and 33b. Hereinafter, the confirmation process for the hold notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Confirmation process for hold notice>
In the confirmation process for the hold notice, in step S1001, the start hold storage number N and the common hold number CRN stored in the hold number storage area FE of the hold ball storage area 232 are read, and the information on the hold number is transmitted to the MPU 202. Store in the register. After that, in steps S1002 to S1006, it is confirmed whether or not the pending information acquired by this winning is included in the information on winning the jackpot.

Specifically, first, in step S1002, among the pending information acquired in step S304 (FIG. 11) based on the current winning of the operating ports 33a and 33b, the information for jackpot determination, that is, the acquired jackpot random number counter. Grasp the value of C1.

In the following step S1003, it is determined whether or not the mode is in the low probability mode. Specifically, by determining whether or not the high-probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, it is determined whether or not the current winning / losing lottery mode is the low-probability mode. In the case of the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1004, and the information for jackpot determination (value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S1002 with reference to the hit / fail table for the low probability mode corresponds to the jackpot winning. Identify if they are included in the group. Further, in the case of the high probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1005, and the jackpot determination information (value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S1002 is used as the jackpot winning by referring to the winning / failing table for the high probability mode. Identify whether it is included in the set information.

After step S1004 or step S1005, the process proceeds to step S1006, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination information (value of the jackpot random number counter C1) grasped in step S1002 corresponds to the jackpot winning. If the jackpot winning is supported, the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1007, and the confirmation process for this hold notice is terminated as it is.

In the process of step S1007, the information for determining the jackpot type among the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the current prize, that is, the value of the acquired jackpot type counter C2 is grasped, and the distribution table is displayed. Refer to it to determine the type of jackpot. Therefore, the information stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1007 includes information related to the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probabilistic jackpot, etc.).

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1006, the process proceeds to step S1008. In step S1008, out of the pending information acquired in step S304 based on the current winning of the operating ports 33a and 33b, the information for determining the out-of-reach, that is, the value of the acquired reach random number counter C3 is grasped.

In the following step S1009, the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to and grasped in step S1008. It is specified whether the information for reach determination (value of the reach random number counter C3) is included in the information set as the reach winning.

After executing the process of step S1009, the process proceeds to step S1010, and it is determined whether or not the reach determination information (value of the reach random number counter C3) grasped in step S1008 corresponds to the reach generation. When the reach generation is supported, the confirmation process ends after the reach generation information is stored in the register of the MPU 202 in step S1011. On the other hand, if it does not correspond to the reach occurrence, the main confirmation process is terminated as it is.

The jackpot information and reach generation information stored in the register of the MPU 202 in steps S1007 and S1011 are referred to in the setting process of the hold command in step S306 in the information acquisition process (FIG. 11), and the jackpot and reach generation are generated in the setting process. Set the hold command so that it includes information about the presence or absence of and the type of jackpot.

Here, in the present embodiment, the confirmation display time when the pattern is confirmed and displayed on the main display unit 43 is set in association with the result specified by the confirmation process for the hold notice. That is, when the hold notice is executed, the length of the fixed display time is changed in order to secure the period (effect period) for displaying the bubble image. Therefore, in the following, first, the fixed display time will be described, and then, a specific control process for changing the fixed display time will be described.

<About confirmed display time>
As shown in FIG. 20, the game times in the main display unit 43 start the variable display of the pattern based on the winning / failing lottery, and then the variable display of the pattern is displayed in a manner corresponding to the result of the winning / failing lottery. The confirmation display is performed once. That is, the game times consist of a variable display of the pattern and a definite display of the variable display of the pattern.

Here, the final display of the pattern is not completed by the end of the variable display, but is completed by the continuous display of the pattern in the mode corresponding to the result of the winning / failing lottery over a predetermined final display time. This is for clarifying the boundary between the subsequent game and the subsequent game while ensuring the time for the player to recognize the game result.

For this reason, it is confirmed that the next game round (variable display) is started after the variable display of the pattern is started, after the variable display time, which is the actual execution period of the game round, has elapsed. It will be after the display time has passed. In the following, the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the next game round, that is, the total period of the execution period and the waiting period of the game round is referred to as "game time related to one game round". Incidentally, the term "confirmed" is based on the fact that the stop display at the confirmed display time is performed assuming that the display content (picture) is unchanged and a definite stop result is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the present embodiment, the fixed display time is divided into a first fixed display time and a second fixed display time. Specifically, the first confirmed display time is from the start of the confirmed display time to the middle of the confirmed display time, and the remaining time until the end of the confirmed display time is the second confirmed display time. The time length of the first fixed display time is set based on the specific result specified in the confirmation process for the hold notice. The type of length as the first fixed display time is provided as a normal time for normal use, a special time longer than the normal time, and a time reduction time shorter than the normal time. On the other hand, the second final display time is set to a predetermined time length regardless of the specific result.

On the main display unit 43, the same pattern is continuously stopped and displayed at both the first fixed display time and the second fixed display time. That is, the pattern stopped and displayed as the stop result is continuously displayed even after the first confirmed display time has elapsed, and the stop display ends when the second confirmed display time elapses. At that time, if there is pending information that is not yet subject to the lottery, the variable display of the pattern is started after the lapse of the second confirmed display time, and conversely, if there is no pending information that is not yet subject to the lottery. The stop display state continues as it is even after the lapse of the second confirmation display time.

In the following description, in order to distinguish between the definite display performed at the first definite display time and the definite display performed at the second definite display time, the former is referred to as "first definite display" and the latter. May be referred to as "second definite display".

Next, the control process for changing the fixed display time will be described. In the present embodiment, a confirmation display process (step S509 in FIG. 13) is set as the process. This process is executed by the game time control process (FIG. 13) set as a part of the normal process (FIG. 12), and is executed at the start of the confirmation display. Hereinafter, the confirmation display process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Process for confirmation display>
In the confirmation display process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the result display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 43 is in the second confirmation display. If the second confirmation display is not in progress, in step S1102, it is determined whether or not the result display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 43 is in the first confirmation display.

If a negative determination is made in step S1102, it means that the confirmation display has not been started on the main display unit 43. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1103, and the stop start processing for starting the first confirmation display is executed. Here, the stop start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the stop start processing, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the special setting flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The special setting in-progress flag is set when the first fixed display time is set to the special time for the hold notice.

If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1202 whether or not the special setting flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The special setting flag is set when the first fixed display time should be set to the special time.

If a negative determination is made in step S1202, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the subsequent hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 232 corresponds to the jackpot or reach occurrence. Here, all the pending information acquired after this step is executed at the final display timing of the previous game times is targeted. The process of step S1203 is performed with reference to the information stored in the register of the MPU 202, that is, the result of the confirmation process for the hold notice. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot generation information (step S1007) or reach generation information (step S1011) is stored in the register as corresponding to the subsequent hold information. Then, if any of the information is stored, a positive judgment is made, and if none of the information is stored, a negative judgment is made.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, the process proceeds to step S1204 to execute a process of grasping the number of executions DN. The number of executions DN indicates the number of times that the first fixed display time is set as a special time. Here, the process of grasping the number of executions DN will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23A.

In the process of grasping the number of executions DN, first, in step S1301, the common hold number CRN stored in the hold number storage area FE is read, and the common hold number CRN is grasped. The common hold number CRN in this case is not the one at that time, but the common hold number when the hold information (special hold information) corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot or reach is stored. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 23B, after the timing tA which is the previous setting timing, the operation ports 33a and 33b are won at the timing tB and the timing tC, and the timing tB ahead of them. Assuming that the hold information stored in is the special hold information, in step S1301 above, the common hold number CRN 2 of the timing tB is grasped.

After the execution of step S1301, the common hold number CRN grasped in step S1302 is compared with the preset number AN (twice in the present embodiment) set as the execution number of the hold notice, and the common hold is performed. It is determined whether or not the number CRN is equal to or greater than the set number of times AN.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1302 (for example, when the common hold number CRN is 4), the set number AN is set as the execution number DN as it is in step S1303. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1302 (for example, when the common hold CRN is 1), the common hold number CRN is set as the execution number DN instead of the set number AN in step S1304. In this way, when the common hold number CRN is less than the set number AN, by reducing the number of execution number DNs according to the number of common hold number CRNs, even if the common hold number CRN is less than the set number AN, the hold notice is announced. It can be executed.

Returning to the explanation of the stop start processing (FIG. 22), after grasping the execution count DN in step S1204, in the following step S1205, the hold information before the special hold information is set within the range of the execution count DN. Determine if there is a response to a jackpot or reach. Also in this step, as in the case of step S1203, the information stored in the register of the MPU 202, that is, the result of the confirmation process for the hold notice is performed.

In this step, for example, when the number of executions DN is 2, the specific result (result of the confirmation process for the hold notice) regarding the hold information for the two times before the special hold information is referred to, and the hold information is included. It is determined whether or not there is a jackpot or a reach corresponding to the occurrence of the hit. If any of the reserved information corresponds to a jackpot or reach occurrence, a negative judgment is made, and conversely, if none of the reserved information corresponds to a big hit or reach occurrence, a positive judgment is made. .. Incidentally, the reason why this step is provided is to prevent a game round of a jackpot or reach occurrence unrelated to the hold notice from occurring during the execution of the hold notice. As a result, the correlation between the hold notice and the game times can be clarified, and it becomes possible to easily convey the effect intention of the hold notice to the player.

If a negative determination is made in step S1205, a lottery is performed in step S1206 to determine whether or not to set the first finalized display time to a special time. That is, on the condition that the specific game times corresponding to the jackpot or the missed reach are reserved, and there is no game times corresponding to the jackpot or the missed reach in the game times before the specific game times within the range of the number of executions DN. , Whether or not to execute the hold notice is decided by lottery.

Specifically, a lottery for whether or not to give notice of hold is performed with reference to the lottery table stored in the ROM 203. Regarding the lottery table, the lottery table for jackpots that is referred to when the pending information that triggered it corresponds to the jackpot, and the lottery table that is referred to when the pending information that triggered it is out and corresponds to normal reach. It is roughly divided into a lottery table for normal reach and a lottery table for super reach that is referred to when the pending information that triggered the event corresponds to super reach. As a result, the appearance probability of the hold notice can be made different depending on the content corresponding to the hold information, for example, the execution frequency of the hold notice increases in the order of the out-of-normal reach, the out-of-super reach, and the jackpot. As the lottery value used for the pass / fail lottery, an existing counter value such as a jackpot random number counter C1 may be used in combination, or a dedicated counter value for the pass / fail lottery may be provided.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, since the main control device 81 determines whether or not the hold notice is possible as described above, the notification / effect control device 82 and the display control device 212, which are the control devices on the sub side, give the hold notice. No processing such as whether or not it is possible is executed.

If it is determined in step S1207 that the lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S1208, and the execution count counter DC is set in the execution count counter area provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. Here, the execution count DN is set as the value of the execution count counter DC. The execution count counter DC is a counter for counting the number of executions in which the first fixed display time is set as a special time.

In the following step S1209, the wait count counter WC is set in the wait count counter area provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. When the common hold number CRN is larger than the execution number DN, it is necessary to wait for the special setting of the fixed display time. The wait number counter WC is a counter for counting the number of game times during the waiting. In this step, a subtraction value obtained by subtracting the execution count DN from the common hold count CRN is set as the value of the wait count counter WC.

After the execution of step S1209, in step S1210, special setting flags are set (stored) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. In the following step S1211, it is determined whether or not the value of the waiting count counter WC is 0. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1211, the special setting flag is set in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 in step S1212.

In the following step S1213, "750" (corresponding to 1.5 sec) is set in the first fixed display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. The count value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. As a result, the first fixed display time is set to 1.5 sec as a special period.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the start of the confirmation display, it is determined whether or not the hold information corresponding to the jackpot or reach occurrence is specified in the confirmation process for the hold notice, and based on the judgment result. It is configured to set the first confirmed display time of the confirmed display. As a result, when the hold information corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot or the reach occurs during the variable display, the result can be quickly reflected in the final display time of the final display.

After the execution of step S1213, the value of the execution count counter DC is decremented by 1 and updated in step S1214.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1211, that is, if the value of the wait count counter WC is not 0, the value of the wait count counter WC is decremented by 1 and updated in step S1215. In the following step S1216, it is determined whether or not the common hold number CRN stored in the hold number storage area FE is equal to or more than a predetermined value K preset as the time saving set number. The time reduction setting number K is for shortening the time of the first fixed display time based on the common hold number CRN, and is set to 3, which is the same as the setting number for variable display in the present embodiment.

If a negative determination is made in step S1216, “100” (corresponding to 0.2 sec) is set in the first fixed display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S1217. As a result, the first fixed display time is set to 0.2 sec as the normal time. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1216, "0" (corresponding to 0 sec) is set in the first confirmed display time counter area in step S1218. As a result, the first fixed display time is set to 0 sec as the time saving time.

After the execution of steps S124, S1217, and S1218, in step S1219, the confirmation display (first confirmation display) of the pattern is started on the display unit for the operation port of the main display unit 43, and then the processing at the start of this stop is completed. do.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in steps S1203 and S1207, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1205, the process proceeds to step S1216, and the first fixed display time is set to either the normal time or the time reduction time based on the common hold number CRN. Set to.

Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, that is, when only the special setting flag among the special setting flag and the special setting flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, the subsequent game times. In order to set the first confirmed display time to a special time, it means that the waiting period is in progress. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1211 to determine whether or not the standby is completed, and the process after step S1212 or the process after step S1215 is executed according to the result.

In this way, by skipping the processes of steps S1203 to S1210 when an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, the holding destination in step S1203 is held while the special setting flags are stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. Execution of a specific result judgment process is restricted. As a result, even if new pending information corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot or reach occurs during the waiting period, it is suppressed that it is reflected in the setting of the first confirmed display time, and the setting is duplicated or changed in the middle. It becomes possible to suppress.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the special setting flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, the process proceeds to step S1220, and whether or not the value of the execution count counter DC is 0. Is determined. If the value of the execution count counter DC is not 0, that is, if the game rounds for the execution count DN determined in steps S1303 and S1304 of FIG. 23 have not been completed, the process proceeds to step S1213, and the first finalized display time is displayed again. Is set to a special time (1.5 sec). As a result, before the specific game round is started, the first fixed display time is set to the special time in each game round for the number of executions DN.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1220, that is, if the number of game times for which the first confirmed display time should be a special time reaches the execution number DN, the process proceeds to step S1221 and the game is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. Clear the special setting flag and the special setting flag that have been set. After that, the process proceeds to step S1216, and the processes after step S1216 are executed. That is, when the start timing of the confirmation display is reached when the value of the execution count counter DC reaches 0 (when the start timing of the confirmation display of the specific game times is reached), either the normal time or the time saving time is reached. Is set to the first confirmed display time.

Returning to the description of the confirmation display process (FIG. 21), after the execution of step S1103, the first stop display command is set in step S1104, and the final confirmation display process ends. The first stop display command includes information regarding the length of the first fixed display time. The set first stop display command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) in the normal process (FIG. 12).

The notification / effect control device 82 determines the light emission pattern of the display lamp unit 63 and the sound output pattern from the speaker unit 64 in the game round based on the received first stop display command, and determines the output pattern of the sound from the determined effect. The indicator lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled so that the contents are executed. Further, the notification / effect control device 82 transmits the first stop display command to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form.

The display control device 212 grasps the length of the first fixed display time based on the received first stop display command. Then, the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the stop display state of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the display unit KP is continued according to the grasped length. Further, the display control device 212 grasps the stop display timing of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 in the game round based on the received first stop display command, and at that timing, all of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The symbol display device 41 is controlled so as to stop and display the symbol of. Further, the display unit KP in the special display area OE is also controlled so that the stop display is started based on the first stop display command.

By the way, in the gaming machine, when the symbol in the variable display area ME of the symbol display device 41 is stopped and displayed, the symbol in the final stop row (symbol row Z2 in the present embodiment) is not suddenly stopped, but the variable display speed. It is common to stop gently while lowering. Under such a situation, in the present embodiment, for example, in response to the display control device 212 receiving the first stop display command, the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 (final stop row) are started to be stopped. If it is configured as, the time required for the symbol to stop is shortened, and the stop display time is substantially shortened.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 including the final stop row are stopped (temporarily stopped) before receiving the first stop display command, and then the first stop display command is received. Based on this, the temporarily stopped symbol is configured to be finally stopped (confirmed display). In this case, the timing of the temporary stop is determined based on the information of the fluctuation display time included in the fluctuation command from the main control device 81, and the type of the symbol to be temporarily stopped is determined based on the type command from the main control device 81. do. These determinations may be made by the notification / effect control device 82 or by the display control device 212.

The display mode of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in the temporary stop is different from that in the definite display. For example, at least one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 gently reciprocates and finely moves, or at least a part of a character such as an octopus (see FIG. 6) constituting the main symbol or the sub symbol is moving. In other words, the temporary stop is performed so as to maintain an incomplete stopped state, although the design seems to be stopped at first glance (stop display). On the other hand, the confirmation display is performed so that the reciprocating fine movement and the movement of the character are not performed and the character is completely stopped. It should be noted that the temporary stop and the definite display may be configured so that the display modes of the two are not different from each other and their identification is impossible or difficult.

On the other hand, unlike the case of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the display unit KP in the special display area OE is displayed and controlled so as to suddenly stop from the variable display state. This is because the mode of the variable display and the stop display of the display unit KP matches that of the pattern on the main display unit 43. Therefore, when viewed in relation to the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the display unit KP still continues the variable display when the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are temporarily stopped, and the final display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 starts. At the same time, the display unit KP is also stopped and displayed.

Returning to the description of the confirmation display process (FIG. 21), when an affirmative determination is made in step S1102, that is, when the first confirmation display is in progress, the settings are made in steps S1213, S1217, and S1218 of FIG. 22 in step S1105. It is determined whether or not the first confirmed display time has elapsed. When the first fixed display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S1106, and “250” (corresponding to 0.5 sec) is set in the first fixed display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. The count value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. As a result, the second final display time is set to 0.5 sec. The second finalized display time is set independently of the specific result specified in the confirmation process for holding notice (FIG. 19), and is uniformly set to 0.5 sec.

After the execution of step S1106, the second stop display command is set in step S1107, and the final confirmation display process ends. The set second stop display command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) in the normal process (FIG. 12).

The second stop display command includes information regarding the length of the second fixed display time, and the notification / effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 use the second stop display command based on the received second stop display command. 2 The start timing of the confirmation display and the length of the second confirmation display time are grasped so that the confirmation display of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 and the display unit KP ends 0.5 sec after receiving the second stop display command. In addition, the symbol display device 41 is controlled.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, that is, if the second confirmation display is in progress, it is determined in step S1108 whether or not the second confirmation display time set in step S1106 has elapsed. When the second confirmation display time has elapsed, in step S1109, the confirmation display (second confirmation display) of the pattern on the operation port display unit of the main display unit 43 is terminated, and then the final stop start processing is terminated. do. If a negative determination is made in steps S1105 and S1108, the final confirmation display process is terminated as it is.

<About the electrical configuration of the notification / effect control device 82 and the display control device 212>
Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 5, the electrical configuration of the notification / effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 will be supplementarily described.

The MPU 242 is mounted on the notification / effect control board 241 provided in the notification / effect control device 82. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 242, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 243 is executed. A certain RAM 244 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are built in. It is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 242, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to the MPU of other control devices.

The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242, and game times control such as a variation command, a type command, a first stop display command, and a second stop display command already described from the main control device 81. Command (game turn control information) is received. In addition, it receives hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as shift commands and hold commands, and open / close execution mode commands (open / close execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

As described above, the hold lamp unit 47 provided in the variable display unit 36, the display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 provided in the front door frame 14, and the display control device 212 are connected to the output side of the MPU 242. ing. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 81 to the notification / effect control device 82 are transmitted to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form as it is.

The display control device 212 includes a display control board on which an MPU, a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, and a video RAM, which are elements in which a program ROM and a work RAM are combined into chips, are mounted. The MPU of the display control device 212 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 81 via the notification / effect control device 82, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP (specifically). Is to generate an internal command for VDP). More specifically, the MPU executes a process of grasping the variation display pattern of each game time in the symbol display device 41 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 81 via the notification / effect control device 82. At the same time, the drawing process for the VDP 255 is executed according to the processing result. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41.

The program ROM is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for a background image. The work RAM is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU. These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since VDP is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP adjusts the timings of the MPU, the video RAM, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 256 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM.

<Explanation of the production of each game>
Here, the outline of the game effect (interlocking effect) using the display screen 41a will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 25.

When the game round is started, the high-speed fluctuation display is first started for all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In this case, it is difficult or impossible to recognize which symbol is displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 24A, the variation display mode of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display in which the player can recognize the symbol displayed in the variation. Then, as shown in FIG. 24B, the variation display of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is completed, and the variation display mode of the lower symbol sequence Z3 is switched from the high-speed variation display to the low-speed variation display. Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (c), the variable display of the lower symbol sequence Z3 ends.

After the end of the fluctuation of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, a stop display time is provided for maintaining the stop display and waiting for a predetermined period. At the stop display time, a definite display is performed to clearly indicate to the player the game result of the current game times. Then, when the confirmed display time elapses while the combination of the symbols (specific symbol or non-specific symbol) corresponding to the jackpot result is stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, the jackpot result is generated and then opened and closed. Move to execution mode. The stop display time is composed of a temporary stop time for temporary stop and a fixed display time for main stop. Of these, the point of giving a hold notice using the fixed display time has already been explained.

In the present embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned hold notice, (1) a window step-up notice effect as a first-class notice effect and (2) a character passage notice as a second-type notice effect are displayed on the display screen 41a. It is configured to do. These notice effects do not suggest the presence or absence of a jackpot or reach related to later game times as in the hold notice, but suggest the presence or absence of a jackpot or reach in the game times in which those notice effects are executed. It is supposed to be done.

First, the window step-up notice effect as the first type notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 25 (a). In the window step-up notice effect, as shown in FIG. 25 (a1), the window image 301 partitioned in a rectangular shape is displayed as an effect image. The window image 301 is opaque or translucent, and a predetermined character, character, or the like is displayed inside the window image 301.

In the window step-up notice production, the production content is configured to be upgraded (promoted) in stages. Specifically, in addition to providing a mode in which the window image 301 is displayed as step 1, as shown in FIG. 25 (a2), a mode in which a window image 302 larger than the window image 301 is displayed is provided as step 2. Further, as shown in FIG. 25 (a3), as step 3, a window image 303 larger than the window image 302 is displayed. That is, when the preview video of step 3 is displayed, the degree of expectation that a big hit result is the highest is the highest.

The window image 302 of step S2 is displayed so as to cover the window image 301 from the front side after the window image 301 of step 1 is displayed. Further, the window image 303 in step S3 is displayed so as to cover the window image 302 from the front side after the window image 302 in step 2 is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 25, in order to make it easy to understand that the window images 301 to 303 are displayed in order, a mode in which the upper window image covers a part of the lower window image is described. It may be a mode that covers the entire window image.

As shown in FIG. 25 (c), the window step-up notice effect is performed by using the period from the start of the variable display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 to the middle of the high-speed variable display. Here, the window images 301 to 303 are displayed on the front side of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are hidden behind in the area overlapping the window images 301 to 303. However, at that time, each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed in a high-speed fluctuation display, and it is difficult or impossible to recognize which symbol is in the variable display in the first place, so that practical inconvenience is unlikely to occur. The display units KP in the special display area OE do not overlap, or even if they overlap, the amount is small, and the display units KP are prevented from being difficult to see or invisible by the window images 301 to 303.

Next, the character passage advance notice effect as the second type advance notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 25 (b). In the character passage notice effect, the effect image 304 imitating a fish is displayed so as to cross the display screen 41a. Specifically, the effect image 304 appearing from the right end of the display screen 41a advances in the same direction (left direction) as the variable display direction of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and then goes out of the display screen 41a from the left end of the display screen 41a. It is displayed so that it disappears. Although not shown, as a character passage notice effect, there is also a mode in which the effect image 304 appears from the left end of the display screen 41a and proceeds in the direction opposite to the variable display direction (right direction) of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Has been done. In the present embodiment, the appearance rate is lower when the effect image 304 advances to the right, and the degree of expectation for a jackpot result is higher.

As shown in FIG. 25 (c), this character passage notice effect is performed by utilizing the period of the high-speed fluctuation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 so as not to overlap with the type 1 notice effect. The effect image 304 is displayed on the front side of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, but does not overlap with the display unit KP, or even if they overlap, the amount is small.

Unlike the case of the hold notice, the notification / effect control device 82 and the display control device 212, which are the control devices on the sub side, determine whether or not the window step-up notice effect and the character passage notice effect are executed. Specifically, in order to associate the jackpot result with the expected degree, the jackpot information included in the fluctuation command from the main control device 81 is referred to, but the notification / effect control device 82 and the like independently perform the advance notice execution lottery. The notification / effect control device 82 or the display control device 212 is configured to make a final decision in consideration of the result of the above and the overlap with other effects. In this way, when executing a plurality of types of advance notice effects, the decision-making authority is assigned to each control device, thereby avoiding concentration of the control load due to the diversification of the advance notice effects.

<Processing related to various productions>
As described above, in the present embodiment, the outline of the variation display mode of the symbol on the display screen 41a is specified by the notification / effect control device 82 with reference to the command from the main control device 81, and based on the specific result. The details of the variable display mode are grasped by the display control device 212. Specifically, in the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82, the variation display control process is executed as a part of the periodic process started in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec), and the variation display of the symbol is displayed by this variation display control process. The outline of the aspect and the like are specified. Here, the variation display control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 26.

<Variable display control processing>
In the variation display control process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the confirmation display flag is stored in various flag storage areas (not shown) provided in the RAM 244. The confirmation display flag is set when the symbols in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and the display unit KP of the special display area OE are confirmed and displayed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1401, it is determined in step S1402 whether or not the game is being played, that is, whether or not the symbol display device 41 is executing the variable display to the final display of the symbol for one game. do. If it is determined that the game is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1403, and it is determined whether or not the variation command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received.

If a negative determination is made in step S1403, the variation display control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1403, the variation start processing is executed in step S1404, and then the variation display control process is terminated. Here, the details of the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27.

<Process for starting fluctuation>
The variation start process is a process for starting the effect for the game round based on the reception of the variation command transmitted from the main control device 81. In the fluctuation start processing, the reach display and the like are set as the effect for the game round.

In the fluctuation start processing, first, the fluctuation command received this time in step S1501 is read, and the information on the presence / absence of a big hit, the information on the presence / absence of reach occurrence, and the information on the fluctuation display time are specified from the command. As described above, when the variable command is transmitted from the main control unit 81, the type command is also transmitted. In step S1501, the type command received together with the variable command received this time is read, and the game result information such as the type 1 jackpot result information, the type 2 jackpot result information, or the deviation result information is obtained from the command. Identify. Then, in step S1501, from the above-specified information, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the type of jackpot if the jackpot has been won, information on whether or not a reach has occurred if the jackpot has not been won, and information on the fluctuation display time. The information is grasped, and the grasped information is stored in the register of the MPU 242.

In the following step S1502, based on the information grasped in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game times started this time is the game result corresponding to the jackpot result. In the case of a jackpot result, that is, a type 1 jackpot result or a type 2 jackpot result, the stop result (symbol combination) for the jackpot is determined in the following step S1503 (stop result determination processing is performed). ..

In the stop result determination process, when the result is a type 1 jackpot result, the stop result in which the same specific symbol (main symbol with an odd number) is combined on one effective line L1 to L5 is obtained in this game. Determined as the result of stopping times. Further, in the case of the second type jackpot result, the stop result in which the same combination of non-specific symbols (main symbols with even numbers) is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is stopped in this game. Determine as a result.

The type of main symbol and the effective lines L1 to L5 that are stopped and displayed when a big hit result is obtained are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 243, and the final stop line determined by the above process is the final stop provided in the RAM 244. It is stored as address information in the line address storage area. At this time, the process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area is executed. In the following description, the address information of the stop result determined by the various stop result determination processes is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 244.

After the execution of step S1503, the effect setting process for big hits is executed in step S1504.

In the big hit effect setting process, the variable display mode of the big hit symbol is determined (the variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) is performed). As already explained, when a big hit result is obtained, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variation display mode determination process for reach display, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 243 is acquired, and the game in the variation display time and type command of the variation command received this time. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the result is determined. In addition, a process of storing the determined address information of the variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 244 is executed. Also in the variable display mode determination process shown below, the corresponding variable display pattern table is acquired from the variable display pattern table storage area of the ROM 243, and the effect pattern corresponding to the variable display time and the game result is determined. Then, the address information of the effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determination process is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 244. Further, in this step, a process of determining whether or not to execute the above-mentioned type 1 notice effect and type 2 notice effect is also performed.

If it is determined in step S1502 that the result is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is grasped whether or not reach occurs in this game round. When reach occurs, the process proceeds to step S1506, and the stop result determination process for reach is executed. Since this process corresponds to the out-of-reach, the stop result (symbol combination) is determined so that the symbol combination does not correspond to the jackpot result. That is, the stop result in which the combination of the off-reach symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of this time. In this case, the type of combination of the out-of-reach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Further, in this determination, the same symbol combination is not established on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the symbol of the middle symbol row Z2, which is the same as the symbol forming the reach line, is set with respect to the reach line. The stop result on the effective line is determined so that the final stop is made at the stop position shifted before or after. After that, the process of storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area is executed.

After the execution of step S1506, the effect setting process for generating reach is executed in step S1507. Since this process is the same as the process in step S1504, the description is incorporated.

If it is determined in step S1505 that no reach has occurred, the process proceeds to step S1508. In step S1508, a stop result determination process for normal disengagement (complete disengagement) is executed. In this process, the stop symbol is determined so that the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not formed. In the following step S1509, the effect setting process for complete disengagement is executed.

After executing any of the processes of step S1504, step S1507, and step S1509, the process proceeds to step S1510. In step S1510, a process of outputting commands including stop result and effect pattern information determined in steps S1503, S1504, and S1506 to S1509 to the display control device 212 as stop result commands and pattern commands is executed. The MPU of the display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 in order to execute the effect in the current game round, based on the received stop result command and pattern command. As a result, on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41, the variation display of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 in the variation display area ME and the display unit KP in the special display area OE is started.

After executing the process of step S1510, in the following step S1511, after executing the process of starting the effect for the game round, the process for starting the variation is ended. Specifically, the drive control of the speaker unit 64 and the lamp unit 63 is started based on the effect patterns determined in step S1504, step S1507, and step S1509 to start the effect for the game round.

Returning to the description of the variation display control process (FIG. 26), if an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, that is, if it is determined that the game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1405. In step S1405, it is determined whether or not the first stop display command from the main control device 81 has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S1405, the variable display control process ends after the variable intermediate processing is executed in step S1406. The variable mid-use process is a process of executing various effects and changing the determined effect in the game times started by the variable start process. Further, in the variable processing, as described above, a command is transmitted to the display control device 212 so as to temporarily stop the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at the end of the variable display time. The temporary stop process may be performed independently by the display control device 212.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1405, the process proceeds to step S1407, and the stop start process for starting the confirmation display is executed. Here, the stop start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28.

<Process for starting stop>
In the stop start process, first, in step S1601, the length of the first finalized display time is grasped based on the first stop display command from the main control device 81. In the following step S1602, it is determined whether or not the grasped first finalized display time is 1.5 sec, that is, whether or not it is a special time for holding notice. If the first finalized display time is a special time, the process proceeds to step S1603 to execute the setting process of the hold notice effect. When this setting process is executed, the notice display effect (see FIG. 18) that causes the bubble image to appear is set to be executed on the display screen 41a.

After the execution of step S1603, or when a negative determination is made in step S1602, the confirmation display start process is executed in step S1604, and then the stop start process is terminated. In step S1604, a process of outputting a first definite display command including information regarding the length of the first definite display time to the display control device 212 is executed. The MPU of the display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 so as to start the final display of the display unit KP in the symbols of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 and the special display area OE based on the received first finalized display command. do. Further, when the setting process of the hold notice effect in step S1603 is executed, the information to the effect that the hold notice should be executed is included in the first confirmation display command. In this case, the MPU of the display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 so as to execute the hold notice at the first fixed display time.

When executing the hold notice, the bubble image is not displayed immediately after the transition to the confirmed display state, but the bubble image is displayed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 sec) has elapsed after the transition to the confirmed display state. It is controlled to be done. Since the bubble image is displayed on the front side of the symbol, the above configuration makes it possible to suitably secure a time for the player to grasp the confirmed symbol.

Further, the bubble image is configured so that the period from the appearance of the first bubble image to the erasure of the last bubble image is completed in a time shorter than the remaining time of the first definite display time (for example, 1.0 sec). As a result, it is possible to prevent the hold notice from being given over the second final display time or the next game round. As a result, the hold notice may not be displayed until the end, or it may be displayed in duplicate with the effect to be performed in the next game (for example, the first type advance notice effect), and the appearance of the effect may be deteriorated. It is suppressed. In addition, before the start of the next game round (before the start of the variable display), it is possible to secure a period in which the production image other than the symbol is hidden, and the boundary between the current game round and the next game round can be secured. It becomes easier for the player to grasp.

Returning to the description of the variation display control process (FIG. 26), after executing the stop start process in step S1407, the confirmation display flags are set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244 in step S1408, and then the variation display is performed. End the control process.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, that is, if the confirmation display flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244, the process proceeds to step S1409 and the second stop display command from the main control unit 81 is received. Determine if it is. If the second stop display command has been received, the confirmation display end process is executed in step S1410. In the confirmation display end processing, the length (0.5 sec) of the second confirmation display time is grasped based on the second stop display command, and the second confirmation display command including the information about the length is displayed in the display control device 212. Performs the process of outputting to. As a result, the MPU of the display control device 212 ends the final display of the display unit KP in the symbols of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 and the special display area OE after 0.5 sec based on the received second final display command. , Controls the symbol display device 41.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of the game when the hold notice is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. In the present embodiment, the flow of the game differs depending on the common hold number CRN when the confirmation display is started. In the following, the case where the common hold number CRN is equal to or less than the number of set number ANs of the hold notice and the case where the common hold number CRN is larger than the number of set number ANs will be described separately. In the following description, it is assumed that all the reserved information other than the reserved information corresponding to the jackpot or the occurrence of reach corresponds to the complete deviation result (the result of non-reach occurrence).

<When the common hold number CRN is less than or equal to the number of hold notices set number AN>
A case where the common hold number CRN is equal to or less than the number of set number ANs of the hold notice will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 29. Here, a case where the number of common hold numbers CRN and the number of set number ANs are the same will be described as an example.

At the timing t1, when the stop display timing in the variable display of the main display unit 43 is reached without first specifying that the hold information corresponds to the jackpot or reach occurrence, the first fixed display time is reached in the main control device 81. Is set to the normal time (0.2 sec) (see FIG. 29 (c)). As a result, the definite display time (timing t1 to t2), which is the sum of the normal time as the first definite display time and the second definite display time, is 0.7 sec. In this case, the hold notice effect is not executed at the confirmed display time.

After that, at the timing t3, when a game ball wins the upper operating port 33a or the lower operating port 33b in the middle of the fluctuation display started from the timing t2 (see FIG. 29 (a)), a new hold for the winning is held. Information is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 (see FIG. 8) (see FIG. 29 (b)). Then, the main control device 81 executes a confirmation process for holding notice (step S305 in FIG. 11) for the holding information. Here, it is assumed that the pending information corresponds to the occurrence of reach, and that it is specified by the above confirmation process. In the following description, in order to distinguish the reserved information whose reach occurrence has been identified in advance from other reserved information, it is referred to as special reserved information. At the timing when the variation display started from the timing t2 ends, that is, at the timing t4 which is the start timing of the confirmation display, the main control device 81 executes the determination process of whether or not the special hold information has been previously specified.

Where the number of times AN for the hold notice is set to 2, in this case, the common hold number CRN is 2 when the confirmation display is started (when the first stop display time is set) (when the first stop display time is set). See FIG. 29 (b)). That is, under the premise that the hold notice should be executed over two game times, the game times (in-progress game times) for which the fixed display time is set corresponds to the previously specified hold information. It is the game time two times before the time. In such a case, the first fixed display time is set so that the game times in progress are subject to execution of the hold notice. That is, 2 is set in the execution count counter DC (see FIG. 29 (e)), and 0 is set in the wait count counter WC (not shown). As a result, the first fixed display time is set to the special time (1.5 sec) (see FIG. 29 (c)). At this time, the special setting flag is stored in the RAM 204 (see FIG. 29 (d)).

When the first fixed display time is set by the main control device 81 at the timing t4, the first stop display command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82. As a result, the main display unit 43 and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are fixedly displayed in a manner corresponding to the disconnection, while the display unit KP ends the switching of the display color. At the timing t5 when a predetermined period (0.5 sec) has elapsed from the start of the final display, the notice display effect (display that causes the bubble image to appear) as the hold notice effect is displayed on the display screen 41a. This notice display effect is displayed within the remaining time (1.0 sec) of the first final display time (see FIG. 29 (f)).

When the first confirmed display time elapses at the timing t6, the second confirmed display time is set to 0.5 sec by the main controller 81 (see FIG. 29 (c)), and a second stop display command to that effect is notified. It is transmitted to the effect control device 82. As a result, the confirmation display executed on the main display unit 43 or the like is continuously continued for 0.5 sec. When the first fixed display time is set to the special time, the total fixed display time is 2.0 sec, which is the sum of the special time and the second fixed display time.

Then, when the second definite display time elapses at the timing t7, the definite display of the main display unit 43 is terminated by the main control device 81, and the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 and the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 and the display control device 212 are used by the notification / effect control device 82 or the display control device 212. The final display of the display unit KP is completed. Incidentally, the count (period measurement) of 0.5 sec, which is the second definite display time, is performed separately by the main control device 81 and the notification / effect control device 82 or the display control device 212, which are the control devices on the sub side. .. That is, the control device on the sub side independently measures the elapsed period from receiving the second stop display command (step S1107 in FIG. 21), and displays the display screen 41a according to the elapse of 0.5 sec. The final display of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and the display unit KP is terminated.

If it is desired to accurately synchronize the end timings of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 on the main display unit 43 and the display screen 41a and the final display on the display unit KP, 0.5 sec has elapsed from the start of the final display time. , The main control device 81 may output a command to end the confirmation display. In this case, in response to receiving the command, each confirmation display of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 and the display unit KP can be terminated.

On the other hand, the count (period measurement) of 1.5 sec, which is the first definite display time, does not necessarily have to be performed independently by the control device on the sub side, and even if the control device on the sub side does not perform the period measurement. good. In the display screen 41a, the display form of the display screen 41a is merely maintained as it is even after the first confirmed display time elapses, and the control device on the sub side is for the second stop display from the main control device 81. This is because the progress of 1.5 sec can be grasped by receiving the command. In this case, the first stop display command may include information indicating whether or not the hold notice is executed, instead of the information regarding the length of the first fixed display time.

Returning to the description of FIG. 29, at the timing t7 when the second confirmation display ends, the variation display of the next game round starts with the end of the confirmation display (see FIG. 29 (c)). Then, when the variation display ends at the timing t9, the first fixed display time of the next game round is set. The game times in this case are the game times immediately before the specific game times. Therefore, at the timing t9, the first fixed display time is set to a special period (1.5 sec) so that the game times are subject to execution of the hold notice (see FIG. 29 (c)). Specifically, the first fixed display time is set to the special time based on the value of the execution count counter DC being 1 (see FIG. 29 (e)). Then, as in the case of the game two times before, at the timing t10, the notice display effect is displayed on the display screen 41a (see FIG. 29 (f)).

Here, in this case, apart from the special hold information generated at the timing t3, the game ball wins the upper operating port 33a or the lower operating port 33b at the timing t8 during the variation display of the immediately preceding game times. is doing. Then, as a result of executing the confirmation process for the hold notice for the hold information corresponding to the prize, it is specified that the hold information corresponds to the jackpot or the occurrence of reach.

In this way, even if new special hold information is specified after the hold notice execution setting is made, the various settings already made (execution count counter DC, etc.) are not affected in the present embodiment. (See FIG. 29 (e)). This is because when the special setting flag is stored in the RAM 204, the determination process (step S1203 in FIG. 22) for the result of the confirmation process for the hold notice is restricted. As a result, duplication of settings is avoided, and as a result, the number of times the hold notice is executed is suppressed from changing during the execution of the hold notice, and the player's confusion is preferably suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the above determination process is provided separately from the confirmation process for the hold notice, the restriction target is limited to the determination process, and the confirmation process for the hold notice is not restricted. ing. As a result, the confirmation process itself for the hold notice can be continuously performed while avoiding the duplicate setting. As a result, there is an inconvenience that even other effects using the special hold information (for example, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display displayed in the hold display area NE from the normal mode to a special mode different from the normal mode) are restricted. Can be suppressed, and a suitable configuration can be used for diversifying and compounding the production.

When the second confirmed display time elapses at the timing t11, each confirmed display on the main display unit 43 and the like is terminated, and the variable display of the next game times (specific game times) is started. In the specific game round, after a predetermined reach effect is executed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped) in a combination that does not become a big hit.

Then, at the timing t12 when the confirmation display is started, the first confirmation display time is set to the normal time (0.2 sec) based on the value of the execution count counter DC being 0 (FIG. 29 (c). )reference). Therefore, in the confirmation display in the specific game times, the first confirmation display time is not set to the time for the hold notice. As a result, even though the variable display of the specific game times has been completed, the inconvenience that the hold notice is continuously executed and the player is confused is suppressed. Further, at the timing t12, the special setting flag stored in the RAM 204 is erased based on the value of the execution count counter DC being 0 (see FIG. 29 (d)), which limits the determination process. Is released.

<When the common hold number CRN is larger than the set number AN number>
Next, a case where the common hold number CRN is larger than the number of set number ANs of the hold notice will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. In the following description, the description of the same part as in the case of FIG. 29 will be omitted or simplified.

In the middle of the fluctuation display started at the timing t21, a prize is generated in the upper operating port 33a or the lower operating port 33b at each of the timings t22 and t23, and among them, the hold information stored at the time of winning at the timing t23 is stored. Assuming that the reach is generated, the special hold information is specified by the confirmation process for the hold notice in the main control device 81 at the timing when the prize is generated. Since the common hold number CRN at the timing t21 is 2 (the number of holds after the update), the fluctuation display time of the fluctuation display started at the timing is set to 8 sec. Then, when the fluctuation display time elapses at the timing t24, the main control device 81 executes a determination process of whether or not the special hold information has been previously specified.

Where the set number of hold notices AN is 2 times, in this case, the common hold number CRN when the confirmation display is started is 4 (see FIG. 30B). That is, under the premise that the hold notice should be executed over two game times, the game times (in-progress game times) for which the fixed display time is set corresponds to the previously specified hold information. It is the game time four times before the time. In such a case, the first fixed display time is set so that the game times in progress are not subject to the hold notice. That is, 2 is set in the waiting count counter WC (see FIG. 30E), and the process of setting the first fixed display time as the special time is waited for. At the timing t24, the common hold number CRN is 4, and the time reduction setting number K (K = 3) or more, so that the first fixed display time is set to the time reduction time (0 sec). Further, at the timing t24, the special setting flag is stored in the RAM 204, and the execution count counter DC is set to 2 (see FIGS. 30 (d) and 30 (f)).

When the first confirmation display time is 0 sec, the second confirmation display is immediately performed. Since the second definite display time is 0.5 sec, the total definite display time is 0.5 sec (see FIG. 30 (c)). When the second finalized display time is set in this way, the main display unit 43 and the symbol display device 41 are controlled so that the finalized display is performed at the set second finalized display time.

The specific time lengths of the special time (1.5 sec), the normal time (0.2 sec), the time saving time (0 sec), and the second confirmed display time (0.5 sec) related to the first confirmed display time. Is an example, and is not limited to these. That is, it is sufficient that the special time is longer than the normal time and the time reduction time is shorter than the normal time, and the length of each time is arbitrary. At that time, it is preferable that each of the above times has a configuration in which the first fixed display time or the total fixed display time obtained by totaling the first fixed display time and the second fixed display time is shorter than the variable display time. When those times are longer than the variable display time, it is easy to give an extended impression to the player during the game, and this can be suitably suppressed by the above configuration. In this case, it is preferable that the first fixed display time or the total time is shorter than the variable display time of the game times corresponding to the normal out-of-reach result in which the reach does not occur. In such a configuration, the special time and the normal time may be shorter than the variable display time (8 sec) during the non-time reduction, and the time reduction time may be shorter than the variable display time (4 sec) during the time reduction.

Returning to the description of FIG. 30, when the second confirmation display time elapses at the timing t25, each confirmation display on the main display unit 43 and the like is terminated, and the variation display of the next game round is started. Since the common hold number CRN at the timing t25 is 3 (see FIG. 30B), the variation display time in the game round is set to 4 sec, and the variation display time is shortened. At the timing t26 when the variable display time has elapsed, the first finalized display time of the finalized display in the game round is set. In this case, the game times are three games before the specific game times, and the common hold number CRN at this time is 3, which is the same as the time reduction setting number K. Therefore, the time is shortened after being excluded from the hold notice, and the first confirmed display time is set to 0 sec. As a result, the total time of the finalized display becomes 0.5 sec of the second finalized display time (see FIG. 30C).

At the timing t27 when the second finalized display time has elapsed, the finalized display on the main display unit 43 and the like is terminated, and the variable display of the next game round is started. Then, when the variable display time elapses at the timing t28, the first finalized display time of the finalized display in the game round is set. Since the game times in this case are the game times two games before the specific game times, the main control device 81 controls the game times so as to execute the hold notice. Specifically, as a result of updating the waiting count counter WC at the previous timing t26, the first fixed display time is set to the special time (1.5 sec) based on the value becoming 0 (FIG. 30). (C), (e)). After that, as in the case of FIG. 29, a special time is set for the first confirmed display time of the immediately preceding game times, and a hold notice is executed at each confirmed display of the two previous game times and the immediately preceding game times. ..

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The first confirmed display time of the confirmed display is set based on the result specified by the confirmation process for the hold notice. In this case, the time length of the confirmation display can be different depending on the content of the pending information that has not yet been the target of the winning / failing determination. As a result, it becomes possible to correlate the determination result of the hit / fail determination for the hold information that is the target of the confirmation process (pre-identification) for the hold notice with the final display time of the game times. Moreover, in the present embodiment, when the advance designation is performed during the game round, the final display time of the game round is set based on the result of the prior identification, so that the content of the hold information is promptly changed to the game round. It can be reflected. For example, in a configuration in which the result is reflected in the next and subsequent game times when the first is specified during the progress of the game, the specific game time that is the target of the first is the line next to the ongoing game. If it is a game time, it becomes difficult to secure an opportunity to change the first fixed display time. In this respect, according to the present embodiment, since the first fixed display time can be changed including the ongoing game times, it is possible to stably secure the change opportunity.

By the way, when executing the hold notice, instead of securing the opportunity by extending the fixed display time, it is also possible to shift the execution timing of the hold notice at the start of the fluctuation in the next game or during the fluctuation display. Be done. However, it is assumed that other effects such as the first-class notice effect and the second-type notice effect are performed at the start of the change or during the change display. For this reason, there is a possibility that the effect displays may be duplicated, and there may be a problem that the distinctiveness of each effect is lowered and it is necessary to adjust the priority such as which one is displayed on the front side. Not only that, as in the relationship between the first-class notice effect and the hold notice of the present embodiment, one corresponds to the hit / fail judgment result of the game round, and the other corresponds to the hit / fail judgment result of the game round after that. In cases where the meaning of each effect is different, as in the case of corresponding cases, if they are displayed together, the player is likely to be confused, and the effect of the effect may be greatly reduced. In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the confirmation display time is lengthened to secure an opportunity to execute the hold notice, duplication with other effect displays can be suppressed, and the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. become.

Furthermore, the following effects can be expected in the configuration that secures the execution opportunity of the hold notice by lengthening the confirmation display time. Generally, in recent pachinko machines, a variable display of a pattern or a symbol is performed based on a predetermined variable display time, and once the variable display starts, the period cannot be changed. For this reason, for example, when there is a request to extend the game time of the game time in the middle of the game time in order to allow the sudden addition of the game effect, if an attempt is made to respond by changing the variable display. There is no choice but to redesign the pachinko machine. Even if such a change can be realized, during the variable display, it is usual that other game effects are aligned with the variable display time in addition to the variable display of the pattern or the symbol, and in some cases, they are performed. In some cases, the game production of is performed in a complex manner. For this reason, in case the variable display time is changed during the variable display, various production adjustments are made based on the scale adjustment between the variable display time and the production time, the replacement of the production, the consistency between the productions, and the like. There is a disadvantage that it is necessary to have a configuration that can be executed in the middle of the variable display, which greatly increases the burden on the production design. In this respect, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to change the game time related to one game time while keeping the variable display time as a predetermined period. Moreover, since the original purpose of the confirmation display is to show the result of the hit / fail judgment, there are many cases where the game production is not performed during the execution period, or even if it is performed, it is simple. Therefore, even if the final display time is changed, the adjustment burden on the production can be lightened, and the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

The configuration is such that the first confirmation display time is set according to the start timing of the confirmation display. In this case, the destination-specific result that occurs before the start timing of the confirmation display can be reflected in the length of the stop display period. As a result, it is possible to deal with the destination identification and the winning of the operating ports 33a and 33b that occur at the end of the variable display, and the optimum configuration can be obtained when the game time related to one game is changed in the middle. ..

During the final display, the notice display effect (notice display effect for causing the bubble image to appear) is displayed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41. Where the finalized display time of the game times in progress can be changed according to the prior specific result, according to this configuration, addition or reduction of the advance notice display effect according to the above specific result is performed in the final display. Will be possible. That is, it becomes possible to utilize the fixed display time as a period for adjusting the effect, and compared with the case where addition or reduction is performed in the variable display in which the effect display is likely to occur frequently on the display screen 41a. It becomes possible to facilitate the production adjustment.

The notice display effect performed during the confirmation display is configured to be completed by the end of the confirmation display. For example, if the advance notice display effect is continued even after the final display is completed (after the game round is finished), there is a concern that it will be difficult for the player to recognize the boundary with the subsequent game round. In addition, the duplication with other effect displays executed in the next game may reduce the distinctiveness between the effects and hinder the player's understanding of the effects. According to this configuration, those inconveniences can be suitably suppressed, and the playability can be improved.

The total time (2.0 sec), which is the length of the special time (1.5 sec) of the first fixed display time plus the second fixed display time (0.5 sec), is the variable display time (8 sec) immediately before that. The length was set to be shorter than 0.0 sec). If the confirmation display time is unnecessarily lengthened, it is easy to get the impression that the waiting time from the end of the fluctuation display to the start of the next fluctuation display is long, which may lead to a feeling of delay. Even if the display time is a special time on the long side, the total time is configured to be shorter than the variable display time. As a result, the game can be played at a good tempo even when the fixed display time is long, and the playability can be guaranteed.

It is configured to determine whether or not the previously specified result is a predetermined result, and set the first finalized display time based on the result. For example, if the configuration is such that each time the advance identification is made, it is directly reflected in the setting of the first confirmation display time, the first confirmation is made when the advance identification is made multiple times in one game. The display time may be forced to be set again, which may increase the processing load. In this respect, in this configuration, the pre-specific processing and the processing for determining the result are performed separately, and the first final display time is set based on the latter result. Therefore, by executing the determination process in accordance with the setting timing of the first finalized display time, it is possible to collectively set the first finalized display time, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

When it is already determined that the pre-specific result is a predetermined result, the execution of the determination process for determining the pre-specific result is restricted. In a configuration in which the hold notice is given over a plurality of game times, the ongoing game times may be the execution target of the hold notice started from the previous game times. In such a case, if the first fixed display time is set based on the destination-specific result generated during the game round, the setting may be changed or duplicated. In this respect, in this configuration, since the execution of the determination process for determining the specific result is restricted, it is possible to suppress the change of the setting and the occurrence of duplication.

When the hold information corresponding to the jackpot or reach occurrence is first specified, the game number for which the first confirmed display time is set is the number of the game times retroactively from the specific game times corresponding to the above hold information. Based on the above, the configuration is such that the first confirmed display time is set.

Due to the fact that a plurality of reserved information can be stored, it is possible that the reserved information corresponding to the jackpot or reach occurrence is first specified in a situation where the number of stored information is large. In such a case, the specific game times will be executed with a large delay from the specific timing. In such a case, if the configuration is such that the result of the first specific game is immediately reflected in the first finalized display time of the game times, the number of other game times intervening until the specific game times increases, and as a result, the first finalized game times. It becomes difficult for the player to grasp which game time the hold notice is given at the display time, which may cause confusion for the player. Further, in the configuration in which the hold notice is repeated a plurality of times until immediately before the specific game number, the number of times the hold notice is executed increases depending on the number of stored hold information, and it is assumed that the player misunderstands the production intention. NS. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, in addition to being able to adjust the number of game times that intervene between the execution of the hold notice and the execution of the specific game times, it depends on the number of stored information on hold. Therefore, the occurrence of inconvenience such as a large number of repetitions of the hold notice is suppressed. As a result, the function as a suggestion effect suggesting the content of the specific game times can be suitably exerted, and the interest can be improved.

When grasping the number of the game times for which the first confirmed display time is to be set retroactively from the specific game times, the common hold number CRN when the hold information corresponding to the prior identification is stored. It was configured to be grasped based on. For example, if the previously specified hold information and another subsequent hold information are stored (see FIG. 23 (b)), the subsequent hold information is also included in the calculation target, and the number of game times is appropriately calculated. It may not be possible to grasp. According to this configuration, such inconvenience is suitably suppressed, and the number of game times can be appropriately grasped.

Set the first confirmed display time to a special time Set the number of waits (wait count counter WC) to wait for processing, and if the number of waits is set, uniquely set the first confirmed display time to normal time. It was configured. According to the above configuration, once the waiting number is set, the first confirmed display time can be set by managing the waiting number thereafter. Therefore, each time the first fixed display time is set, the common hold number CRN and the number of hold notices are compared, and based on the result, it is determined which one to set the first fixed display time. Processing becomes unnecessary, and the processing load can be reduced.

When the prior identification is performed, the actual number of executions (execution number DN) is set based on the grasped common hold number CRN and the set number AN of the hold notice. The common hold number CRN varies each time, but in this configuration, the number of executions is set based on the magnitude relationship between the common hold number CRN and the set number AN. Therefore, the first fixed display time can be set as a special time within the range of the common hold number CRN each time, and the hold notice can be appropriately given.

The configuration is such that the first fixed display time is set based on the number of stored information on hold. This makes it possible to correlate the number of stored information on hold with the length of the fixed display time. As a result, when the number of stored information is large, the start timing of the next game round can be advanced by shortening the confirmation display time, and efficient game progress can be promoted. Moreover, in the present embodiment, when the hold information is stored, the fixed display time of the game times in progress can be set based on the number of stored hold information. Therefore, it is possible to promptly reflect the change in the number of stored information on hold in the fixed display time. As a result, when the finalized display time is shortened, it is possible to improve the responsiveness as compared with the configuration in which the time is adjusted after waiting for the next game round. In particular, it is possible to shorten the fixed display time prior to shortening the variable display time, and it is possible to promote more efficient game progress.

<Modification 1 of the first embodiment>
In this modification, the stop display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at the time of executing the hold notice is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the pending notice according to this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32.

The hold notice is given by using the stop result (combination of stop symbols) in the game times before the start of the game times (specific game times) of the hold information that is the target of the hold notice. Specifically, as a result of stopping the game times before the game times related to the hold information that is the target of the hold notice, the combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot result is not formed on the effective line, and By stopping and displaying the same symbol in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the content of the hold information that is the target of the hold notice is suggested.

For example, if the hold information subject to the hold notice is one of the probabilistic jackpot results, as shown in FIG. 31 (a), the hold information subject to the hold notice is earlier than the game times. In the game round, the combination of the specific symbols is not stopped on the effective line, and the same specific symbol is stopped and displayed on all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 to end the game round. In the following description, this stop mode is also referred to as a hold notice stop mode.

This hold notice is executed over a plurality of game times in the game times prior to the specific game times. That is, in the next game round after the game round shown in FIG. 31 (a), as shown in FIG. 31 (b), the game round is terminated in the stop mode of the hold notice by the specific symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 31 (c), in the specific game times that are the target of the hold notice, the combination of the specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line to end the game times, and the probability variation jackpot result is generated. Be specified.

Although the explanation by the figure is omitted, if the hold information subject to the hold notice is a normal jackpot result, the non-specific symbol is used in the game times before the specific game times subject to the hold notice. The game round is terminated in the stop mode of the hold notice. After that, in the specific game round, the combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed on the effective line to end the game round, and the occurrence of the normal jackpot result is clearly indicated. By doing so, the player can grasp which jackpot result will be obtained in the specific game times from the content of the hold notice (stop result).

This hold notice is executed with a predetermined probability in the hold information that results in any of the jackpots, and is also executed with a predetermined probability in the hold information that normally results in a loss. In this case, since the hold information that is the target of the hold notice is usually out of order, the combination of the specific symbols (non-specific symbols) is stopped on the valid line when the specific game times that are the target of the hold notice are reached. The game is ended without causing the same specific symbol (non-specific symbol) to be stopped and displayed on all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Further, in this modification, a re-variation effect is set for this hold notice. In the re-variation effect, first, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are temporarily stopped in a stop mode different from the stop mode of the hold notice. For example, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), the same symbol (symbol of 3) exists in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, but it does not exist in the middle symbol row Z2. Is stopped and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed in a variable manner again, and then the symbols of the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in the stop mode of the hold notice. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), the stop display mode of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is set so that the same specific symbol (symbol of 7) exists in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Will be done. It should be noted that the re-variation effect in the hold notice can be displayed in different directions for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82 in this modification will be described.

<Variable display control processing>
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a variation display control process executed by the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82 in this modification. It should be noted that this process is performed in place of the variable display control process of FIG. 26 according to the first embodiment, and the process content of the stop start process in step S2007 has been changed, and the step. It differs from the variation display control process of FIG. 26 in that the process for stopping display in S2009 is added.

In the variation display control process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the confirmation display flag is stored in various flag storage areas (not shown) provided in the RAM 244. If a negative determination is made in step S2001, it is determined in step S2002 whether or not the game is being played. If it is determined that the game is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S2003, and it is determined whether or not the variation command from the main control device 81 has been received.

If a negative determination is made in step S2003, the variation display control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, the variation start processing is executed in step S2004, and then the variation display control process is terminated.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2002, that is, if it is determined that the game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, it is determined whether or not the first stop display command from the main control device 81 has been received.

Here, in this modification, the configuration of the first stop display command from the main control device 81 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration of the first stop table command of this modification will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 34.

In the first stop display command of this modification, the type of information included in the command differs depending on the length of the first fixed display time. Specifically, when a special time (1.5 sec) is set as the first fixed display time in the stop start processing (FIG. 22) by the main control device 81, at least the first stop display command is applicable. Information regarding the length of the first fixed display time (information indicating that it is 1.5 sec) is included.

On the other hand, when the normal time (0.2 sec) or the time saving time (0 sec) is set as the first fixed display time, the first stop display command contains information on the length of the first fixed display time. In addition, at least information on whether or not the hold notice is executed and information on the start timing of the hold notice are included.

The information regarding whether or not the hold notice is executed is information indicating whether or not the hold notice should be executed. However, if the information is the content to be executed, the hold notice is not substantially immediately given. However, it indicates that it should be executed in any of the game times from the next time onward. That is, even if the main controller 81 decides to execute the hold notice, the grasped common hold number CRN is larger than the number of times the hold notice is executed, and the process of setting the first fixed display time to the special period is waited for. In this case, after setting the first fixed display time to the normal time or the time saving time, the information to the effect that the hold notice should be executed is included in the first stop display command and output.

On the other hand, the information regarding the start timing of the hold notice is information indicating how many times the hold notice should be started, in other words, the information on the number of waiting times. This information is set in the first stop display command together with the information that the hold notice should be executed.

Returning to the description of the variation display control process (FIG. 33), if a negative determination is made in step S2005, the variation display control process is terminated after the variable display control process is executed in step S2006. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2005, the process proceeds to step S2007, and a stop start process for starting the confirmation display is executed. Here, the stop start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Process for starting stop>
In the stop start process, first, in step S2101, the length of the first finalized display time is grasped based on the first stop display command from the main control device 81. In the following step S2102, it is determined whether or not the grasped first finalized display time is 1.5 sec, that is, whether or not it is a special time for holding notice. If the first fixed display time is a special time, it is determined in step S2103 whether or not the hold notice flag is stored in the RAM 244. The hold notice flag indicates that the information to the effect that the hold notice should be executed has been received from the main control device 81.

When a negative determination is made in step S2103, that is, when the information indicating that the hold notice should be executed is not received and the information indicating that the first confirmed display time is the special period for the hold notice is received. Means that the main controller 81 has instructed that the hold notice should be executed for the first time at the start timing of the stop display. In this case, in step S2104, a re-variation process for re-variating the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is executed. Here, the revariation process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the re-variation process, first, in step S2201, the prior specific specific result for the hold information is grasped based on the hold command from the main control unit 81 (step S306 in FIG. 11). Specifically, the hold command received from the main controller 81 is referred to, and the hold command corresponds to a jackpot, a reach occurrence, or a jackpot. In that case, grasp whether it corresponds to the probabilistic jackpot or the normal jackpot.

In the following step S2202, as a result of the grasping process in step S2201, it is determined whether or not there is a hold command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2202, the stop result determination process of the notice symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is executed in step S2203. In such processing, a specific symbol (main symbol with an odd number) is grasped as a preview symbol as a preview symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result. After that, the arrangement mode of the grasped notice symbols on the display screen 41a, that is, the stop result of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is determined based on the stop result table for the hold notice.

Here, the stop result table for the hold notice will be described with reference to FIG. 37. Note that FIG. 37A illustrates a stop result table on the middle line L2 when the number attached to the advance notice correspondence symbol is “7”. In the table, the sub-symbols arranged between the main symbols and the main symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are conveniently shown by using numbers in the middle of the numbers attached to the left and right main symbols. Further, FIG. 37B shows a simplified stop result of the address information D (1) as a specific example of the stop result on the display screen 41a.

In the stop result table for the hold notice, a plurality of stop results for stopping the same main symbol are set in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 depending on the symbol combination to be stopped on the effective lines L1 to L5, and the stop results of the stop results are set respectively. The information is stored as address information. In this case, the same main symbols are not aligned and stopped in any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the same main symbol is used in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 in any of the effective lines L1 to L5. It is set so that the reach line is not formed by. For example, when the address information D (1) is selected and the advance notice corresponding symbol (7) is stopped at the upper row of the middle line L2 and the middle row and the lower row of the right line L3, "7" is displayed on the middle line L2 from above. The main symbol with "", the sub symbol between "6" and "7", and the sub symbol between "6" and "7" are set to be stopped in this order.

As the types of stop results of the hold notice, the same main symbols are available on the effective lines L1 to L5 from all types (3 × 3 × 3 = 27) in which the same main symbol is stopped in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The number is the number excluding the symbol combination (5) corresponding to the jackpot result that stops at the end and the symbol combination (5 lines x 2 types) that is out of reach. Specifically, 27-5-10 = 12 It is a type.

Returning to the description of the revariation process (FIG. 36), if a negative determination is made in step S2202, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not there is a hold command corresponding to a normal jackpot. If an affirmative determination is made in step SS2204, the stop result determination process of the notice symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot result is executed in step S2205. In such processing, after grasping the non-specific symbol (main symbol with an even number) as the advance notice symbol as the advance notice symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot result, each symbol sequence is based on the stop result table for the hold advance notice. The stop result of Z1 to Z3 is determined.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2204, the process proceeds to step S2206, and the stop result determination process of the notice symbol corresponding to the out-of-reach result is executed. In such a process, first, based on the received out-of-reach correspondence hold command, a reach line is formed when the reach display is executed in the game times (specific game times) of the hold information that triggered the hold command. Identify the design. Then, if the symbol forming the reach line is a specific symbol, the advance notice symbol corresponding to the off-reach is determined as the specific symbol, and if the symbol forming the reach line is a non-specific symbol, the advance notice corresponding to the off-reach is determined. The symbol is determined as a non-specific symbol. After that, the stop result of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is determined based on the stop result table for the hold notice.

After the execution of steps S2203, S2205, and S2206, in step S2207, the address information of the stop result determined in each of these processes is stored in the stop result address storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 244. After that, in each step of steps S2208 and S2209, the revariation flag and the advance notice execution flag are set in the RAM 244, and the revariation processing is completed. The re-variation flag is a flag indicating that the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 should be re-variated during the first confirmation display, and the advance notice executing flag is a flag indicating that the hold advance notice is being executed.

Returning to the description of the stop start process (FIG. 35), after the revariation process in step S2104 is executed, the hold notice flag is stored in the RAM 244 in step S2105. As described above, the hold notice flag indicates that the information to the effect that the hold notice should be executed has been received from the main control device 81. If the first fixed display time is a special time, the first stop display command may not include information that the hold notice should be executed, but even in this case, the first fixed display time is special. It is possible to grasp that the hold notice should be executed based on the time.

In the following step S2106, the setting process of the hold notice setting effect is executed. When this setting process is executed, the notice display effect (see FIG. 18) that causes the bubble image to appear is set to be executed on the display screen 41a.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2102, that is, when the first confirmed display time grasped based on the first stop display command is the normal time (0.2 sec) or the time saving time (0 sec), the step. In S2107, it is determined whether or not the first stop display command from the main control device 81 includes information (see FIG. 34) that the hold notice should be executed. If the information is included, the hold notice flag is stored in the RAM 244 in step S2108.

After the execution of steps S2106 and S2108, or when a negative determination is made in step S2107, the confirmation display start process is executed in step S2109, and then the stop start process is terminated. In step S2109, a process of outputting a first definite display command including information regarding the length of the first definite display time to the display control device 212 is executed. The MPU of the display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 so as to start the final display of the display unit KP in the symbols of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 and the special display area OE based on the received first finalized display command. do. When the revariation process of step S2104 is executed, the revariation is executed after the final display of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 based on the step S2109.

Further, when the setting process of the hold notice effect in step S2106 is being executed, the information to the effect that the hold notice should be executed is included in the first confirmation display command. In this case, the MPU of the display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 so as to execute the hold notice at the first fixed display time.

Returning to the description of the variation display control process (FIG. 33), after executing the stop start process in step S2007, in the following step S2008, the confirmation display flags are set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244, and then this variation. End the display control process.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, that is, if the confirmation display flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244, the process proceeds to step S2009, and the display mode of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 during the first confirmation display. Executes the process for stopping display to control. Here, the process for stopping display will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 38.

<Processing during stop display>
In the stop display processing, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the revariation flag is stored in the RAM 244. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2301, it is determined in step S2302 whether or not it is the start timing of the revariation. The start timing of this re-variation is predetermined, and is set so that the re-variation is started after a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 sec) has elapsed from the start of the first definite display.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2302, a process of outputting a revariation command for starting revariation to the display control device 212 is executed in step S2303. The display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 so as to start the revariation of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 based on receiving the revariation command.

Here, the execution period of the revariation is predetermined, and in this modification, it is set to, for example, 0.8 sec. Therefore, if the period of temporary stop before the start of the first confirmation display is included, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 41a, and the state is 0.2 sec + α (α is the first confirmation display). After being maintained for the period of temporary stop before the start of .. At that time, in the re-stop display, the symbols Z1 to Z3 are controlled to be stopped and displayed at the same time.

After the execution of step S2303, the revariation flag stored in the RAM 244 is erased in step S2304, and then the process for displaying this stop is terminated. If a negative determination is made in steps S2301 and S2302, the process for displaying the stop is terminated as it is.

Returning to the description of the variation display control process (FIG. 33), after executing the stop display process in step S2009, whether or not the second stop display command from the main control unit 81 has been received in step S2010. Is determined. If the second stop display command has been received, the confirmation display end process is executed in step S2011. In the confirmation display end processing, the length (0.5 sec) of the second confirmation display time is grasped based on the second stop display command, and the second confirmation display command including the information about the length is sent to the display control device 212. Performs output processing. As a result, the MPU of the display control device 212 ends the final display of the display unit KP in the symbols of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 and the special display area OE after 0.5 sec based on the received second final display command. , Controls the symbol display device 41.

<Stop result determination process for complete disconnection>
Next, the stop result determination process for complete disengagement will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39. This process is executed at the start of the fluctuation, and specifically, is executed in step S1508 of the variation start process (FIG. 27).

In the stop result determination process for complete disconnection, first, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the hold notice flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244. This hold notice flag is stored in steps S2105 and S2108 of the stop start processing (FIG. 35). That is, in this modification, the instruction from the main control device 81 that the hold notice should be executed is uniformly received at the start of the finalized display.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, it is determined in step S2402 whether or not the advance notice execution flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244. This notice execution flag indicates that the hold notice is being executed as described above.

If a negative determination is made in step S2402, it is determined in step S2403 whether or not it is the start timing of the hold notice, specifically, whether or not it is the start timing of the game round to start executing the hold notice. This determination process is performed based on the information regarding the start timing of the hold notice included in the first stop display command from the main control device 81 (see FIG. 34). If it is the start timing of the game round to start executing the hold notice, the notice execution flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 244 in the following step S2404.

After the execution of step S2404 or when a positive determination is made in step S2402, the stop result determination process of the notice symbol is executed in step S2405. The stop result determination process is the same as in steps S2201 to S2206 in the revariation process (FIG. 36). That is, based on the hold command from the main controller 81, whether or not the hold information that is the target of the prior identification corresponds to the jackpot result or the missed reach result, or if it corresponds to the jackpot result. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to the probability change jackpot, and the advance notice symbol is grasped based on the determination result. Then, the stop result of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is determined so that the display mode on the display screen 41a of the grasped notice symbol becomes the stop mode of the hold notice.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in steps S2401 and S2403, the stop result determination process in step S2406 is executed. The stop result determination process of this step is for setting the stop mode of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 to a mode that does not become the stop mode of the hold notice and indicates that the result is out of order. Specifically, the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result or the missed reach result is not formed in any of the effective lines, and the same symbol is not stopped and displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The stop result of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is determined.

After the execution of steps S2405 and S2406, in step S2407, the address information of the stop result determined in each of these processes is stored in the stop result address storage area provided in the RAM 244, and then the stop result for this complete disconnection is stored. The decision process ends.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of the game when the hold notice is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 and 41. In this modification, as in the case of the first embodiment, the flow of the game is different depending on the common hold number CRN when the confirmation display is started. In the following, the case where the common hold number CRN is equal to or less than the number of set number ANs of the hold notice and the case where the common hold number CRN is larger than the number of set number ANs will be described separately. In the following description, it is assumed that all the hold information other than the special hold information corresponds to the normal out-of-order result (out-of-reach result).

<When the common hold number CRN is less than or equal to the number of hold notices set number AN>
A case where the common hold number CRN is equal to or less than the number of set number ANs of the hold notice will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 40. Here, a case where the number of common hold numbers CRN and the number of set number ANs are the same will be described as an example. In the following description, the same parts as those in FIGS. 29 and 30 according to the first embodiment will be omitted or simplified.

When the variable display is started on the main display unit 43 at the timing t31, the variable display of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 and the display unit KP on the display screen 41a is also started at the same time. Then, assuming that a prize is generated in the upper operating port 33a or the lower operating port 33b at the timing t32 just before the end of the fluctuation display and the hold information corresponds to the reach generation, at the timing when the winning is generated. , The special hold information is first specified by the confirmation process for the hold notice in the main control device 81. When the variable display time elapses at the timing t33 immediately after that and the confirmation display is started, the main control device 81 executes a determination process of whether or not the special hold information has been previously specified.

Where the set number of hold notices AN is 2 times, in this case, the common hold number CRN when the confirmation display is started is 2 (see FIG. 40 (b)). In this case, the main control device 81 sets the first fixed display time to a special period (1.5 sec) in order to immediately execute the hold notice. Then, a first stop display command to that effect is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82, and the design of the main display unit 43 is stopped and displayed.

The notification / effect control device 82 grasps that the hold notice should be executed when the first stop display command is received, and the hold notice flag is set in the RAM 244 (see FIG. 40 (d)). At this time, since it is understood that the hold notice should be executed for the first time by the first stop display command without receiving an instruction from the main control device 81 in advance, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are re-variated. Immediately, it is determined that the hold notice should be executed, and the revariation flag and the notice execution flag are set in the RAM 244 (see FIGS. 40 (e) and 40 (f)). At that time, the stop mode of the hold notice is set as the stop display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the re-variation.

As described above, in this modification, under the configuration in which the main control device 81 determines whether or not to execute the hold notice, whether or not to execute the re-variation of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 is determined by the notification / effect control device 82. Is the structure to be decided. As a result, it is not necessary for the main control device 81 to make a judgment based on the presence or absence of re-variation, and it is possible to simplify the control program on the main control device 81 side and reduce the processing load. The display control device 212 may determine the presence or absence of re-variation.

Further, at the timing t33, the first confirmation display command is transmitted from the notification / effect control device 82 to the display control device 212, and the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 and the display unit KP are stopped and displayed. The stop display mode of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 at this time is a mode that does not take into account the execution of the hold notice, that is, a completely deviated stop mode that is set at the start of the fluctuation of the timing t31 (see FIG. 40 (g2)). ).

At the timing t34 when a predetermined time (0.2 sec) has elapsed from the timing t33, the re-variation of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 is started (see FIG. 40 (g3)). Further, the re-variation flag stored in the RAM 244 is erased with the start of the re-variation (see FIG. 40 (e)). At this time, the display unit KP of the main display unit 43 and the display screen 41a is maintained in the stopped display state. Then, at the timing t35 when the execution period (0.8 sec) has elapsed from the start of the revariation, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed again in the stop mode of the hold notice (see FIG. 40 (g4)). The stop display mode at this time is the one set at the time of disclosure of the final display at the timing t33.

At the timing t36 after the re-variation is completed, the advance notice display effect for causing the bubble image to appear is executed in the remaining time (0.5 sec) of the first finalized display time (see FIG. 40 (g5)). When the first confirmed display time elapses at the timing t37 after the end of the hold notice, the second confirmed display time is set to 0.5 sec by the main controller 81 (see FIG. 40 (c)), and the second to that effect is set. A stop display command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82. As a result, the confirmation display executed on the main display unit 43 or the like is continuously continued for 0.5 sec. Then, when the second confirmation display time elapses at the timing t38, each confirmation display on the main display unit 43 or the like ends.

Further, at the timing t38, the variation display of the next game round is started with the end of the confirmation display (see FIG. 40 (c)). At this time, in the notification / effect control device 82, when the stop result determination process (FIG. 39) for complete disconnection is executed, the hold notice flag and the notice execution flag are stored in the RAM 244, so that the symbol sequence The stop display mode of Z1 to Z3 is set to be the stop mode for the hold notice (see steps S2401, S2402 and S2405 in FIG. 39).

Then, at the timing t39 at which the variation display ends, the first fixed display time of the game times is set. Since the game times in this case are the game times immediately before the specific game times, at the timing t39, the first fixed display time is a special time (1.5 sec) in order to make the game times the execution target of the hold notice. (See FIG. 40 (c)).

Further, at the timing t39, the main display unit 43 is confirmed and displayed by the main control device 81, and the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 and the display unit KP are confirmed and displayed by the notification / effect control device 82 or the display control device 212. The stop display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at this time is the stop mode for the hold notice set at the start of the fluctuation of the immediately preceding game at the timing t38 (see FIG. 40 (g7)). That is, in the final display of the immediately preceding game times, the re-variation effect of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is not performed.

After that, as in the case of FIG. 29 in the first embodiment, after the hold notice for causing the bubble image to appear is executed (see FIG. 40 (g8)), the specific game times that are the target of the hold notice. Is executed (see FIG. 40 (c)).

<When the common hold number CRN is larger than the set number AN number>
Next, a case where the common hold number CRN is larger than the number of set number ANs of the hold notice will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. In the following description, the description of the same part as in the case of FIG. 40 will be omitted or simplified.

If a prize is generated in the upper operating port 33a or the lower operating port 33b at the timing t42, which is just before the end of the fluctuation display started at the timing t41, and the hold information corresponds to the reach generation, the winning is given. At the timing of occurrence, the special hold information is specified by the confirmation process for the hold notice in the main control device 81. Then, when the fluctuation display time elapses at the timing t43, the main control device 81 executes a determination process of whether or not the special hold information has been previously specified.

Further, at the timing t43, the first fixed display time is set by the main control device 81. In this case, the common hold number CRN when the confirmation display is started is 3 (see FIG. 41 (b)), and the game times (in-progress game times) for which the confirmation display time is set are determined. It is the game time three times before the specific game time corresponding to the previously specified hold information. Therefore, the first fixed display time is set to the time saving time (0 sec) so that the game times in progress are not subject to the hold notice.

Further, at the timing t43, based on the above determination process and the setting result of the first confirmed display time, the information that the first confirmed display time is set as the time saving time, the information that the hold notice should be executed, and the next game round. A first stop display command including information that the hold notice should be started is output from the main control device 81. As a result, the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 and the display unit KP are confirmed and displayed by the notification / effect control device 82 or the display control device 212, and the hold notice flag is set in the RAM 244 in the notification / effect control device 82 (FIG. 41 (d)). )reference). At this time, the stop display mode of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 is the stop mode set at the start of the fluctuation of the timing t41, and specifically, the stop mode is completely different from the stop mode of the hold notice.

When the second finalized display time (0.5 sec) elapses at the timing t44, each finalized display on the main display unit 43 and the like is terminated, and the variable display of the next game round is started. At this time, in the notification / effect control device 82, the symbol sequence Z1 is based on the fact that the hold notice flag is stored in the RAM 244 and that the main game time is designated as the game time for which the hold notice should be started. The stop display mode of ~ Z3 is set to the stop mode of the hold notice. Further, in the notification / effect control device 82, the advance notice execution flag is set in the RAM 244 (see FIG. 41 (e)).

Then, when the variable display time elapses at the timing t45, the main control device 81 sets the first fixed display time. Since the game times in this case are the game times two games before the specific game times, the first confirmed display time is set to the special time (1.5 sec) for the hold notice (FIG. 41 (c)). )reference). Then, the main control device 81 outputs the first stop display command including the information that the first fixed display time is set as the special time. As a result, the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 and the display unit KP are confirmed and displayed by the notification / effect control device 82 or the display control device 212. The stop display mode of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 at this time is the stop mode of the hold notice set at the start of the fluctuation of the timing t44 (see FIG. 41 (f1)). That is, when the notification / effect control device 82 or the display control device 212 knows that the hold notice should be executed at the start of the variation display, the hold notice is given without re-variation of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Will be executed.

After that, as in the case of FIG. 40, after the first confirmed display time of the immediately preceding game is set to the special time (1.5 sec), the hold notice is executed using the first confirmed display time. (See FIGS. 41 (c), (f4), (f5)), and then the specific game times subject to the hold notice are executed (see FIG. 41 (c)).

According to the present modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The hold notice is given using the stop results (combination of stop symbols) of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. Since the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed with the stop result corresponding to the result of the hit / fail judgment, it is assumed that the player is paying close attention to them. Therefore, with the above configuration, the player can easily notice the hold notice, and it is possible to suitably increase the expectation for the subsequent game times. Moreover, the stop result of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 can be changed based on the result of the destination identification performed in the middle of the game round, and the result of the destination identification can be reflected promptly. Therefore, even when the game time to be specified in advance is the next game time of the game time in progress, the hold notice by the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 can be executed, and the effect is executed. Opportunities can be expanded.

In addition, according to this modification, the stop result is changed after the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in the setting result (step S1508 of FIG. 27) at the start of the fluctuation. For this reason, it is possible to suppress the induction of discomfort and distrust of the player, even though the stop result is suddenly changed based on the result of the prior identification during the game. For example, the player can identify the symbol on the display screen 41a during the low-speed fluctuation display of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 25C) or when at least one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 has been stopped and displayed. In a difficult situation. In a configuration in which the symbol change process is immediately performed when the prior identification is performed in such a situation, it is necessary to replace the symbol displayed in the low-speed fluctuation display or the symbol displayed in the stop display, which causes discomfort or distrust of the player. It could be. In this respect, in this modification, the stop result is changed with re-variation after waiting for the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 to be stopped and displayed in the setting result at the start of the fluctuation. In this case, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 from becoming unnatural before the change of the stop result, and the stop result can be changed in a natural flow.

However, at the start of the game round, unscheduled re-variations are added midway in the form of following the fluctuation display, so the final stop display of symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is postponed, and securing time for that becomes a problem. .. In this respect, in this modification, the first finalized display time is lengthened when the hold notice is given, and the re-variation is performed by utilizing the period. As a result, it is possible to secure an appropriate time for re-variation, and inconveniences such as the end of the game round in the middle of the re-variation and the display period of the stop result after the change cannot be secured are preferably suppressed. NS. Moreover, the setting timing of the first fixed display time is set separately from the setting timing of the variable display time, and the first fixed display time is set according to the start timing of the fixed display. As a result, the fixed display time can be flexibly changed with respect to the destination identification after the start of the fluctuation display, and the optimum configuration can be obtained for performing additional re-variation in the middle.

In addition, the following effects can be expected by configuring the stop-displayed symbol columns Z1 to Z3 to be re-variated and then changing the stop result. For example, if the stop result is changed instantly, it may cause discomfort or distrust as described above, and the player may not notice the change. In this respect, according to this configuration, it becomes easy to notice the change of the stop result due to the intervention of the re-variation display, and the significance of the hold notice due to the change of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 can be suitably secured. In addition, it is possible to add fun to guess which stop result will be changed, which will improve the interest.

The symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are re-variably displayed after a predetermined time (0.2 sec) has elapsed from the start of the confirmation display. According to this configuration, it is possible to easily confirm the stop result before the re-variation display. In addition, it becomes easier to recognize that the re-variation display has been made, and it becomes possible to promote the player's understanding of the production. Moreover, by providing a time reserve before the re-variation display, it is possible to arouse the expectation of the re-variation and improve the interest.

In the above modification, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in the stop mode of the hold notice, and the notice display effect of displaying the bubble image is performed. However, the notice display effect is not executed. good.

<Modification 2 of the first embodiment>
In this modification, the execution mode of the hold notice is different from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, the above-mentioned is that both the variable display time and the final display time are set based on the specific result. It is different from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the pending notice according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 42.

In the hold notice according to this modification, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), when it is specified that the hold information that has not yet been the target of the hit / fail judgment corresponds to the jackpot or reach occurrence, the main The fluctuation display time of the fluctuation display in the display unit 43, the symbol strings Z1 to Z3, and the display unit KP is set to a special time (1.0 sec) for holding notice, which is shorter than usual. Further, regarding the confirmed display time of the confirmed display, as in the case of the first embodiment, the first confirmed display time is set to the special time (1.5 sec) for the hold notice, so that it is longer than usual. It is said to be a long 2.0 sec. Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (c), the stop display mode of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 when the hold notice is given is the stop mode of the hold notice as in the case of the above modification 1, and is further confirmed. During the display, a notice display effect for causing the bubble image to appear on the display screen 41a is displayed.

According to the above configuration, when the hold notice is executed, the variable display time is shortened and the confirmed display time is lengthened. Therefore, the ratio of the confirmed display in one game is larger than that in the normal time when the hold notice is not executed. Can be increased. As a result, it is possible to enhance the presence of the confirmed display and increase the degree of attention to the hold notice (the stop display result of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 and the notice display effect by the bubble image) performed using the confirmed display time. become.

Further, in the above configuration, the fixed display time is made longer than the variable display time when the hold notice is executed. As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the fixed display time is usually set to be extremely shorter than the variable display time, but an extreme change is made to reverse the long-short relationship between the fixed display time and the variable display time. This can give the player a great sense of discomfort. As a result, the player can easily notice the hold notice, and it becomes possible to suitably increase the expectation for the subsequent game times.

In addition, in the configuration in which the variable display time is shorter than the fixed display time, the number and types of effect displays that can be executed in the variable display time are greatly limited as compared with the normal time. As a result, the effect display performed during the variable display is limited, and the hold notice performed during the final display can be enhanced accordingly.

Further, in the above configuration, the game time (total time obtained by totaling the variable display time and the confirmed display time) for one game when the hold notice is executed is shorter than that when the hold notice is not executed. ing. When the hold notice is executed, it is assumed that the player's interest will be more likely to be directed to the specific game times that are the target of the hold notice. The period can be shortened. As a result, the player can play the specific game times as soon as possible, and the configuration can be configured to meet the needs of the player.

Next, in this modification, each control process executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 will be described.

In this modification, both the variable display time and the fixed display time are set based on the specific result, but each of these times can be set to have at least two timings. ing. Specifically, there are a fluctuation start time for setting the fluctuation display time and a confirmation display start time for setting the confirmation display time. In view of this point, in this modification, the determination process of whether or not the special hold information is specified by the confirmation process for the hold notice (step S305 in FIG. 11) is performed not only at the time of disclosing the finalized display but also at the time of starting the fluctuation. Is also configured to be executed. Then, when it is determined that the special hold information has been specified by any of the judgment processes, the setting for each hold notice regarding the variable display and the confirmed display (waiting until the special time is executed or the special time is set). The number of times is set) all at once. Hereinafter, specific control processing for realizing the above configuration will be described in detail.

<Processing at the start of stop>
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the stop start processing executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81. This process is executed in place of the process at the start of stop in FIG. 22.

In the stop start processing of this modification, first, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the stop-side special setting flag F2 is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The stop-side special setting flag F2 is set when the first fixed display time is set to the special time (1.5 sec) for the hold notice.

If a negative determination is made in step S2501, it is determined in step S2502 whether or not the variable side special setting flag F3 is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The variable side special setting flag F3 is set when the variable display time should be set to the special time (1.0 sec).

If a negative determination is made in step S2502, it is determined in step S2503 whether or not the stop-side special setting flag F1 is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The stop-side special setting flag F1 is set when the first fixed display time should be set to the special time.

If a negative determination is made in step S2503, in step S2504, whether or not the subsequent hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 232 corresponds to a jackpot or reach occurrence, that is, a confirmation process for holding notice. Determines if the special hold information has been identified by. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2504, the process proceeds to step S2505 and a process of grasping the execution number DN1 of the stop side special period setting is executed. The number of executions DN1 indicates the number of times that the first fixed display time is set as a special time. Here, the process of grasping the execution number DN1 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44 (a).

<Processing for grasping the number of executions DN1 of the special period setting on the stop side>
In the process of grasping the number of executions DN1, first, in step S2601, the common hold number CRN stored in the hold number storage area FE is read, and the common hold number CRN is grasped. In the following step S2602, the common hold number CRN is compared with the preset number AN (2 times) as the execution number of the hold notice, and whether or not the common hold number CRN is equal to or greater than the set number AN is determined. judge. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2602, the set number AN is set as the execution number DN1 as it is in step S2603. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2602, the common hold number CRN is set as the execution number DN1 in step S2604. After the execution of steps S2603 and S2604, the process of grasping the number of executions DN1 is completed.

Returning to the description of the stop start process (FIG. 43), after the execution of step S2505, the processes of steps S2506 to S2508 are executed. These processes are the same as those in steps S1205 to S1209 of the stop start process of FIG. 22. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2508, that is, if the lottery for whether or not to give a hold notice is won, the hold notice setting process on the stop side and the variable side is executed in step S2509. This process is for setting each hold notice for variable display and final display. Here, the above-mentioned hold notice setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44 (b).

<Setting process for hold notice on stop side and variable side>
In the hold notice setting process on the stop side and the variable side, first, in step S2701, the execution number DN1 grasped in the execution number DN1 grasping process (FIG. 44 (a)) is provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. The execution count counter DC1 is set in the execution count counter area. The execution count counter DC1 is a counter for counting the number of executions in which the first fixed display time is set as a special time.

In the following step S2702, the wait count counter WC1 is set in the wait count counter area provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. In this step, a subtraction value obtained by subtracting the execution count DN1 from the common hold count CRN is set as the value of the wait count counter WC1. The waiting number counter WC1 is a counter for counting the number of game times waiting for the process of setting the first fixed display time to the special time.

After the execution of step S2702, the setting process for variable display is performed in steps S2703 to S2707. In the setting process, first, in step S2703, it is determined whether or not the subtraction value obtained by subtracting 1 from the common hold number CRN is the set number of times AN (2 times) or more. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2703, the set number AN is set as the execution number DN2 as it is in step S2704. The number of executions DN2 indicates the number of times that the variable display time is set to the special time. on the other hand. If a negative determination is made in step S2703, a subtraction value obtained by subtracting 1 from the common hold number CRN in step S2705 is set as the number of executions DN2.

After the execution of steps S2704 and S2705, in step S2706, the execution count DN2 set in steps S2704 and S2705 is set as the execution count counter DC2 in the execution count counter area provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. The execution count counter DC2 is a counter for counting the number of executions in which the variable display time is set as a special time.

In the following step S2707, a subtraction value obtained by subtracting the execution count DN2 from the common hold count CRN-1 is set as the wait count counter WC2 in the wait count counter areas provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204, and is used for this hold notice. End the setting process. The waiting number counter WC2 is a counter for counting the number of game times waiting for the process of setting the variable display time to the special time.

Here, in steps S2703 to S2707, the subtraction value obtained by subtracting 1 from the common hold number CRN is used as the reference value when setting the number of executions and the number of waits, as described in steps S2504 and S2505 of FIG. 43. This is because, as shown in (a), it is assumed that new hold information corresponding to the jackpot or reach occurrence is stored during the variable display.

That is, when new hold information corresponding to the jackpot or reach occurrence is stored at the timing t51, the first confirmed display time can be set to the special time at the start timing of the confirmed display 321 immediately after that. The fluctuation display time can be set to the special time from the timing t52, but the fluctuation display time can be set from the timing t53 when the next fluctuation display 322 is started. In this case, since the number of the common hold number CRN of the timing t53 is less than that of the timing t52 by 1, the subtraction value obtained by subtracting 1 from the common hold number CRN is used as the reference value.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 45B, when the common hold number CRN at the timing t52 is 1, and the specific game times corresponding to the hold information previously specified at the timing t51 are executed from the timing t53. Is set to 1 as the number of executions DN1 for the first fixed display time, and 0 as the number of executions DN2 for the variable display time.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 45 (c), the common hold number CRN at the timing t52 is 4, and the timing t54 after the specific game times corresponding to the hold information previously specified at the timing t51 has passed the waiting period. When executed from, 3 times is set as the waiting number WC1 for the first fixed display time, and 2 times is set as the waiting number WC2 for the variable display time. In this case, each of the execution counts DN1 and DN2 is set twice because both the common hold number CRN and the common hold number CRN-1 at the timing t52 are larger than the set number AN (2). ..

Returning to the description of the stop start processing (FIG. 43), after the execution of step S2509, the stop side special setting flag F1 is set in the various flag confirmation areas of the RAM 204 in step S2510. In the following step S2511, it is determined whether or not the value of the wait count counter WC1 is 0. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2511, in step S2512, the stop-side special setting flag F2 is set in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

In the following step S2513, the first fixed display time is set to 1.5 sec as a special time, and then in step S2514, the execution count counter DC1 is decremented and updated by one. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2511, the waiting count counter WC1 is decremented and updated by one in step S2515, and then the processes of steps S2516 to S2518 are executed. The processes of steps S2516 to S2518 are the same as those of steps S1216 to S1218 of the stop start process of FIG. 22. After the execution of steps S2514, S2517, and S2518, in step S2519, the confirmation display (first confirmation display) of the pattern is started on the operation port display unit of the main display unit 43, and the final stop start processing is completed.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in steps S2502 and S2503, the process proceeds to step S2511 to determine whether or not the value of the wait count counter WC1 is 0, and the processing after step S2512 or step S2515 is determined according to the determination result. The subsequent processing is executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2501, the process proceeds to step S2520 to determine whether or not the value of the execution count counter DC1 is 0. If a negative determination is made in step S2520, the process proceeds to step S2513, and the first confirmation display time is set to 1.5 sec. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2520, the stop-side special setting flag F1 and the stop-side special setting flag F2 stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 are deleted in step S2521. After that, the processes after step S2516 are executed.

<Variable display time setting process>
Next, the variable display time setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 46. This process is executed in place of the variable display time setting process of FIG.

The variation display time setting process according to this modification is a point in which the variation display time setting process for complete deviation of step S2807 is performed instead of the process of step S907 in FIG. 17, and after the execution of step S2807, it is as it is. It is common with the variable display time setting process of FIG. 17, except that the variable display time setting process ends. Hereinafter, the process of setting the variation display time for complete deviation in step S2807 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47.

<Fluctuating display time setting process for complete disconnection>
In the variable display time setting process for complete deviation according to this modification, first, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the variable side special setting in-setting flag F4 is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The variable side special setting flag F4 is set when the variable display time is set to the special time (1.0 sec) for holding notice.

If a negative determination is made in step S2901, it is determined in step S2902 whether or not the stop-side special setting flag F1 (see step S2510 in FIG. 43) is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If a negative determination is made in step S2902, it is determined in step S2903 whether or not the variable side special setting flag F3 is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The variable side special setting flag F3 is set when the variable display time should be set to the special time.

If a negative determination is made in step S2903, in step S2904, whether or not the subsequent hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 232 corresponds to a jackpot or reach occurrence, that is, a confirmation process for holding notice. Determines if the special hold information has been identified by. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2904, the process proceeds to step S2905, and a process of grasping the execution number DN2 of the variable side special period setting is executed. Here, the process of grasping the execution number DN2 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48 (a).

<Processing for grasping the number of executions DN2 of the variable side special period setting>
In the process of grasping the number of executions DN2, first, in step S3001, the common hold number CRN stored in the hold number storage area FE is read, and the common hold number CRN is grasped. In this case, the common hold number CRN is a process of updating the common hold number CRN at the start of the variable display (see the data setting process of step S505 of FIG. 13 and the process of step S601 of FIG. 14), which is shown in FIG. 47. Since it is performed before the execution of the variable display time setting process, it becomes the common hold number CRN after the update.

In the following step S3002, the common hold number CRN is compared with the preset number AN (2 times) as the execution number of the hold notice, and whether or not the common hold number CRN is equal to or greater than the set number AN is determined. judge. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3002, the set number AN is set as the execution number DN2 as it is in step S3003. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3002, the common hold number CRN is set as the execution number DN1 in step S3004. After the execution of steps S3003 and S3004, the process of grasping the number of executions DN2 is completed.

Returning to the description of the variation display time setting process (FIG. 47) for complete deviation, the processes of steps S2906 to S2908 are executed after the execution of step S2905. These processes are the same as those in steps S1205 to S1209 of the stop start process of FIG. 22. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2908, that is, if a lottery for whether or not to give a hold notice is won, the hold notice setting process on the variable side and the stop side is executed in step S2909. This process is for setting each hold notice for variable display and final display. Here, the above-mentioned hold notice setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48 (b).

<Setting processing for hold notice on the variable side and stop side>
In the hold notice setting process on the variable side and the stop side, first, in step S3101, the execution number DN2 grasped in the execution number DN2 grasping process (FIG. 48 (a)) is provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. The execution count counter DC2 is set in the execution count counter area. In the following step S3102, the wait count counter WC2 is set in the wait count counter area provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. In this step, a subtraction value obtained by subtracting the execution count DN2 from the common hold count CRN is set as the value of the wait count counter WC2.

After the execution of step S3102, the setting process for the first confirmation display is performed in steps S3103 to S3107. In the setting process, first, in step S3103, it is determined whether or not the common hold number CRN is the set number of times AN (twice) or more. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3103, the set number of times AN is set as the number of executions DN1 (indicating the number of times the first confirmed display time is set to the special time) in step S3104. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3103, the common hold number CRN is set as the execution number DN1 in step S3105.

After the execution of steps S3104 and S3105, in step S3106, the execution number DN1 set in steps S3104 and S3105 is set as the execution number counter DC1 in the execution number counter area provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. In the following step S3107, a subtraction value obtained by subtracting the execution count DN1 from the common hold count CRN is set as the wait count counter WC2 in the wait count counter area provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204, and the hold notice setting process is performed. To finish.

Here, in steps S3103 to S3107 shown in FIG. 48 (b), unlike the case of steps S2703 to S2707 of FIG. 44 (b), the reference value when setting the number of executions and the number of waits is a variable display and a definite display. The same value is set in the above, because the processing of steps S2904 and S2905 in FIG. 47 stores new pending information corresponding to the jackpot or reach occurrence during the confirmation display as shown in FIG. 49 (a). This is because it is premised on the case.

That is, when new hold information corresponding to the jackpot or reach occurrence is stored at the timing t61, the fluctuation display time can be set to the special time at the timing t62, which is the start timing of the fluctuation display 323 immediately after that. The first finalized display time can be set to the special time from the timing t63, which is the start timing of the finalized display 324 immediately after the variable display 323. Since the variable display 323 and the final display 324 belong to the same game times, there is no difference in the common hold number CRN at the timings t62 and t63, so that the same reference value is used.

Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), the common hold number CRN at the timing t62 is 1, and the specific game times corresponding to the hold information previously specified at the timing t61 have passed one game time. When the execution is performed from the later timing t64, once is also set for both the execution number DN2 for the variable display time and the execution number DN1 for the first fixed display time.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (c), the common hold number CRN at the timing t62 is 3, and the timing t65 after the specific game times corresponding to the hold information previously specified at the timing t61 has passed the waiting period. When executed from, the same time is set for both the waiting number WC2 for the variable display time and the waiting number WC1 for the first fixed display time. In this case, each of the execution counts DN1 and DN2 is set twice because the common hold number CRN at the timing t62 is larger than the set count AN (2).

Returning to the description of the variation display time setting process for complete deviation (FIG. 47), after the execution of step S2909, the variation side special setting flag F3 is set in the various flag confirmation areas of the RAM 204 in step S2910. In the following step S2911, it is determined whether or not the value of the wait count counter WC2 is 0. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2911, in step S2912, the variable side special setting flag F4 is set in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

In the following step S2913, the fluctuation display time is set to 1.0 sec as a special period, and then in step S2914, the execution count counter DC2 is decremented and updated by one. After that, the setting process of the variable display time is completed. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2911, the waiting number counter WC2 is decremented and updated by one in step S2915, and then the process proceeds to step S2916, which is a normal game stored in the display time table storage area 223. The variation display time corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the variation display time table for non-reach corresponding to the state. In the following step S2917, the fluctuation display time acquired in step S2916 is set in the fluctuation display time counter area, and then the setting process of the fluctuation display time ends.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2902, that is, when the stop-side special setting flag F1 is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, the variable display time setting process is before the execution. In addition, it means that the decision to execute the hold notice has already been made in the stop start processing (FIG. 43), and various settings for that purpose have already been executed. In this case, the process proceeds to step S2911 to determine whether or not the value of the wait count counter WC2 is 0, and the processing after step S2912 or the processing after step S2915 is executed according to the determination result.

In this way, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2902, by skipping the processes of steps S2904 to S2910, it is determined that the hold notice is executed by the stop start process prior to the variable display time setting process. If this is done, the execution of the result determination process for specifying the hold destination in step S2904 is restricted. As a result, even if new hold information corresponding to a jackpot or reach occurs after the decision to execute the hold notice is made by the stop start processing, it is suppressed from being affected.

This also applies to the stop start processing shown in FIG. 43. In this processing, when an affirmative determination is made in step S2502, that is, the variable side special setting flag F3 is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 244. If so, the processing of steps S2504 to S2510 is skipped. Therefore, if it is decided to execute the hold notice by the variable display time setting process for complete disconnection (FIG. 47) prior to the stop start process, the hold destination identification result determination process in step S2504 is performed. Execution is restricted.

As described above, in this modification, the processing performed in advance (execution of the hold notice) between the stop start processing shown in FIG. 43 and the variable display time setting processing for complete deviation shown in FIG. 47. It is configured to give priority to the decision to do so and various setting processes for holding notice based on it. Therefore, even though there are two judgment timings, that is, when the final display is disclosed and when the variable display is started, inconveniences such as conflict of judgment results, duplication of settings, and midway change are preferably suppressed. Is possible.

Returning to the description of the variation display time setting process for complete deviation (FIG. 47), when the affirmative judgment is made in step S2903, the steps S2904 to S2910 are skipped and the steps are skipped as in the case where the affirmative judgment is made in step S2902. Proceed to S2911.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2901, the process proceeds to step S2918 to determine whether or not the value of the execution count counter DC2 is 0. If a negative determination is made in step S2918, the process proceeds to step S2913 and the variation display time is set to 1.0 sec. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2918, the variable side special setting flag F3 and the variable side special setting flag F4 stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 are deleted in step S2919. After that, the processes after step S2916 are executed to end the process of setting the variable display time.

According to the present modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In addition to the fixed display time, the variable display time is also set based on the specific result. In this case, it is possible to change the game time (the period from the start of the variable display to the start of the next variable display) related to one game by utilizing both the fixed display and the variable display. For example, in a configuration in which the game time related to one game is changed only by the confirmation display, if the confirmation display time is unnecessarily lengthened, it is easy for the player to get the impression that the game is delayed, so that the time difference of the game time becomes limited. easy. In this regard, in this modified example, since the game time related to one game is changed by the collaboration between the variable display and the confirmed display, the time difference between the case where the special hold information is first specified and the case where it is not specified should be increased. Can be done. As a result, dynamic changes can be realized, and it becomes easy to give a special impression.

At each of the start timing of the confirmation display and the start timing of the variation display, it is determined whether or not the pending information of the jackpot or reach occurrence is specified in advance, and the variation display time and the first confirmation display time are determined based on each determination result. It was configured to be set. This makes it possible to preferably make special settings for holding notice regarding the variable display time and the fixed display time.

For example, in a configuration in which the above determination process is performed only at the start timing of the confirmation display, as shown in FIG. 50A, when the special hold information is first specified at the timing t71 during the confirmation display, FIG. As shown in b), the prior identification result of the special hold information is determined for the first time at the timing t73 when the confirmation display 332 is started. As a result, the variable display time of the variable display 331 becomes the normal time, and the fixed display 332 thereafter is set to the special time for the hold notice.

On the other hand, in this modification, since the above determination process is performed even at the start timing of the variation display, it is possible to determine the advance identification result of the special hold information at the timing t72 when the variation display 331 is started. .. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), the variable display time of the variable display 331 can be set to a special time for the hold notice, and the hold notice is started earlier than in the case of FIG. 50 (b). Becomes possible.

Further, in the configuration in which the above determination process is performed only at the start timing of the variation display, as shown in FIG. 51 (a), when the special hold information is first specified at the timing t81 before the confirmation display (during the variation display). In addition, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the prior identification result of the special hold information is determined for the first time at the timing t83, which is the start timing of the variation display 334. As a result, the finalized display time of the finalized display 333 becomes the normal time, and the subsequent variable display 334 is set to the special time for the hold notice.

On the other hand, in this modification, since the determination process is performed even at the start timing of the confirmation display, it is possible to determine the destination identification result of the special hold information at the timing t82 when the confirmation display 333 is started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 51 (c), the fixed display time of the confirmed display 333 can be set to the special time for the hold notice, and the hold notice is started earlier than in the case of FIG. 51 (b). Becomes possible.

That is, according to this modification, the special setting for the hold notice is set regardless of whether the special hold information is first specified during the final display or the special hold information is first specified during the variable display. It is possible to start early and expand the production opportunities.

On the other hand, in the configuration in which the judgment processing is performed at two timings, if the pre-specification is performed between the judgment of one and the judgment of the other, the judgment results conflict and the period settings are duplicated. And may lead to changes on the way. In this respect, in this modification, the determination result of the side that first determines that the special hold information has been specified first among the determination processes is prioritized. As a result, the determination results can be unified, and duplication of period settings and intermediate changes can be suitably suppressed.

In the above modification, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in the stop mode of the hold notice, and the notice display effect of displaying the bubble image is performed, but one or both of them are not executed. May be good.

<Modification 3 of the first embodiment>
In this modification, the information form of the variation command transmitted from the main control device 81 is devised. Specifically, the first determination display time is included in the variation command. It is different from the embodiment. Hereinafter, the variation command according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a schematic diagram for explaining the information form of the variable command. In this modification, the first fixed display time is set at the start of the variable display, and the first fixed display time that can be set is a normal time (0.2 sec) and a special time (1.5 sec). It shall have two types.

As described above, the variation command is a command corresponding to the variation display mode of the symbol on the main display unit 43 and the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41, and the variation display of the symbol on the main display unit 43. Is transmitted from the main control device 81 to the notification / effect control device 82 when is started (see the fluctuation start process and the like in FIG. 15). This variable command is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes. For example, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), the first information area 341 of the upper byte (preceding command) and the lower byte (subsequent command). It is configured as 2-byte information including the second information area 342 of the above.

The first information area 341 contains information regarding the presence or absence of a jackpot. For example, as data values that can be set in the first information area 341, a plurality of types of 1-byte data such as "C0H", "C1H", etc. starting from "C" in hexadecimal notation are prepared. These data values (command data) are stored in the command information storage area 224 of the ROM 203. In this modification, when the data value of the first information area 341 is "C0H", it indicates that it is a jackpot result, and when it is "C1H", it indicates that it is an outlier result. Therefore, the notification / effect control device 82 can grasp the result of the winning / failing lottery of the game times corresponding to the received variation command by referring to the data value of the first information area 341 of the variation command. ..

Further, each data value of the first information area 341 is set so that the value (arrangement pattern of 0 and 1) does not match with other commands such as the payout command, and is an eigenvalue used only in the variable command. ing. That is, the data value of the first information area 341 also functions as information indicating that it is a command for variation. Therefore, the notification / effect control device 82 can grasp that the received command is the variation command by referring to the data value of the first information area 341 of the variation command.

The second information area 342 includes information regarding the variable display time of the pattern on the main display unit 43. The information regarding the variable display time is composed of 7-bit data composed of a bit string of the second bit LB2 to the most significant bit LB8, as shown in FIG. 52B, for example. Since the value of the most significant bit LB8 is fixed to 0, the data value of the 7 bits can take up to 63 kinds of values. These data values are also stored in the command information storage area 224 of the ROM 203.

Here, the information regarding the variable display time is constructed not by the second information area 342 alone but by the first information area 341 in combination. For example, even if the 7-bit data value in the second information area 342 is the same "0000001" (binary notation), if the data value in the first information area 341 is "C0H", the variable display time It indicates that it is 20 sec (variable display time when the jackpot result is stopped and displayed after the reach effect), and when the data value of the first information area 341 is "C01H", the variable display time is 8 sec (reach non-occurrence). Indicates that it is the variable display time when the completely off result is stopped and displayed. That is, the second information area 342 is configured to share the data value between the case where the data value of the first information area 341 is "C0H" and the case where the data value is "C01H". With such a configuration, the number of types of data values used in the second information area 342 is reduced, and the amount of ROM 203 used is saved. The notification / effect control device 82 grasps the fluctuation display time based on the data values of the first information area 341 and the second information area 342 of the fluctuation command, and based on the grasped result, the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 Set the variation mode and display effect.

Incidentally, 1 is set for the value of the most significant bit HB8 in the data value of the first information area 341, and 0 is set for the value of the most significant bit LB8 in the data value of the second information area 342. With such a configuration, when the notification / effect control device 82 receives a command, whether the received data corresponds to the first information area 341 (upper byte or preceding command) is the second. It is possible to identify whether it corresponds to the information area 342 (lower byte or subsequent command). Such identification does not necessarily have to be configured using the most significant bit, and may use a predetermined specific bit.

In this modification, the least significant bit LB1 of the second information area 342 is assigned to the information regarding the first fixed display time. For example, when the value of the least significant bit LB1 is 0, it indicates that the first fixed display time is the normal time (0.2 sec), and when the value of the least significant bit LB1 is 1, the first fixed display time is set. Indicates that is a special time (1.5 sec).

In this way, by including the information indicating the length of the first finalized display time in the variable command, the first stop display command can be omitted. As a result, the number of commands can be reduced, and the amount of ROM 203 used can be saved. Further, since the variable command is also used as the notification command for the first fixed display time, the number of times the command is sent and received between the main control device 81 and the notification / effect control device 82 can be reduced, and both control devices can be used. It is possible to reduce the load on both 81 and 82.

Further, in this modification, the second information area 342 is configured to include information regarding the first fixed display time. In the configuration in which the information regarding the first confirmed display time is included in the first information area 341, if the data value of the first information area 341 matches with another command depending on the data value of the first confirmed display time, for example, , Malfunctions such as an abnormality notification being given even though no abnormality has actually occurred may occur. For this reason, it becomes necessary to adjust the data value setting between all the commands so that the misjudgment of the command type does not occur regardless of the data value of the first fixed display time, which increases the burden on the gaming machine design. May lead to. In order to avoid this, it is conceivable to convert the information indicating the command type into 7 bits throughout all the commands, but in this case, the remaining 1 bit in the command other than the variable command may be a surplus bit. In this regard, according to this modification, since the second information area 342 is configured to include information on the first fixed display time, it is easy to harmonize with other commands while suppressing the generation of excess bits. This makes it possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above inconvenience.

Further, in this modification, since the least significant bit LB1 is assigned to the information related to the first fixed display time, it is possible to include the information related to the first fixed display time while keeping the information related to the variable display time in a lump state. As a result, when the notification / effect control device 82 receives the variation command, the information regarding the variation display time and the information regarding the first fixed display time can be easily extracted.

In addition, for example, the information about the first fixed display time may be included in the bit LB4 of the second information area 342 in a form in which the information about the variable display time is divided. In this case, when the output command from the main control device 81 is read for fraudulent purposes, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the information content, which can contribute to the suppression of fraudulent activities.

The data value of the variable command in the above configuration is only an example, and for example, the data value of the first information area 341 may be set to "80H" or the like. Further, the number of bytes and the number of bits of the variable command can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the variable command may have a data structure of 1 byte or a data structure of 3 bytes or more. Further, the number of bits in the second information area 342 is not limited to 8 bits (1 byte), and may be, for example, 7 bits or less, or 9 bits or more. Further, the number of bits allocated to the information related to the first fixed display time in the second information area 342 is not limited to one bit, and may be two or more bits depending on the number of types of the first fixed display time and the like. In this case, a predetermined bit area including the least significant bit LB1 can be assigned to the information regarding the first fixed display time.

<Second embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the fixed display time of the pattern that is variablely displayed on the accessory display unit 44 is set as the special time. In the present embodiment, in order to distinguish between the pattern displayed on the main display unit 43 and the pattern displayed on the accessory display unit 44, the former is referred to as a special symbol or a special symbol, and the latter is a normal symbol. Or it is called a general map. Further, the special symbol game times performed on the main display unit 43 are referred to as special symbol game times, and the normal symbol game times performed on the character display unit 44 are referred to as normal symbol game times.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of opening patterns are set as the opening patterns of the electric accessory 34. When the winning result is obtained in the winning / failing lottery of the general drawing, one of the above-mentioned plurality of opening patterns is selected based on the opening type counter C5, and the switching control of the electric accessory 34 is performed so as to be opened / closed according to the selected opening pattern. Is done.

Here, the open type counter C5 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a schematic diagram for explaining the contents of various counters used for winning / failing lottery and the like. The same components as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The open type counter C5 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The counter C5 is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 of the RAM 204. In the lottery counter buffer 231, the information corresponding to the open type counter C5 is stored in the electric service holding area 350 when the through gate 35 is won. The electric accessory release counter C4 is also stored in the electric service holding area 350.

The electric service holding area 350 includes an electric service holding area Rc and a second execution area AE2 for a general drawing. The holding area Rc includes a first area Rc1, a second area Rc2, a third area Rc3, and a fourth area Rc4, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer 231 according to the winning history of the through gate 35. Each numerical information of the electric accessory opening counter C4 and the opening type counter C5 is stored as hold information in any of the areas.

In this case, in the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4, when the through gate 35 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area Rc1 → the second area Rc2 → the third area Rc3 → the fourth area. Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of Rc4. By providing each of the four areas in this way, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the through gate 35 can be reserved and stored.

The second execution area AE2 for the normal drawing is an area for moving each value stored in the first area Rc1 of the hold area Rc when the variable display of the accessory display unit 44 is started. At the start of the Fuzu game round, an opening determination or the like is performed based on various numerical information stored in the second execution area AE2.

The value of the random number that wins the support state in the normal drawing lottery is stored in the winning / failing table storage area 221 as the winning / failing information group storage means in the ROM 203 as the winning / failing table for the normal drawing. In the normal drawing lottery, the probability of being in the support state (probability of winning the support state) is the same regardless of the level of the support mode, and the common table is used for the normal drawing win / fail table stored in ROM 203. is doing. For example, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), if the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 0 to 99 in the normal drawing pass / fail table, the electric accessory 34 is shifted to the support state for controlling the open state. If the value of C4 is 100 to 199, the electric accessory 34 is set not to shift to the support state without being controlled to the open state.

Here, as an mode of opening / closing control of the electric accessory 34 in the support state, the frequency of winning a prize in the electric accessory 34 from the start to the end of the support state is relatively high or low. High prize support status and low prize support status are set. Further, two types of high prize support states, a first high prize support state and a second high prize support state, are set.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54B, in the first high winning support state, the electric accessory 34 is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the support state. The first opening is performed until 3 seconds have elapsed, and the second opening is performed until 2 seconds have elapsed. On the other hand, in the second high prize support state, the electric accessory 34 is opened and closed twice from the start to the end of the support state. The first opening is performed until 2 seconds have elapsed, and the second opening is performed until 1 sec has elapsed. In both the first high prize support state and the second high prize support state, if the number of prizes to the lower operating port 33b reaches 10 from the start of the support state, the support state is changed at that time. finish. In addition, in each support state, the opening period until the start of the first opening, the closing period (waiting period) between the first opening and the second opening, and the ending period after the end of the second opening are both. It is set to 0.2 sec.

In the low winning support state, the electric accessory 34 is opened and closed once from the start to the end of the support state, and the opening is open until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winnings in the lower operating port 33b is three. It will continue until

In the pachinko machine 10, when the launching handle 54 is operated by the player, the gaming ball launching mechanism 53 is driven and controlled so that one gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area every 0.6 sec. .. On the other hand, in the low winning support state, the opening time of the electric accessory 34 at one time is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low winning support state, the opening time of the electric accessory 34 once is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the support state related to the low winning support state, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

The number of times the electric accessory 34 is opened and closed in the high prize support state and the low prize support state and the opening limit time for one opening and the prize limit number in the lower operating port 33b are lower in the high prize support state. As long as the frequency of winning a prize in the lower operating port 33b from the start to the end of the support state is higher than that in the state, the value is not limited to the above value and is arbitrary. Specifically, the high winning support state has more opening and closing times than the low winning support state, the opening limit time for one opening is long, or the winning limit number for the lower operating port 33b is set to be large. Just do it.

However, in order to clarify the difference in benefits between the high prize support state and the low prize support state, the lower operating port 33b is not substantially won in the support state related to the low prize support state. It is good to say. For example, in the high winning support state, the product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the opening limit number is set shorter than the opening limit time for one opening, while in the low winning support state, for one opening. The product of the firing cycle of the game ball and the open limit number may be set longer than the open limit time. Further, even if the firing interval of the game ball and the opening time of one electric accessory 34 are not as described above, in the low winning support state, the latter is set to be shorter than the former. It is possible to easily realize a configuration in which a prize is not substantially generated in the lower operating port 33b.

The open type counter C5 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, reach the maximum value (that is, 99), and then return to 0. The open type counter C5 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric service holding area 350 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. The distribution destination of the game result with respect to the open type counter C5 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 222 in the ROM 203. Here, as the distribution table for the general map, the distribution table for the general map in the low frequency support mode of FIG. 54 (c) and the distribution table for the general map in the high frequency support of FIG. 54 (d). And are set.

As shown in FIG. 54 (c), in the distribution table for the general map in the low frequency support mode, the open result A and the open result B are set as the distribution destinations for winning the general map. The opening result A is the distribution result in the low winning support state, and the opening result B is the distribution result in the first high winning support state. In the distribution table for general drawing in the low frequency support mode, the opening type counters C5 = 0 to 89 correspond to the opening result A, and C5 = 90 to 99 correspond to the opening result B, while FIG. 54 As shown in (d), in the distribution table for the general map in the high frequency support mode, the open result C and the open result D are set as the distribution destinations for winning the general map. The opening result C is the distribution result in the second high prize support state, and the opening result D is the distribution result in the first high prize support state. In the distribution table for general drawing in the high frequency support mode, the opening type counters C5 = 0 to 94 correspond to the opening result C, and C5 = 95 to 99 correspond to the opening result D.

By the way, in the low-frequency support mode, in order to keep the frequency at which the result of the lottery for winning or losing the normal figure becomes the winning result (opening result) low, the game time related to one game is lengthened by lengthening the variable display time of the normal figure. However, in some cases, measures have been taken to reduce the number of times the lottery is executed per unit time. Although the Fuzu game times are performed in parallel with the special figure game times, in addition to being asynchronous, the variable display times of the Fuzu game times and the special figure game times are different regardless of each other. It is set. For this reason, it is possible that even after the special drawing game is completed, the normal drawing game is still continuing.

Under such a premise, for example, when the player intends to round up the game by the end of the special figure game round, if the continuation state of the normal figure game round occurs, the result of the winning or losing lottery on the normal figure side. However, there may be inconveniences such as the player being unable to finish the game due to concern, or ending the game while leaving an opportunity to shift to the support state. In particular, as in the present embodiment, when the first high winning support state in which the lower operating port 33b can be expected to win the game ball is included in the opening pattern of the electric accessory 34, the game is even more finished. Problems such as difficulty and increased loss when missed are likely to occur. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above-mentioned problem is solved by utilizing the confirmation display of the normal drawing game times. Hereinafter, the configuration of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 to 67.

FIG. 55 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the variable display time and the fixed display time of the normal figure game times when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, and (b) is the normal figure game when the support mode is the high frequency support mode. It is the schematic which shows the fluctuation display time and the final display time of times.

As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the length of the fixed display time of the normal game game is different between the case where the support mode is the low frequency support mode and the case where the support mode is the high frequency support mode. The confirmed display time in the low-frequency support mode is longer than that in the high-frequency support mode.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), when the final display time in the high frequency support mode is the result of the winning / failing lottery, the result of the winning / failing lottery is the winning result and is electric. When the opening type of the accessory 34 is the opening result C (second high winning support state), the result of the winning / failing lottery is the winning result and the opening type of the electric accessory 34 is the opening result D (first high winning support state). ), It is uniformly 0.5 sec.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the final display time in the low frequency support mode is the result of the winning / failing lottery, the result of the winning / failing lottery is the winning result and the electric accessory 34. When the opening type of is the opening result A (low winning support state), it is 16.0 sec in each case. If the result of the winning / failing lottery is the winning result and the opening type of the electric accessory 34 is the opening result B (first high winning support state), the settable fixed display time is 4.0 sec, 10.0 sec. It has three types of 16.0 sec and 16.0 sec, and one selected from them is set.

The variable display time of the normal figure game times in the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode is 4.0 sec, which is common regardless of the result of the normal figure winning / failing lottery and the opening type of the electric accessory 34. Therefore, the game time for one game, which is the sum of the variable display time and the fixed display time, is longer in the low frequency support mode than in the high frequency support mode.

It should be noted that the fluctuation time does not necessarily have to be the common time, and if the game time related to one game in the low frequency support mode is longer than that in the high frequency support mode, it depends on the mode difference. The length may be different, or the length may be different depending on the result of the lottery for winning or failing the drawing and the opening type of the electric accessory 34. This also applies to the confirmed display time, and if the confirmed display time in the low-frequency support mode is longer than that of the high-frequency support itself, the confirmed display time depends on the difference in the winning result of the normal figure. May be different in length. Further, the various specific time lengths described above are examples, and are not limited to the above-mentioned numerical values.

Here, in the present embodiment, the result of the normal drawing winning / failing lottery and the opening type of the electric accessory 34 are notified on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41. FIG. 56 is a schematic view showing the state of the display screen 41a in the normal game game.

As shown in FIG. 56 (a), in the display screen 41a, the normal drawing display area PE is set in the portion above the variable display area ME. A plurality of (two) display units PP1 and PP2 are provided in the normal drawing display area PE, and variable display is possible by switching the display colors in the display units PP1 and PP2. The normal symbol display area PE is smaller than the variable display area in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the display units PP1 and PP2 in the normal symbol display area PE are smaller than each symbol (main symbol and sub symbol).

The normal map display area PE corresponds to the accessory display unit 44, and when the accessory display unit 44 performs variable display, the normal map display area PE also performs variable display. Specifically, the variation display of the display units PP1 and PP2 is performed so that the variation display of the pattern on the accessory display unit 44 matches the variation display start timing and the variation display time. Further, regarding the stop display of the display units PP1 and PP2 (the display color is fixed without switching the display color), the stop display and the stop display start timing and the stop display of the pattern on the accessory display unit 44 are also displayed. It is done so that the times match.

For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (b1), the normal drawing game round is started from the situation where the display colors of the two display units PP1 and PP2 are displayed in the same color or the first display color (for example, white) having substantially the same color. Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (b2), the display color of one display unit PP2 is switched to a second display color (for example, blue) which is a color different from the colors up to that point (in the figure, the color of the display unit). The difference is displayed differently depending on the hatch). After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (b3), the color of the display unit PP2 on the side switched to the second display color is switched to the original first display color, and the color of the other display unit PP1 is the first. The display color is switched to the second display color, and as shown in FIG. 56 (b4), the color of each display unit is switched again.

The variable display of the normal game times is basically repeated switching of the display colors of these two display units (Fig. 56 (b2)-> Fig. 56 (b3)-> Fig. 56 (b4)-> Fig. 56 (b2). Repeatedly). This display color switching is set to make one round in about 0.5 sec, and it is difficult for the player to identify each display before and after the switching.

When the variable display time of the normal figure game times elapses, the result of the game of the normal figure game times is notified as to whether the result is the open result or the result of the deviation from the support state. In the case of the open result, the display units PP1 and PP2 are displayed in the same color, and the variable display ends. At this time, when the open type of the electric accessory 34 is in the low winning support state, as shown in FIG. 56 (b5), both the display units PP1 and PP2 become the second display color and the variable display ends. When the opening type of the electric accessory 34 is the first high winning support state, as shown in FIG. 56 (b6), the display units PP1 and PP2 are both different from the first and second display colors. The display color (for example, red) is changed and the variable display ends. Further, when the opening type of the electric accessory 34 is the second high prize support state, the display units PP1 and PP2 both have a fourth display color (for example, yellow) different from the first to third display colors. The fluctuation display ends. On the other hand, in the case of the deviation result, as shown in FIG. 56 (b1), both of the two display units become the first display color and the variable display ends.

The display mode of the display unit in the normal drawing display area PE is not limited to the above, and may be one in which the number of display units is one, or one in which numbers and symbols are used. That is, the configuration is arbitrary as long as the opening type of the electric accessory 34 can be identified in addition to the identification of the opening result and the disconnection result.

With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, the fixed display time of the normal figure game times in the low frequency support mode is made longer than before, so that the normal figure game times are not completed at the end of the special figure game times. Even if it is, the probability that the normal symbol is in the stopped display state can be increased. When the normal symbol is in the stopped display state, the probability is increased because the result of the normal figure winning / failing lottery and the opening type of the electric accessory 34 can be immediately grasped by visually recognizing the normal figure display area PE on the display screen 41a. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of waiting for the result of the normal drawing itself, and it becomes easy to promptly notify the result of the drawing winning / failing lottery and the opening type of the electric accessory 34.

In addition, while securing the game time of the normal map game times suitable for the low frequency support mode, the time of the variable display can be shortened by the lengthening of the confirmed display time. By shortening the variable display time, it is possible to shorten the waiting time until the stop display is displayed even if the normal figure game times are displayed in a variable manner at the end of the special figure game times.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, the game time (total time of the variable display time and the confirmed display time) related to one game is larger than that when the support mode is the high frequency support mode. It's getting longer. As a result, even if the variable display time is shortened in the low-frequency support mode, the number of executions of the normal figure winning / failing lottery per unit time can be kept low, and the function of the low-frequency support mode is guaranteed. It becomes possible.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to promptly notify the result of the normal drawing success / failure lottery while suppressing the loss of the function of the low frequency support mode. As a result, the player can quickly finish the game after the special figure game round is completed, and the playability is improved.

As shown in FIG. 55, the fixed display time in the high-frequency support mode is short, but it is difficult to assume that the player will end the game during the high-frequency support mode. There is no practical problem, or even if it occurs, it is considered to be minor. Rather, the short fixed display time contributes to shortening the game time related to one game, which is preferable for ensuring the function of the high frequency support mode.

Incidentally, the fixed display time of the special figure game times in the low frequency support mode is, for example, 0.7 sec, which is shorter than the fixed display time of the normal figure game times in the low frequency support mode. As a result, the induction of a feeling of extension in the special figure game is suppressed, and the smooth progress of the game is promoted. In addition, as long as it is within the range shorter than the final display time of the normal drawing game times, the final display time may be diversified as in the first embodiment.

By the way, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration in which the final display time is lengthened, the electric accessory 34 is controlled to be opened after the player grasps the result of the normal drawing winning / failing lottery and the opening type of the electric accessory 34. The grace period until is apt to be long. As a result, when it is grasped that the electric accessory 34 is controlled to be opened without the intention of ending the game, there is a concern about inducing a so-called stop hit in which the game ball is launched at the opening timing of the electric accessory 34. NS.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the result of the lottery for winning or failing the normal figure is the open result in the low frequency support mode and the open type of the electric accessory 34 is the first high winning support state, the normal figure is shown. It is configured to diversify the fixed display time in the game times. This makes it difficult for the player to predict the opening timing of the electric accessory 34, and makes it possible to suppress the stoppage.

As already described, there are three types of specific fixed display times: 4.0 sec, 10.0 sec, and 16.0 sec. Of these, the shortest 4.0 sec is set to be longer than at least the required period (for example, 1.0 sec) from launching the game ball to reaching the electric accessory 34 (lower operating port 33b). ing. By doing so, even if the opening of the electric accessory 34 in the first prize support state is notified while waiting for the result of the normal game game on the premise of the end of the game, the game is immediately played. If the ball is launched, it will be in time for the first opening, and the player will be able to properly enjoy the profit.

The confirmation display time is selected using the distribution table for the normal figure confirmation display time stored in the distribution table storage area of the ROM 203. Here, the distribution table for the fixed display time of the normal figure will be described with reference to FIG. 57.

As shown in FIG. 57, in the distribution table for the fixed display time of the normal figure, the distribution destination of the fixed display time is defined corresponding to the value of the open type counter C5. As the distribution destination of the fixed display time, the fixed display time A (4.0 sec), the fixed display time B (10.0 ssec), and the fixed display time C (16.0 sec) are set. In the distribution table for the fixed display time of the normal figure, the open type counters C5 = 90 to 93 correspond to the fixed display time A, C5 = 94 to 96 correspond to the fixed display time B, and C5 = 97 to 99 are fixed. It corresponds to the display time C. As a random number value for distribution of the fixed display time, the open type counter C5 for distributing the open type of the electric accessory 34 is also used, but a dedicated counter (random value) is used separately from the open type counter C5. May be provided.

Next, in the present embodiment, each control process executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 will be described.

<Processing for electrical support>
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the electric service support process according to the present embodiment. This process is performed in step S405 of the normal process of FIG. 12 according to the first embodiment.

In the electric service support process, first, the normal figure game time control process is executed in step S3401, and then in step S3402, the normal figure game state transition process is executed, and the present support process is completed. That is, the electric service support process basically has the same configuration as the game turn control process (FIG. 13) and the game state transition process (FIG. 16) on the special drawing side. That is, the normal figure game time control process in step S3401 corresponds to the game time control process on the special figure side in FIG. 13, and the normal figure game state transition process in step S3402 corresponds to the game state transition process on the special figure side in FIG. is doing. Hereinafter, the processing of the game turn control process (step S3401) and the game state transition process (step S3402) on the normal drawing side will be described in detail.

<Public game game time control process>
First, the normal drawing game time control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 59.

In the normal game time control process, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the support state is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support status flag is stored in the support status flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The support state flag is stored when shifting to the support state in which the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 34 is performed in the normal figure game state transition process described later, and when the support state is also terminated in the normal figure game state transition process. Will be erased.

When the support state is in progress, none of the processes after step S3502, that is, the process for starting the game round of steps S3503 to S3505 and the process for progressing the game round of step S3506 to S3510 is executed. , End the game time control process of this game. That is, in the support state, the normal game round is not started regardless of whether or not the through gate 35 has been won.

If it is not in the support state, it is determined in step S3502 whether or not the accessory display unit 44 is in the variable display. It should be noted that this determination is performed by determining whether or not the normal map variation display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 has the normal map variation display flag storage area. The normal-figure variation display in-display flag is stored when the variation display is started for the accessory display unit 44, and is deleted when the variation display ends.

If the accessory display unit 44 is not in the variable display, the process proceeds to the normal drawing game round start process in steps S3503 to S3505. In the normal figure game round start process, first, in step S3503, it is determined whether or not the normal figure hold memory number FN is 0. If the number of stored memory FN is 0, the processing for supporting the electric service is terminated as it is.

If the number of FNs stored in the normal map hold is not 0, the normal map data setting process for setting the data stored in the electric service hold area Rc for variable display is executed in step S3504. In the normal figure data setting process, the normal figure hold storage number FN is decremented by 1, and the data stored in the first area of the electric service hold area Rc is moved to the second execution area AE2. Then, the process of shifting the data stored in each storage area of the electric service holding area Rc is executed. That is, it is a process of shifting the data stored in the first area Rc1 to the fourth area Rc4 in order to the lower area side, clearing the data of the first area Rc1 and clearing the data of the first area Rc1 and from the second area Rc2 to the first area Rc1. , 3rd area Rc3 → 2nd area Rc2, 4th area Rc4 → 3rd area Rc3, and so on, the data in each area is shifted. Then, a normal map shift command is set, which is information for causing the notification / effect control device 82, which is a control device on the sub side, to recognize that the data in the holding area on the normal map side has been shifted. In this case, the normal map shift command is read from the command information storage area 224 of the ROM 203, and the normal map shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82.

After the normal map data setting process is executed in step S3504, the normal map fluctuation start process is executed in step S3505, and then the normal map game time control process is terminated. Here, the normal map fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 60.

In the normal figure fluctuation start process, first, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204. As described above, the high-frequency support flag is stored in the game state transition process on the special figure side, and is subsequently deleted when the transition condition is satisfied (when the special figure game times continue 100 times).

If it is not in the high frequency support mode, the hit / fail judgment (support lottery) is performed by referring to the hit / fail table for the low frequency support mode in step S3602, and if it is in the high frequency support mode, it is high in step S3603. The pass / fail judgment is made by referring to the pass / fail table for the frequency support mode. As described above, in the present embodiment, the pass / fail table for the general drawing is used in common regardless of the level of the support mode, and the pass / fail table referred to in step S3602 and step S3603 It is the same as the pass / fail table to be referred to (see FIG. 54 (a)). Therefore, the process of determining the level of the support mode in step S3601 may be omitted.

After the execution of step S3602 or step S3603, in steps S3604 to S3614, the process for setting the game result of the current Fuzu game is executed, and the display unit for the character in the current Fuzu game is executed. A process for setting a stop result when the variable display executed in 44 is terminated is executed. When setting the stop result, among the various stop result tables (stop result information group) stored in the stop result table storage area as the stop result information group storage means in the ROM 203, the stop result table for general drawing is used. Referenced.

Specifically, first, in step S3604, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S3602 or step S3603 is the support state winning. In the case of winning the support state, in steps S365 to S3613, a process for setting the game result in the case of winning the support state, a process for setting the stop result, and the like are executed.

In step S3605, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag is stored in the RAM 204. If a negative determination is made in step S3605, the distribution determination is performed in step S3606 with reference to the general map type table for the low frequency support mode (FIG. 54 (c)). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the opening type counter C5 stored in the second execution area AE2 is included in the numerical range of the opening result A or the numerical range of the opening result B.

In the following step S3607, it is determined whether or not the game result distributed in step S3606 is the result of the low winning support state (opening result A). If the result is a low winning support state, it is displayed in step S3608 that the low winning support state will occur as a result of stopping the accessory display unit 44 in the current game game. Execute the stop result setting process for the low winning support state to set to end the variable display in the state. Further, in step S3608, various flags of the RAM 204 are stored with information (low winning support flag) for specifying in the MPU 202 that the winning / failing judgment result of the current game is the opening result in which the low winning support state is set. Store in area 235.

On the other hand, if the game result distributed in step S3607 is not the result of the low winning support state, that is, if the game result distributed is the opening result B and the first high winning support state is reached, the first high winning prize is supported in step S3609. The stop result setting process for the first high prize support is executed to set to end the variable display with the indication that the high prize support state will occur. Further, in step S3609, the RAM 204 provides information (first high prize support flag) for specifying in the MPU 202 that the result of the hit / fail judgment of this game is the open result of the first high prize support state. It is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3605, the distribution determination is performed in step S3610 with reference to the general map type table (FIG. 54 (d)) for the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the opening type counter C5 stored in the second execution area AE2 is included in the numerical range of the opening result C or the numerical range of the opening result D.

In the following step S3611, it is determined whether or not the game result distributed in step S3610 is the result of the second high winning support state (opening result C). If the result is the second high prize support state, in step S3612, the second high prize support state will occur as a result of the stoppage of the character display unit 44 in the current game game. The stop result setting process for the second high prize support state for setting to end the variable display in the state where the fact is displayed is executed. Further, in step S3612, the RAM 204 provides information (second high prize support flag) for specifying in the MPU 202 that the result of the hit / fail judgment of the current game is the open result of the second high prize support state. It is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of.

On the other hand, if the game result distributed in step S3607 is not the result of the second high winning support state, that is, if the distributed game result is the opening result D and the first high winning support state is reached, in step S3613. The stop result setting process for the first high prize support is executed to set to end the variable display in the state that the first high prize support state is displayed. Further, in step S3613, the RAM 204 provides information (first high prize support flag) for specifying in the MPU 202 that the result of the hit / fail judgment of this game is the open result of the first high prize support state. It is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S3604, in step S3614, as a result of stopping the display unit 44 for the character in this game, the first high prize support state, the second high prize support state, and the low Executes the stop result setting process for disconnection to set to end the variable display with the display that none of the winning support states will occur.

After executing any of the processes of steps S3608, S3609, S3612, and S3613, in step S3615, the normal map variation display for setting the variable display time of the current normal map game times on the accessory display unit 44. Execute the time setting process. In the present embodiment, as described above, the normal map fluctuation display time is uniformly 4.0 sec. Therefore, in step S3615, the normal map fluctuation display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 is provided. Is set to 800 (corresponding to 4.0 sec). The value of the normal map fluctuation display time information set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated.

For each of the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, a variable display time table in which a plurality of types of variable display times are set is stored in the display time table storage area 223 of the ROM 203, and each variable display time table is stored. The variation display time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter for the general drawing may be selected from. In this case, a part of the variable display time that can be selected in the high frequency support mode may be set to be longer than a part of the variable display time that can be selected in the low frequency support mode. Even if the time is selected, the high frequency support mode may be set to be shorter than the low frequency support mode. Further, not only the value of the fluctuation type counter for the normal figure but also the fluctuation display time may be set to be different according to the number of the normal figure reserved storage number FNs, and the larger the number of the normal figure reserved storage number FNs, the more. The variable display time may be set to be short, and vice versa.

After executing the setting process of the normal map variation display time in step S3615, the setting process of the normal figure fixed display time for setting the fixed display time is executed in step S3616. Here, the setting process of the normal figure confirmation display time will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 61.

<Processing for setting the confirmation display time of the general map>
In the setting process of the normal figure confirmation display time, first, in step S3701, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support flag is stored in the RAM 204. If a negative determination is made in step S3701, it is determined in step S3702 whether or not the winning / failing determination result of the current normal drawing game is the opening result (opening result B) that is in the first high winning support state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first high winning support flag is stored in the RAM 204.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3702, the distribution determination is performed in step S3703 with reference to the distribution table (FIG. 57) for the fixed display time of the normal figure. Specifically, the values of the open type counter C5 stored in the second execution area AE2 are the fixed display time A (4.0 sec), the fixed display time B (10.0 sec), and the fixed display time C (16. It is determined which of the numerical ranges of 0 sec) is included. In the following step S3704, in order to set the result sorted in step S3703 as the finalized display time in the current game, the value corresponding to the sorted result is set in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. It is set in the time counter area, and the setting process of the final display time of this normal figure is completed. The value of the normal figure confirmation display time information set in step S3704 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is activated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3702, it means that the winning / failing determination result of the current game is an opening result (opening result A) or a missed result in which the winning support state is low. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3705, 8000 (corresponding to 16.0 sec) is set in the normal map fluctuation display time counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204, and the setting process of the normal figure finalized display time is completed. do.

If a negative determination is made in step S3701, that is, if the support mode is not the high-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S3706, and 250 (0. (Equivalent to 5 sec) is set, and the setting process of the final display time of this normal figure is completed.

Returning to the description of the normal map fluctuation start process (FIG. 60), after the execution of step S3616, the normal map change command and the normal map type command are set in step S3617. The command for changing the normal map includes information on the display time of the normal map change. In addition, the general map type command includes information on the game result. The information on the fixed display time of the normal map is included in the command for changing the normal map.

The command for changing the normal map and the command for the normal figure type set in step S3617 are transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in the external output process in the normal process. The notification / effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect in the normal map game time based on the received command for changing the normal map and the command for the normal map type, and variously so that the content of the determined effect is executed. Control the equipment. The content of this effect includes a variable display mode and a definite display mode of the display units PP1 and PP2 (see FIG. 56) on the symbol display device 41, and the determined variable display mode of the display units PP1 and PP2. Is output from the notification / effect control device 82 to the display control device 212 as a display content command. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the variable display and the definite display corresponding to each normal figure game time are performed based on the display content command received from the notification / effect control device 82.

After that, in step S3618, the variable display of the pattern is started on the display unit 44 for the accessory, and the variable start processing of the present normal figure is completed.

Returning to the description of the normal figure game time control process (FIG. 59), when the accessory display unit 44 is in the variable display, the normal figure game time progress process of steps S3506 to S3510 is executed. In the process for progressing the normal map game, first, in step S3506, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current normal game game has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation display time information for the normal drawing stored in the fluctuation display time counter area of the RAM 204 becomes 0.

If the variation display time has not elapsed, the variation display process is executed in step S3509. In the variable display processing, the accessory display unit 44 controls the display (light emission control of each display segment) so that each display segment is turned on and off in a predetermined order. , End the game time control process of this game.

If the variation display time has elapsed, the variation end process is executed in step S3510, and then the game turn control process of this game is terminated. In the variable end processing of step S3510, the information stored in the RAM 204 is specified in any of the processes of steps S3608, S3609, S3612, S3613 and S3614, and the symbol corresponding to the information is displayed on the accessory display unit 44. The display unit 44 for the accessory is controlled so that the display is stopped.

<Public game state transition process>
Next, the normal-figure game state transition process of step S3402 in the electric service support process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 62 to 64.

First, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the support state is in progress. If it is not in the support state, the process proceeds to step S3802, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the symbol of the normal figure game times of 1 is completed. If it is not the timing when the fluctuation display is finished, the game state transition process is finished as it is.

When it is the timing when the variation display for the normal map is finished, in step S3803, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current normal map game times corresponds to the transition to the support state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the first high winning support flag, the second high winning support flag, and the low winning support flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If any of the above flags is stored, the support state start process is executed in step S3804. In the start process, the waiting time for the opening of the normal map is set. The waiting time for the opening of the normal figure is set to 0.2 sec in all of the first high prize support state, the second high prize support state, and the low prize support state (see FIG. 54 (b)).

In the following step S3805, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. If a negative judgment is made in step S3805, it means that the current support state is the first high prize support state or the low prize support state. Therefore, the process proceeds to step S3806, and the support state of the electric accessory 34 is the first high prize. Determine if it is in support. If an affirmative decision is made in step S3806, 2 is set in the second round counter area RC2 in step S3807. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34 is opened. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3806, 1 is set in the second round counter area RC2 in step S3808.

Further, if an affirmative judgment is made in step S3805, it means that the current support state is the first high prize support state or the second high prize support state. Therefore, in step S3809, 2 is set in the second round counter area RC2. set.

After executing the process of step S3807, S3808 or S3809, the general figure opening command is set in step S3810. This set normal figure opening command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in the external output processing in the normal processing. The notification / effect control device 82 determines the content of the opening effect corresponding to the support state based on the received general map opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

In the following step S3811, after executing the external signal setting process, the present game state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the accessory release signal provided on the external output terminal plate 99 is set to the open signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the accessory release signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the accessory release signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 is output to the management control device. It is possible to grasp that the support status has occurred.

Further, in the external signal setting process, it is determined whether or not the first high winning support flag or the second high winning support flag is stored in the RAM 204, and if any of the flags is stored, the external output terminal. The signal output state of the output terminal for the high winning support state signal provided on the board 99 is defined as the high winning support state signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the high winning support status signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the high winning support status signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine in the management control device. It is possible to grasp that the high prize support state has occurred at 10.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3801 that it is in the support state, the process proceeds to step S3812. In step S3812, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the accessory opening / closing process is executed in step S3813. Here, the accessory opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 63.

<Opening and closing of accessories>
In the accessory opening / closing process, it is determined in the previous step S3901 whether or not the electric accessory 34 is being opened. Specifically, such a determination is made based on the driving state of the electric accessory driving unit 34b. When the electric accessory 34 is not open, it is determined in step S3902 whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is 0, and it is provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S3903. It is determined whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 is 0.

If the value of the second round counter area RC2 is 0 or the value of the second timer area T2 is not 0, the main accessory opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not 0 and the value of the second timer area T2 is 0, the process proceeds to step S3904, and the electric accessory drive unit 34b is set to open the electric accessory 34. Put it in the driving state (accessory release processing). In the following step S3905, the setting process for each round is executed. The setting process for each round will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the support mode is a high-frequency support mode. If it is not in the high frequency support mode, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the support state is the first high winning support state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4102, the process proceeds to step S4103 to determine whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is 2, that is, whether or not it is the first opening.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4103, "1500" is set in the second timer area T2 provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S4104, and 3.0 sec is set as the upper limit period of the first opening. .. In the following step S4105, 10 is set in the second winning counter area PC2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204, and the setting process for each round is completed. The second winning counter area PC2 is for counting the number of winnings in the lower operating port 33b, and when the electric accessory 34 is opened and closed in the first high winning support state by the process of step S4105. The upper limit of the number of winnings to the lower operating port 33b is set to 10. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4103, it means that the opening is the second time. In this case, in step S4106, "1000" is set in the second timer area T2, and 2.0 sec is set as the upper limit of the open period. After that, the setting process for each round is completed.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4102, it means that the support state is the low winning support state. In this case, "100" (corresponding to 0.2 sec) is set in the second timer area T2 in step S4107, and 3 is set in the second winning counter area PC2 in step S4108 to end this setting process. ..

Further, when the affirmative judgment is made in step S4101, that is, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, it is determined in step S4109 whether or not the support state is the first high winning support state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4109, the process proceeds to the above steps S4103 and subsequent steps. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4109, it means that the support state is the second high winning support state. In this case, the process proceeds to step S4110, and it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is 2, that is, whether or not it is the first opening.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4111, "1500" is set in the second timer area T2 provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S4111, and 2.0 sec is set as the upper limit period of the first opening. .. In the following step S4112, 10 is set in the second winning counter area PC2 provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204, and the setting process for each round is completed. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S4110, "500" is set in the second timer area T2 in step S4113, and 1.0 sec is set as the upper limit of the opening period. After that, the setting process for each round is completed.

Returning to the description of the accessory opening / closing process (FIG. 64), after executing the setting process for each round in step S3905, the normal figure opening command is set in step S3906 to end the present accessory opening / closing process. This set normal map release command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in the external output processing in the normal processing. The notification / effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the support state based on the received general map release command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

If the electric accessory 34 is open in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3907 to determine whether or not the value of the second timer area T2 is 0. If the value of the second timer area T2 is not 0, it is determined in step S3908 whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the lower operating port 33b. If a negative determination is made in step S3908, the main character opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative judgment is made in step S3908, after decrementing the value of the second winning counter area PC2 by 1 in step S3909, whether or not the value of the second winning counter area PC2 is 0 is determined in step S3910. judge. If a negative determination is made in step S3910, the opening / closing process of the main character is terminated as it is.

When the value of the second timer area T2 is 0 in step S3907, or when the value of the second winning counter area PC2 is 0 in step S3910, it means that the accessory closing condition is satisfied. In such a case, in step S3911, the electric accessory driving unit 34b is put into a non-driving state in order to close the electric accessory 34 (accessory closing process).

In the following step S3912, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and in step S3913, it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is 0. If a negative determination is made in step S3913, it means that the first opening process of the electric accessory 34 has been completed. Therefore, in step S3914, the second timer is set as a waiting period until the second opening process is executed. Set "100" (corresponding to 0.2 sec) in the area T2.

In the following step S3915, the normal figure closing command is set, and the opening / closing process of the main character is completed. This set normal map closing command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in the external output processing in the normal processing. The notification / effect control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the support state based on the received normal map closing command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3913, that is, if the value of the second round counter area RC2 is 0, the end processing of the supported state is executed in step S3916. In this process, the waiting time for the ending of the normal map is set. The waiting time for the ending of the normal figure is set to 0.2 sec in all of the first high winning support state, the second high winning support state, and the low winning support state (see FIG. 54 (b)). After that, in step S3917, after setting the normal figure ending command, the opening / closing process of the main character is terminated. The set normal figure ending command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 82 in the external output processing in the normal processing.

Returning to the description of the normal game state transition process (FIG. 62), after executing the accessory opening / closing process in step S3813, the process proceeds to step S3814. In step S3814, it is determined whether or not the value of the second round counter area RC2 is 0. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3814, the process proceeds to step S3815 to determine whether or not the waiting time for ending has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3815, the end processing of the supported state is executed in step S3816. In the end processing of the support state, various flags for the support state such as the first high winning support flag, the second high winning support flag, and the low winning support flag are deleted. After that, the game state transition process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in steps S3812, S3814 or S3815, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

Next, processing related to various effects on the normal drawing side executed by the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82 in the present embodiment will be described. As the processing related to various effects on the normal map side, the normal map variation display control process related to the production control of the normal map game times is set. This process is started every predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

<Public map fluctuation display control processing>
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing a normal map variation display control process executed by the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82.

In the normal figure variation display control process, first, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not the normal figure game is being played, that is, whether or not the symbol display device 41 is executing the variable display of the normal symbol for one game. do. If a negative determination is made in step S4201, it is determined in step S4202 whether or not the command for changing the normal map transmitted from the main control device 81 has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4202, the present general map variation display control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S4203, that is, when a command for changing the normal figure is received, in step S4203, the process for starting the change in the normal figure for starting the effect for playing the normal figure is performed. Execute. Here, the process for starting the fluctuation of the normal map will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

<Process for starting fluctuation of general map>
In the normal map fluctuation start process, first, in step S4301, the normal map fluctuation command received this time is read, and the fluctuation display time information is specified from the command. Further, as described above, when the main control device 81 transmits the command for changing the normal map, the main control device 81 also transmits the command for the normal map type. Therefore, in step S4301, the command for the normal map type received together with the command for changing the normal map received this time is read, and the game result information is specified from the command. In step S4301, information on whether or not the opening result is obtained, information on the opening type in the case of the opening result, information on the variable display time, and information on the confirmed display time are grasped.

Next, in step S4302, based on the information grasped in step S4301, a process of setting the stop result in the normal drawing game round to be started this time is executed. That is, when the information specified in step S4301 is the opening result, the display units PP1 and PP2 (see FIG. 56) are displayed in the display color corresponding to the opening type at the end of the variation display in the current game. If the stop result is set so as to display the stop, and if the information specified in step S4301 is an incorrect result, the display units PP1 and PP2 are first displayed at the end of the variation display in the current normal game game. Set the stop result so that the stop display is displayed in the display color.

In the following step S4303, the setting process for the special display effect is executed to execute the special display effect when the electric accessory 34 is opened and closed in the first high winning support state. Here, the special display effect will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67A is a schematic diagram showing a special display effect, and FIG. 67B is a timing chart showing the relationship between the execution start timing of the special display effect and the final display time.

As shown in FIG. 67A, in the present embodiment, a special display effect is performed on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41. This special display effect is for notifying the player that the electric accessory 34 is open / closed controlled in the first high winning support state, that is, the game ball is likely to win a prize in the lower operating port 33b. It is a thing. As a special display effect, for example, a character display 401 such as "Aim for electric chew !!" is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 41a, or the background color on the display screen 41a is a dedicated color different from the background color up to that point. It is conceivable that the configuration may be changed to.

The "electric chew" is an abbreviation for an electric tulip, in other words, a common name for an electric accessory 34 and a lower operating port 33b. Further, displaying the display 401 in the lower center of the display screen 41a corresponds to the position of the electric accessory 34 and the lower operating port 33b below the center of the display screen 41a, and the display 401 is displayed on the display screen 41a. It is displayed in the area closer to the electric accessory 34 and the lower operating port 33b.

The above special display effect is a dedicated effect for the low frequency support mode, and is performed only when the electric accessory 34 is opened and closed in the first high winning support state under the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. It is said. In the low-frequency support mode, the frequency with which the electric accessory 34 is switched to the open state is low, so it is assumed that the player's interest in the electric accessory 34 has diminished. For this reason, the player may not notice just by opening the electric accessory 34, and the support state may end without experiencing the fun of aiming for a prize in the electric accessory 34 (lower operating port 33b). By performing the above-mentioned effect display, it is possible to promote the player's awareness, and it is possible to preferably provide the above-mentioned fun. Further, even a player who is about to end the game can recognize the opening of the electric accessory 34 by visually recognizing the effect display, and the display unit 44 for the accessory, the display units PP1 and PP2, and the electric accessory can be recognized. The burden of keeping staring at 34 is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67 (b), the special display effect is configured to be executed before the opening of the electric accessory 34 in order to notify the player in advance that the electric accessory 34 will be released. .. The execution period of the special display effect before the opening of the electric accessory 34 is randomized, and can be changed within the range of, for example, 2.0 sec to 5.0 sec. That is, three types of execution periods of 2.0 sec, 4.0 sec, and 5.0 sec are prepared as the execution period of the special display effect, and one of them is randomly selected each time the special display effect is executed. The shortest time, 2.0 sec, is at least the required period (for example, 1.0 sec) from the launch of the game ball to the arrival at the electric accessory 34 (lower operating port 33b), as in the case of the fixed display time. It is set to be longer than.

With the above configuration, so-called stoppage can be suitably suppressed while notifying the occurrence of the first high winning support state in advance. That is, if the execution period of the special display effect is fixed to a predetermined period, the start timing of the electric accessory 34 can be predicted from the start timing of the special display effect, and the significance of randomizing the fixed display time. Can be lost. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the start timing of the electric accessory 34 can be made difficult or unpredictable because the execution period of the special display effect is diversified.

The display mode of the special display effect in each execution period is common, and it is visually difficult or indistinguishable. This makes it difficult to predict the execution period from the content of the special display effect, and it is possible to strengthen the suppression of stoppage. In this case, it is not always necessary to standardize the display mode of the special display effect. For example, as in the case where a part of the special display effect of 2.0 sec and a part of the special display effect of 4.0 sec are common, the display modes are duplicated between the special display effects. It may be configured. The point is that the execution period cannot be uniquely specified from the content (appearance) of the special display effect.

The selection of the execution period of the special display effect is executed by the notification / effect control device 82, regardless of the selection result of the fixed display time in the main control device 81. Therefore, even if the shortest fixed display time A (4.0 sec) is selected as the fixed display time in the main control device 81, the longest 5.0 sec is selected in the notification / effect control device 82. There can be. As described above, in the present embodiment, there may be a case where the special display effect cannot be executed only in the final display.

Therefore, the notification / effect control device 82 is configured to determine the type and time length of the fixed display time selected by the main control device 81, and adjust the start timing of the special display effect based on the result. That is, as shown in FIG. 67 (b), when the fixed display time selected by the main control device 81 is shorter than the execution period of the special display effect selected by itself, it precedes the start of the fixed display. And start the special display effect. On the contrary, as shown in FIG. 67 (c), when the confirmed display time selected by the main control device 81 is longer than the execution period of the special display effect selected by itself, the special display is displayed during the confirmed display. Start the production. With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately secure the time for the special display effect even when the fixed display time is irregularly changed.

Returning to the description of the normal figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 66), in the setting process for the special display effect in step S4303, the execution period selection process of the special display effect and the confirmed display time selected by the main control device 81 are performed. The type and time length of the special display effect are grasped, the final display time is determined whether or not it is longer than the execution period of the special display effect, and the start timing of the special display effect is set based on the result of the determination process. Of these, the process of grasping the type and time length of the fixed display time is performed based on the information of the fixed display time included in the command for changing the general map from the main control device 81. After setting the start timing of the special display effect, a command for starting the special display effect is output to the display control device 212 based on the arrival of the start timing. The display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 so that the special display effect is started on the display screen 41a based on the command. The display control device 212 may perform various processes in step S4303.

In the following step S4304, a process of outputting a command to the display control device 212 is executed so as to start the production for the normal map game, and then the process for starting the change of the normal map is ended. Based on the received command, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 performs display control on the symbol display device 41 to execute the effect in the current game game. It should be noted that, as described above, since the normal map game round only switches the display colors of the display units PP1 and PP2 in the normal map display area PE, the display control device 212 receives the above command. Based on this, the display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed so as to periodically execute the display color switching display of the display unit.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

The fixed display time of the normal game times when the support mode is the low frequency support mode is longer than that when the support mode is the high frequency support mode. As a result, it is possible to promptly notify the result of the normal drawing winning / failing lottery while suppressing the impaired function of the low frequency support mode. As a result, the player can promptly end the game after the end of the special figure game.

When the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the fixed display time of the regular game times is made longer than the fixed display time of the special game times. The following effects are expected by adopting such a configuration. In the present embodiment, the display units PP1 and PP2 corresponding to the normal figure game times are smaller than the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 corresponding to the special figure game times, and the accessory display unit 44 is the game. Since it is provided at a position away from the center of the front surface of the board 24, all of them are inconspicuous. In addition, the winning result of the regular drawing winning / failing lottery tends to be smaller than the winning result of the special drawing winning / failing lottery. Therefore, it is considered that the player's interest is likely to be directed to the special figure game time during the game, and the player visually recognizes the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the effect display related to the special figure game time in most of the games. Under such circumstances, the whereabouts of the lottery for winning or failing the drawing may suddenly become anxious, and the line of sight may shift to the display units PP1, PP2, and the like.

In such a case, since the fixed display time of the normal drawing game times is long, the probability that the display units PP1, PP2, etc. are in the stopped display state increases when the player shifts his / her line of sight. When the display units PP1, PP2, etc. are in the stopped display state, the result of the normal figure winning / failing lottery and the open type of the electric accessory 34 can be immediately grasped. There will be more opportunities to quickly grasp. As a result, the frequency with which the line of sight can be quickly returned to the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is increased, and the stop result of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the oversight of the effect display are suppressed.

In this case, it is conceivable that the fixed display time of the special figure game times is also lengthened according to the normal figure game times. However, if the definite display time is lengthened while the degree of attention to the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is high, it is easy to give the player an impression of being delayed, and the motivation for playing may be hindered. In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the final display time of the special figure game times is shortened, it is possible to preferably suppress this. That is, according to the present embodiment, the fixed display time of the normal figure game times is relatively long, and the fixed display time of the special figure game times is relatively short, so that the result of the normal figure winning / failing lottery, etc. It becomes possible to suppress the stagnation of the game progress while making it easy to quickly grasp.

<Modified example of the second embodiment>
This modification is different from the second embodiment in that it is determined whether or not the player is suspending the game, and the final display time of the normal drawing game is set based on the result. Hereinafter, the configuration of this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 72.

It was described in the second embodiment above that the result of the lottery for winning or losing the game and the opening type of the electric accessory 34 can be notified to the player as soon as possible by lengthening the fixed display time of the game. However, for example, if the hold information of the Fuzu game is stored at the end of the special map game, even if the result of the Fuzu game in progress is known early, those Fuzu game times You will have to wait until you know the result. As a countermeasure, it is conceivable to shorten the game time related to one game and advance the start timing of the next game, but in this case, the frequency of executing the lottery for winning or losing the game per unit time becomes high. The problem arises that the functionality of the infrequent support mode is compromised.

In view of this point, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 68, even when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, when the game is paused, the final display time of the normal game game times is shortened. It is configured. The reason why the lottery for winning or losing the game per unit time is increased is that the game time of the game is shortened, so that the stored hold information continues to be digested in a short period of time, and at the same time, the game ball is through-gate. It is considered that by passing through 35, new pending information is replenished one after another. In this respect, in this modification, the final display time is lengthened as in the second embodiment when the game is in progress, but it is shortened when the game is paused. As a result, it is possible to shorten the game time of the normal figure game while suppressing the loss of the function of the low frequency support mode, and when the hold information of the normal figure is stored at the end of the special figure game. As a result, it becomes possible to shorten the waiting time.

As shown in FIG. 68, the specific time length when the confirmation display time is shortened may be 0.5 sec, which is the same as the time length when the support mode is the high frequency support mode. It may be different. In short, when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, it suffices if the fixed display time during the game pause is shorter than the fixed display time during the game, and the specific time length is arbitrary.

Next, in this modification, each control process executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 will be described.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a normal process in this modification. This process is performed in place of the normal process of FIG. 12 according to the first embodiment, and is different from the normal process of FIG. 12 in that the game pause determination process of step S4501 is added. ing. Since the processing of steps S4502 to S4510 is the same as the processing of steps S401 to S409 in the normal processing of FIG. 12, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the normal process, first, in step S4501, a game pause determination process for determining whether or not the player is paused is executed. Here, the game pause determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 70.

In the game pause determination process, first, in step S4601, it is determined whether or not the game pause flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The game pause flag is set when the player determines that the game is paused. If a negative determination is made in step S4601, it is determined in step S4602 whether or not the pause timer flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The pause timer flag is set when determining whether or not the firing stop state has been continued for a predetermined period in determining the game suspension, and the elapsed period during the firing stop is being measured. Is shown.

If a negative determination is made in step S4602, it is determined in step S4603 whether or not the launch of the game ball is stopped. Specifically, with reference to the launch operation status of the player on the launch handle 54 or the launch status of the game ball on the game ball launch mechanism 53, whether or not the launch operation is performed, or the game ball is launched. Judge whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4603, it is determined in step S4604 whether or not the variation is being displayed in the special figure game times. If a negative determination is made in step S4604, it is determined in step S4605 whether or not the common hold number CRN of the special figure is 0.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S4605, the pause timer flag is set in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 in order to measure the firing stop period in step S4606, and in the subsequent step S4607, the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 are set. “5000” (equivalent to 10.0 sec) is set in the provided third timer area T3. The count value set here is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in steps S4603 and S4605, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S4604, the game suspension determination process is terminated as it is. After the execution of step S4607, it is determined in step S4608 whether or not the value of the third timer area T3 is 0. If a negative determination is made in step S4608, the game suspension determination process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4602, that is, if the pause timer flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, it is determined in step S4609 whether or not the game ball has been fired. That is, in step S4609, after it is determined in step S4603 that the launching of the game ball is stopped, it is determined whether or not the launching operation of the game ball is restarted. This process is performed in the same manner as in step S4603.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4609, the pause timer flag stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 is erased in step S4610, and then the game pause determination process ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4609, the process proceeds to step S4608 to determine whether or not the value of the third timer area T3 is 0.

Then, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4608, that is, if the firing stop state is continued for 10.0 seconds, it is determined that the game is suspended. In this case, in step S4611, the game pause flag is set in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. Further, in step S4611, the pause timer flag stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 is erased. After the execution of step S4611, the game suspension determination process is terminated.

As described above, in this modification, it is determined that the game is suspended when the firing stop state is continued for 10.0 seconds. Since the launch of the game ball is indispensable for the progress of the game, this configuration makes it easier to properly determine the game suspension. At that time, the game suspension is determined in consideration of the fluctuation status of the special figure game times and the storage status of the special figure hold information. This makes it easier to more appropriately determine the game suspension.

That is, if a reach effect or the like is performed in the special figure game, the player may be looking at it and taking his / her hand off the firing handle 54, and if the special figure hold information exists, it will be in the future. However, it means that the game will continue, and depending on the number of holdings, there is a possibility that the launch operation is just refrained. In this modified example, when the special figure game times are being displayed in a variable manner or when the special figure hold information is stored, it is considered that the game is in progress even if the launch of the game ball is stopped. The determination accuracy can be improved and erroneous determination can be suppressed as compared with the case where only whether or not the game ball is fired is used as the determination material.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4601, that is, if the game pause flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204, it is determined in step S4613 whether or not the game ball has been fired. That is, in step S4613, after determining that the game is suspended in step S4608, it is determined whether or not the launch operation of the game ball is restarted. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4613, the game pause flag stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 is erased, and the determination state indicating that the game is paused is released.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4613, whether or not the normal figure game round is completed (the confirmation display of the normal figure game round is finished) and the reserved number FN of the normal figure is 0 in step S4615. To judge. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4615, the process proceeds to step S4614, the game pause flag stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 is erased, and the determination state indicating that the game is paused is released. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4615, the main game suspension determination process is terminated as it is, and the determination state indicating that the game is suspended is continued.

<Processing for setting the confirmation display time of the general map>
FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing a setting process of the normal figure confirmation display time in this modified example. This process is performed in place of the process of setting the normal map confirmation display time of FIG. 61 according to the second embodiment, and is executed at the start of the fluctuation of the normal map game times. The normal map confirmation display time setting process in this modification is different from the normal map final display time setting process in the second embodiment in that the process of step S4702 is added.

In the setting process of the normal figure confirmation display time, first, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not the support mode is the high frequency support mode. If a negative determination is made in step S4701, it is determined in step S4702 whether or not the game pause flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S4702, the process proceeds to step S4703, 250 (corresponding to 0.5 sec) is set in the normal map fluctuation display time counter area provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204, and the main map finalized display time is set. Ends the setting process of. As a result, the final display time when it is determined that the game is paused is set to 0.5 sec.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4702, the process proceeds to step S4704, and it is determined whether or not the winning / failing determination result of the current game is the opening result (opening result B) that is in the first high winning support state. do. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4704, the processing of steps S4705 and S4706 is executed, and if a negative determination is made in step S4704, the processing of step S4707 is executed. The processing of steps S4705 to S4707 is the same as the processing of steps S3703 to S3705 in FIG. After the execution of steps S4706 and S4707, the process of setting the final display time of the normal figure is completed. If a negative determination is made in step S4701, that is, if the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S4703 to set the confirmation display time to 0.5 sec, and then the confirmation display time of the present normal figure is set. Ends the setting process of.

<About the flow of the game>
Next, the flow of the game (mainly the transition state of the fixed display time of the normal figure game times) when the support mode is the low frequency support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 72. Here, it is assumed that the results of the winning / failing lottery for the Fuzu game are all out of the question.

At the timing t91, when the game pause flag is off, that is, when the variable display of the normal game time A is started in the state where it is determined that the game is in progress, the confirmation display of the game time A is confirmed. Time is set to 16.0 sec. After the start of the confirmation display, when the game pause flag is turned on at the timing t92, that is, when it is determined that the game is in the game pause state, at the timing t93 which is the time when the change of the game turn B, which is the next normal game turn, starts. , The final display time of the game time B is set to 0.5 sec. That is, the fixed display time is shortened, and the start timing (timing t95) of the game round C, which is the next normal game round, is further shortened. As a result, in the state where the game is paused, it becomes possible to know the result (out-of-order result) of the normal figure winning / failing lottery in the game round C earlier than in the case where the game is in progress.

When the player fires the game ball and restarts the game at the timing t94 during the variable display of the game time B, the game suspension flag is turned off and the determination state indicating that the game is suspended is released. Along with this, the final display time of the game time C is set to 16.0 sec at the time of disclosure of the fluctuation of the game time C (timing t95). That is, the fixed display time is restored to the longer time, and the fixed display time is changed to be suitable for the low frequency support mode. As a result, it is possible to suppress an act of intentionally shortening the game time of the normal game game without the intention of ending the game.

According to the present modification described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

It is determined whether or not the player is pausing the game, and if it is determined that the game is paused, the fixed display time of the normal drawing game times is shortened. As a result, even if the reserved information of the normal figure is stored at the end of the special figure game, it is possible to promptly notify the player of the result of the normal figure winning / failing lottery and the opening type of the electric accessory 34.

Further, with the above configuration, the following effects can be expected. For example, if the pachinko game continues for a long time even after the game is over, when the next player tries to play the pachinko machine 10, the hold information of the normal symbol generated by the previous player remains. It is possible that there is a pachinko game or a pachinko game is being played. In that case, it becomes difficult for the next player to determine whether the previous player who was playing until then has finished the game or is still playing, and it may be confusing whether it is okay to start the game. obtain. In this regard, according to the present modification, after the player who has been playing the game ends the game and leaves, the remaining pending information is promptly digested. Therefore, when the next player tries to start the game, it is suppressed that the hold information remains or the normal game game is performed. This makes it easier for the next player to start the game, and the playability is improved.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when a predetermined abnormality occurs, the length of the confirmed display time is changed. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an error handling process according to the present embodiment. This process is started by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle).

In step S4801, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is open. The inner frame 13 is provided with a front door opening switch that detects that the front door frame 14 has been opened with respect to the inner frame 13. The front door opening switch is connected to the main control device 81, and the main control device 81 can determine that the front door frame 14 has been opened by determining the detection signal from the front door opening switch. (For example, if the detection signal is an HI signal, it is determined that the front door frame 14 is open, and if the detection signal is a LOW signal, it is determined that the front door frame 14 is closed). If it is determined that the front door frame 14 is open, the door opening notification process is executed in step S4802. In the notification process, processing is performed to display on the display screen 41a that the front door frame 14 has been opened and to emit a warning sound from the speaker unit 64. In the present embodiment, the game is not stopped even if the front door frame 14 is opened, and the game can be continued.

After performing the process of step S4802, in step S4803, it is determined whether or not the current process timing is the timing before the confirmation display and the game round is being executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4803, in step S4804, a value obtained by adding 1 to the current value of the common hold number CRN is set in the error counter EK provided in various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204. The error counter EK is a counter for the MPU 202 to grasp the number of hold information stored on hold at the time when a predetermined abnormality occurs in playing the game. For example, if the current common hold number CRN is "3", "4" is input to the error counter EK, and if the common hold number CRN is "8", "9" is input to the error counter EK.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4803, a process of setting the current value of the common hold number CRN in the error counter EK is executed in step S4805. For example, if the common hold number CRN is "3", "3" is input to the error counter EK, and if the common hold number CRN is "0" and the game is not being executed, the error counter EK is "0". ".

If it is determined in step S4801 that the front door frame 14 is not open, the process proceeds to step S4806. In step S4806, it is determined whether or not the lower plate 72 is full. A lower plate full tank switch for detecting that the game balls discharged to the lower plate 72 are full (full tank) is provided at a downstream position of the passage for discharging the game balls to the lower plate 72. .. The lower plate full tank switch is connected to the main control device 81, and the main control device 81 determines whether or not the lower plate 72 is in the full tank state by determining the detection signal from the lower plate full tank switch. It is possible to determine (for example, if the detection signal is an HI signal, it is determined that the lower plate is full, and if the detection signal is a LOW signal, it is determined that the lower plate is not full). If it is determined that the lower plate is full, the lower plate full notification process is executed in step S4807. In the notification process, a process for displaying on the display screen 41a that the lower plate is full or for emitting a warning sound from the speaker unit 64 is performed, and the game ball of the lower plate 72 is put into a so-called dollar box. Instruct to move. In the present embodiment, the game is not stopped even when the lower plate is full, and the game can be continued.

After that, in steps S4803 to S4805, a process of setting a value in the error counter EK is performed.

If it is determined in step S4806 that the lower plate is not full, it is determined in step S4808 whether or not the ball is clogged. The ball clogging is an event in which a game ball is clogged in a passage or a mechanism portion through which a game ball passes, such as a payout motor of the payout device 96, a payout passage, or a discharge passage from the game area PE. The determination of whether or not the ball is jammed is made, for example, when the payout motor malfunctions or is different from the payout number (the number of game balls paid out from the payout device 96) with respect to the payout instruction number (prize ball number, etc.). It is detected and determined by various detection switches connected to the main control device 81. If the ball is clogged, the ball jam notification process is executed in step S4809. In the notification process, a process for displaying that the ball is clogged on the display screen 41a or for emitting a warning sound from the speaker unit 64 is performed. In the present embodiment, the game is not stopped even if the ball is clogged, and the game can be continued.

After that, in steps S4803 to S4805, a process of setting a value in the error counter EK is performed.

After executing the process of step S4804 or step S4805, or when a negative determination is made in step S4808, the error handling process ends after performing other handling processes in step S4810. In step S4810, for example, when an error (abnormality) for stopping the game occurs, a process for forcibly stopping the game is performed, or a notification process corresponding to the forced stop is performed. The error that should stop the game is, for example, the case where these abnormalities are detected by the abnormality detection switch for magnetism, radio waves, vibrations, etc. connected to the main control device 81.

In the stop start processing in the present embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 74, whether or not a value is set in the above error counter EK in step S4901 (whether or not the value is greater than 0) is determined. judge. If the value of the error counter EK is 0, the process proceeds to step S1201 and the first finalized display time is set according to the hold notice.

If the error counter EK is not 0 but 1 or more, the process of subtracting 1 from the error counter EK is executed in step S4902. In the following step S4903, the first confirmed display time of the game times being executed this time is longer than the first confirmed display time (0.2 sec or 1.5 sec) set in the processes after step S1201. Perform the process of setting as a certain 5 sec. Then, in step S4904, the process of starting the first confirmation display is performed, and then the process at the start of this stop is completed.

In the stop start process on the notification / effect control device 82 side, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 75, in step S5001, a process of grasping the first fixed display time of the current game times is executed, and in step S5002. , It is determined whether or not the first confirmed display time of the current game times is 1.5 sec. If it is 1.5 sec, the setting process of the hold notice effect is executed in step S5003. The processing of steps S5001 to S5003 is the same as the processing of steps S1601 to S1603. If the first confirmed display time is not 1.5 sec in step S5002, the process proceeds to step S5004 to determine whether or not the first confirmed display time of the current game is 5.0 sec. The case of 5.0 sec is a case where it is determined in the stop start processing on the main control device 81 side that the value of the error counter EK is not 0. In this case, in step S5005, the delay effect setting process is executed. In the delay effect setting process, the display control device 101 and the like are controlled so that the delay effect for notifying that the first fixed display time of the current game times is longer than usual is performed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), it is assumed that the error counter EK is set in a situation where the fluctuation display of the game times is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 76 (b), when the variation display of the current game times is completed, as shown in FIG. 76 (c), each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is simply stopped and displayed, and the result notification is performed. Not only that, at a position (for example, up and down) that does not overlap with the variable display area ME on the display screen 41a, a delayed telop UP of "slowly digesting" is displayed to indicate that the start of the next game round is delayed. ..

After executing the process of step S5003 or step S5005, or when it is determined in step S5004 that it is not 5.0 sec (when it is 0.2 sec), the confirmation display start process is executed in step S5006. The process of step S5006 is the same as the process of step S1604. After executing the process of step S5006, the process for starting the main stop is terminated.

The flow of the game when the value is set in the error counter EK will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 77.

The variation display of the game times started at the timing t1 ends at the timing t2, and the definite display time of 0.7 sec (the first definite display time of 0.2 sec and the second definite display time of 0.5 sec) is set. If so, the confirmation display time elapses at the timing t3, and the next game round is started. It is assumed that, for example, the front door frame 14 is opened and the error counter EK is set at the timing t4, which is the timing (timing before the confirmation display) during the variation display of the game times started at the timing t3. In this case, since the common hold number CRN is 1 (see FIG. 77 (c)), 2 is set in the error counter EK. Then, when the variable display of the current game times is completed at the timing t5 and the fixed display time is set, the first fixed display time is set as 5.0 sec, and then the second fixed display time is 0. It is set as .5 sec. In this case, since the error counter EK is subtracted by 1, it is updated from 2 to 1 set at the timing t4. Further, the front door frame 14 is closed at the timing t6 during the final display time of the game times this time.

When the next game round is started at the timing t7, the common hold number CRN is subtracted by 1 to become 0. Then, when the variation display of the game times ends at the timing t8, the first finalized display time is set to 5.0 sec. In this case, the error counter EK is subtracted by 1 to 0.

For example, if the hold information is acquired during the first finalized display time set at the timing t8, a new game round is started at the timing t9, which is the end timing of the current finalized display time. However, since the error counter EK is 0 in this game round, 0.2 sec for normal use is set when the first finalized display time is set at the timing t10.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

Since the length of the confirmed display time is extended based on the occurrence of a predetermined error, for example, the manager of the game hall or the like takes measures against the error, so that the result of the game round is overlooked. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such an event.

The target of the predetermined error is, for example, that the front door frame 14 is opened, the lower plate is full, or the ball is clogged as an event in which the game progress is continued. For example, if an error occurs that detects magnetism, radio waves, vibration, etc., the game is stopped. As a result, the game progress can be made smoother as compared with the configuration in which the game is uniformly stopped based on the occurrence of an error.

The confirmation display time is extended for the unreported pending information that remains when an error occurs. A configuration is also conceivable in which the fixed display time of a predetermined number of times is extended based on the occurrence of an error. However, if this is done, for example, even though the game times are not executed when an error occurs, for example, the game times are not executed. There is an inconvenience that the confirmed display time is extended when the game is played after that, or for example, even though a large amount of hold information is stored when an error occurs, only a part of it is extended. Can occur. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to take measures according to the actual situation when an error occurs.

Also in the above embodiment, since the confirmation display time is set after the start of the game times and at the start of the confirmation display, it is expected that the result notification of the game times being executed when an error occurs is also overlooked and suppressed. be able to.

For example, as a configuration for reducing the progress speed of the game when an error occurs, a configuration for extending the variable display time is also conceivable. However, in this case, it is necessary to change the effect for the game round (variable display pattern of the symbol) performed on the display screen 41a or the like in accordance with the extension of the variable display time. In that case, even if you want to reduce the processing load of other processing as much as possible in order to perform processing for error resolution etc. in the event of an error, the processing load will increase on the contrary. .. In that respect, if the fixed display time is extended as described above, the variable display of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is stopped, and the stopped time is only extended. It is possible to reduce the progress speed of the game without changing the effect (variable display pattern of the symbol).

<Modified example of the third embodiment>
In this modified example, the timing for canceling the extension of the confirmed display time based on the occurrence of an error is different. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing an error handling process in this modified example.

In this modification, it is determined in step S5101 whether or not the front door frame 14 is opened. Such processing is the same as in step S4801. When the front door frame 14 is open, in step S5102, the same door opening notification process as in step S4802 is executed. Then, in step S5103, a process of setting an error flag in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204 is executed. The error flag is a flag for the MPU 202 to determine whether or not to extend the first confirmation display time, is set based on the occurrence of an error, and is erased based on the error cancellation.

If a negative determination is made in step S5101, in step S5104, it is determined whether or not the lower plate is full, as in step S4806. When the lower plate is full, in step S5105, the lower plate full notification process is executed in the same manner as in step S4809. After that, the error flag is set in step S5103.

If a negative determination is made in step S5104, it is determined in step S5106 whether or not ball clogging has occurred in the same manner as in step S4808. When the ball jam is occurring, in step S5107, the ball jam notification process is executed in the same manner as in step S4809. After that, the error flag is set in step S5103.

After executing the process of step S5103 or when a negative determination is made in step S5106, the other corresponding process is executed in step S5108, and then the error handling process ends. The process of step S5108 is the same as the process of step S4810.

In the stop start processing, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 79, it is determined in step S5201 whether or not the above error flag is set. If the error flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1201 to set the first finalized display time according to the hold notice.

When the error flag is set, in step S5202, the first confirmed display time of the game times being executed this time is set to the first confirmed display time (0. The process of setting the time as 5 sec, which is longer than 2 sec or 1.5 sec), is performed. Then, in step S5203, the process of starting the first confirmation display is performed, and then the process at the start of this stop is completed.

In this case, in the stop start process on the notification / effect control device 82 side, the process of setting the delay effect is performed on condition that 5 sec is set as the first final display time. As a result, after the variable display in the game times is completed, the delayed telop UP (FIG. 76 (c)) is displayed as the delayed effect in the final display.

The error resolving process in which the error flag is cleared will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S5301, it is determined whether or not the error flag is set. If it is not set, this resolution process ends as it is. If it is set, the process proceeds to step S5302. Steps S5302 to S5304 are processes for determining whether or not the error has been resolved. That is, in step S5302, it is determined whether or not the front door frame 14 is open, and if it is open, it is assumed that the error has not been resolved, and the main resolution process is terminated as it is. Further, in step S5303, it is determined whether or not the lower plate is full, and if the lower plate is full, it is assumed that the error has not been resolved, and the main resolution process is terminated as it is. Then, in step S5304, it is determined whether or not the ball clogging has occurred, and if the ball clogging has occurred, it is assumed that the error has not been resolved, and the main clearing process is terminated as it is.

If it is determined that the error has been resolved in each process of steps S5302 to S5304, the process proceeds to step S5305. In step S5305, whether or not the launch handle 54 is operated is determined by a touch sensor or the like installed on the launch handle 54. If it is not operated, it is assumed that the player is not ready to start the game, and the main resolution process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the firing handle 54 is being operated, the error flag is cleared in step S5306, and then the elimination process is terminated.

As in this modification, if the confirmation display time is not extended based on the occurrence of an error on the condition that the player is ready to start the game, the game can be restarted after the error occurs. Regardless, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the fixed display time is extended for a while.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the confirmation display time is extended based on the operation of the player. FIG. 81A is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, an operation button 77 as an operation unit on which the player operates is provided on the front surface of the gaming machine. When the operation button 77 is operated, an operation detection switch (not shown) built in the operation button 77 detects the operation, and a detection signal is output to the main control device 81. The main control device 81 determines whether or not the operation button 77 is operated based on the detection signal from the operation detection switch.

FIG. 81B is a flowchart showing an operation correspondence process for determining the operation of the operation button 77. The operation correspondence process is started by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle).

In step S5401, it is determined whether or not the operation button 77 has been operated. If it has not been operated, the operation corresponding process is terminated as it is. If it has been operated, the process proceeds to step S5402, and it is determined whether or not the operation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If the operation flag is not set, the operation flag is set in step S5403, and then the operation corresponding process ends. If the operation flag is set, the operation flag is cleared in step S5404, and then the operation corresponding process ends. That is, each time the operation button 77 is operated, the state in which the operation flag is set and the state in which the operation flag is not set are switched.

FIG. 82A is a flowchart showing the stop start processing in the present embodiment.

In step S5501, it is determined whether or not the above operation flag is set, and if it is not set, the process proceeds to step S1201. If it is set, the process proceeds to step S5502, and the first fixed display time of this time is set to be longer than the shortest variable display time of one game and within the longest variable display time. Perform the process of setting as 0 sec. Then, in step S5503, the process of starting the first confirmation display is performed, and then the process at the start of this stop is completed.

In the stop start processing in the present embodiment, it is determined in step S5004 in FIG. 75 whether or not the first finalized display time is 30.0 sec. If it is 30.0 sec, that is, if the variation display of the game times is completed in the situation where the operation button 77 is operated, the delay effect is set in step S5005. In the delay effect of the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), the start of the next game is delayed at a position (for example, up and down) that does not overlap with the variable display area ME on the display screen 41a. The telop QP during the break, which is "during the restroom break", is displayed to indicate that.

By doing so, the speed of the game progress can be changed based on the decision-making of the player. In this case, the speed of the game progress can be changed without changing the effect pattern by changing the fixed display time instead of the variable display time. Therefore, convenience can be improved by a simple configuration.

Here, when the player wants to stop the game progress, conventionally, it is necessary to wait for the digestion of the stored hold information. For example, when a large amount of hold information is stored, the player waits for the digestion. There was an inconvenience that it took a long time. In particular, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which the hold information for the first ball entry unit 33d and the hold information for the second ball entry unit 33e can be acquired up to the maximum number (4 pieces) in the normal gaming state. , While the hold information of one ball entry section is easy to be acquired up to the maximum number, the hold information of the other entry section is difficult to acquire up to the maximum number (difficult to enter the ball), and a large amount of hold information is stored. There can be many scenes that are being played. Therefore, even if the player wants to stop the game progress, there are many situations where the game cannot be stopped immediately. In that respect, if it is possible to delay the progress of the game based on the operation of the player as in the above configuration, even if a large amount of hold information is stored, a long fixed display time can be used. It will be possible to finish the work.

In addition, for example, when the player first grasps that the effect with high expectation of big hit will be generated by the look-ahead notification (hold notice) based on the stored hold information, the player's As for feelings, it is thought that there is also a desire to prepare drinks and invite friends in order to fully enjoy the game times in which the production with high expectations for big hits is performed. In that respect, according to the above configuration, in such a situation, if the digestion speed is slowed down, in order to fully enjoy the game times in which the effect with high expectation of the jackpot will occur. It becomes possible to make preparations for.

While slowing down the digestion speed, the game progress is not stopped. As a result, for example, when a player leaves his / her seat after finishing a game, even if he / she intentionally leaves undigested hold information and then slows down the digestion speed, he / she will not be able to do so after a while after leaving his / her seat. Digestion pending information will be digested. Therefore, there is no inconvenience that the subsequent player cannot play the game because the undigested hold information remains indefinitely after leaving the seat.

<Modified example of the fourth embodiment>
In this modification, the production pattern of the jackpot game times is reproduced during the fixed display time based on the operation of the player. FIG. 83A is a flowchart showing the stop start processing in this modification.

In step S5601, it is determined whether or not the operation flag is set. If the operation flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1201. If the operation flag is set, the process proceeds to step S5602, and it is determined whether or not the current game round is a game round that results in a big hit. If the game number does not result in a big hit, the process proceeds to step S5603, and the first finalized display time this time is set to 0.2 sec, which is the same as the normal time. If it is a game time that results in a big hit, the process proceeds to step S5604, the length of the variable display time of the current game time is specified, and the specified variable display time is set as the first finalized display time of this time. conduct. For example, if the game time this time is a game time in which 30 sec is set as the variable display time, the first confirmed display time of this time is set as 30 sec, and if the game time is set to 90 sec as the variable display time. , Set the time at the time of the first confirmation display this time as 90 sec. After executing the process of step S5603 or step S5604, the process of starting the first confirmation display is performed in step S5605, and then the process at the start of this stop is terminated.

On the notification / effect control device 82 side, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 84, in the stop start processing, in steps S5701 to S5703, the same processing as in steps S5001 to S5003 is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S5703 and it is determined that the first confirmed display time of this time is not 1.5 sec, in step S5704, the variable display time of the current game times is set as the first confirmed display time of this time. Judge whether or not it has been done. When the variable display time is set, in step S5705, a process of setting the effect pattern of the current game times is executed as the effect pattern during the first final display time of this time.

After executing the process of step S5703 or step S5705, or after making a negative determination in step S5704, the confirmation display start process is executed in step S5706, and then the stop start process ends.

By doing so, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), when the variable display of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is performed on the display screen 41a and the jackpot result is notified through the reach effect, the subsequent first Using the 1 fixed display time, the effect pattern from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the game times this time is reproduced. As a result, for example, even if the production of the premium pattern that occurs only in the game times in which the jackpot result is notified is overlooked, the opportunity to take a closer look at the production is given, so that the production can be fully enjoyed. It will be possible to entertain.

In this case, since the game times in which the production pattern is reproduced are limited to the game times that result in a big hit, it is possible to eliminate the troublesomeness of reproducing the production of the game times even though the result is out of order. It has become.

Further, by doing the above, after the jackpot result is notified as a result, the start of the opening / closing execution mode based on the jackpot result is delayed more than usual. As a result, for example, after the jackpot result is notified, it is possible to secure a period for preparing the opening / closing execution mode, such as preparing a dollar box for receiving the game ball.

On the other hand, when the reproduction of the above-mentioned effect occurs, for example, during a consecutive villa, or for a player who has a limited playing time, the reproduction of the above-mentioned effect can be annoying. Therefore, based on the player's operation, the player can reproduce the effect (set the operation flag) or prevent the effect from being reproduced (delete the operation flag). It will be possible to flexibly respond to various needs.

In the above modified example, the effect pattern of the game times that results in the big hit is reproduced during the first fixed display time, but the game times that reproduce the effect pattern are not limited to this. For example, the effect pattern of the game times in which the variable display time corresponding to the occurrence of a predetermined reach may be reproduced may be reproduced during the first final display time.

Further, in the above-described modification, the effect pattern of the current game times is reproduced during the first final display time, but the reproduced game times are not limited to the current game times. For example, based on the pre-reading notification (holding notice) identifying the game times that will be the predetermined result (big hit result), during the first confirmed display time of the game times before the game times that are the predetermined results. The configuration may be such that the effect pattern of the game times that gives the predetermined result is reproduced. For example, when a game time that results in a jackpot is specified, it is executed during the game time that results in the jackpot during the first confirmed display time in the game time that is digested immediately before the game time. It will be configured to reproduce the production pattern that will be there. As a result, the effect pattern executed in the game times that results in a big hit is repeatedly executed, and as a result, it is possible to cause the same event as the above-mentioned modified example.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a jackpot result is notified earlier than usual. FIG. 85 is a front view of the game board 124 in the present embodiment. The same components as those of the game board 24 in each of the above embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the position and the configuration of the operation port provided as a trigger for determining whether or not to execute the open / close execution mode are different. Therefore, first, the game area PE in the game board 124 in the present embodiment will be described.

The variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PE. Since the peripheral edge of the variable display unit 36 projects forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, a plurality of areas where the game ball can flow down are divided.

Specifically, in the game area PE, the upper region PE1 which is a region above the predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36 and the upper region PE1 which is continuously below the variable display unit 36 and the variable display unit 36. The left region PE2, which is the left region, the right region PE3, which is a region to the right of the variable display unit 36 and is continuous below the upper region PE1, and the left region PE2 and the right region PE3, respectively. On the other hand, it is continuously divided into a lower region PE4 which is a region below the variable display unit 36.

As the first launch operation, the player performs the rotation operation of the launch handle 54 with the rotation operation amount in the first range which is equal to or more than the predetermined rotation amount and less than the reference rotation amount, so that the player performs the lateral rotation operation in the upper region PE1. The game ball begins to flow down to the left of the center position. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of upper region PE1 → left side region PE2 → lower region PE4. On the other hand, as the second launch operation, the player performs a rotation operation of the launch handle 54 with a rotation operation amount in the second range that is equal to or greater than the reference rotation amount, so that the launch handle 54 is rotated to the right of the center position in the lateral direction in the upper region PE1. The game ball begins to flow down in the direction. In this case, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper region PE1 → the right region PE3 → the lower region PE4. That is, by adjusting the amount of rotation of the firing handle 54, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left side region PE2 of the left side region PE2 and the right side region PE3, and the right side region PE3. The game can be played so that the game ball flows down.

The reference rotation amount is a rotation amount at which the ratio of the game ball flowing down the left region PE2 and the ratio of the game ball flowing down the right region PE3 are the same, and the rotation operation in the first range. In terms of quantity, the proportion of the game ball flowing down the left region PE2 is high, and in the amount of rotation operation in the second range, the proportion of the game ball flowing down the right region PE3 is high. Therefore, if the rotation operation amount in the first range is close to the reference rotation amount, the game ball may flow down the right region PE3, and the rotation operation amount in the second range is close to the reference rotation amount. With the amount of rotation operation, there is a possibility that the game ball flows down the left side region PE2.

In the present embodiment, a first operating port 133 corresponding to the first ball entry portion 33d is provided in the lower region PE4 as an operating port. The first operating port 133 is a ball entry portion opened upward, and when a game ball flowing down the game area PE enters the first operating port 133, the hold information for the first entry portion 33d is released. It is acquired and a hit / fail judgment is made.

The first operating port 133 is not provided with a member that opens and closes. Then, in the situation where the game ball is launched in the same mode, the winning probability to the first operating port 133 is constant regardless of the game state. Further, the first operating port 133 is arranged directly below the stage formed in the variable display unit 36, and is a game ball that has flowed into the stage through the guidance passage formed in the variable display unit 36 and is a game ball of the stage. The game ball discharged from the center to the outside of the variable display unit 36 can easily win a prize in the first operating port 133.

Here, when the first operating port 133 is provided in the lower region PE4 as described above, the firing handle 54 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left region PE2, and the right region PE3 is operated. In any case where the firing handle 54 is operated so that the game ball flows down, it is possible to win a prize in the first operating port 133. However, since the entrance of the guide passage to the stage is provided for the left side region PE2 and not for the right side region PE3, the person who flows down the left side region PE2 flows down the right side region PE3. In comparison, winning a prize in the first operating port 133 is likely to occur. Also, regarding the arrangement of the game parts and the nails 38 in the left side region PE2 and the right side region PE3, it is easier for the first operating port 133 to win a prize when the left side region PE2 is flowed down than when the right side region PE3 is flowed down. Is set to. Then, the game ball that has flowed down the right region PE3 is designed so that a prize is hardly generated in the first operating port 133.

Further, in the present embodiment, a second operating port 134 corresponding to the second ball entry portion 33e is provided in the right side region PE3 as an operating port. That is, the second operating port 134 cannot win a prize when the launch handle 54 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left region PE2, and the launch handle 54 so that the game ball flows down the right region PE3. If is operated, a prize can be won.

The configuration of the second operating port 134 will be described with reference to FIG. 86. 86 (a) and 86 (b) are schematic views showing the configuration of the second operating port 134. The second operating port 134 is provided with an electric accessory 134a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. The electric accessory 134a corresponds to the electric accessory 34 in each of the above embodiments.

That is, the electric accessory 134a is connected to the drive unit 134b mounted on the back side of the game board 124, and is driven by the drive unit 34b to show the closed state shown in FIG. 86 (a) and FIG. 86 (b). Placed in one of the indicated open states. When the electric accessory 134a is closed, the game ball cannot win the second operating port 134, and when the electric accessory 134a is opened, the second operating port 134 can be won. By the way, when it is in the open state, the electric accessory 134a protrudes toward the game area PE side and guides the winning of the second operating port 134.

It should be noted that the electric accessory 134a is switched between a state in which a game ball is likely to win a prize in the second operating port 134 and a state in which winning is not impossible but it is more difficult to win a prize than in a state in which a prize is likely to occur. It may be configured to be. Further, the electric accessory 134a may be moved or rotated in the front-rear direction to switch between a state in which winning is likely to occur and a state in which winning is less likely to occur. Further, the electric accessory 134a may be inadequate, and switching between a state in which winning is likely to occur and a state in which winning is less likely to occur may be performed by displacement of the second operating port 134 itself.

Also in this embodiment, a plurality of support modes having different support modes by the electric accessory 134a are provided. Specifically, the frequency with which the electric accessory 134a is opened per unit time is relatively high. A low frequency support mode and a high frequency support mode are set so as to be high and low.

Here, since the second operating port 134 is provided in the right side region PE3, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the firing handle 54 is operated so that the game ball flows down the right side region PE3. In the case of, the winning frequency to the first operating port 133 or the second operating port 134 is higher than in the case where the firing handle 54 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left side region PE2, and the winning / failing judgment is made. Frequency is improved. That is, in the high frequency support mode, it is more advantageous for the player to let the right side region PE3 flow down than to let the left side region PE2 flow down. On the other hand, in the low frequency support mode, since it is almost impossible to expect a prize in the second operating port 134, the left side of the launch handle 54 is operated so that the ball flows down the right area PE3. Even when the firing handle 54 is operated so that the game ball flows down the area PE2, the frequency of winning the first operating port 133 or the second operating port 134 increases, and the frequency of winning / failing determination increases. That is, in the low frequency support mode, it is more advantageous for the player to let the left side region PE2 flow down than to let the right side region PE3 flow down.

The opening / closing execution mode in the present embodiment is executed by the variable winning device 132 provided in the lower region PE4. Then, in the present embodiment, the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is set to the high probability mode based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the predetermined area in the variable winning device 132 during the opening / closing execution mode. When the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the high-probability mode, the high-probability mode is continued until a predetermined number of game times (for example, 50 times) are performed.

The variable winning device 132 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. FIG. 87 (a) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 132 as viewed from the side, and FIG. 87 (b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 132 as viewed from the back side.

As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the variable winning device 132 is formed with a distribution inlet 371 that is open in the front-rear direction and has a size that allows the game ball to pass through, and the game ball passes through the distribution entrance 371. It is provided with a distribution member 352 that switches between a closed state in which the ball cannot pass and an open state in which the game ball can pass. The distribution member 352 is opened by being driven by a drive unit 353 for distribution inlet through a link mechanism (not shown). The distribution entrance 371 constitutes the entrance of the guide passage 354, and the game ball flowing in from the distribution entrance 371 flows down the guide passage 354 to the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 87 (b), the guide passage 354 is bifurcated from the intermediate position, and constitutes one of the upstream region 355 constituting the upstream side of the branch position and one of the downstream sides of the branch position. The V winning area (or used area) 356 and the discharging area (or unused area) 357 constituting the other downstream side of the branch position are provided. Further, at the branch position, a shutter 358 is provided as a distribution means for distributing the game ball that has reached the branch position from the upstream area 355 to either the V winning area 356 or the discharge area 357. When the shutter 358 is not driven by the shutter drive unit 359, the game ball which has reached the branch position flows into the discharge area 357, and when the shutter 358 is driven by the shutter drive unit 359, the game ball reaches the discharge area 357. The game ball that has reached the branch position will flow into the V winning area 356.

A detection sensor 372 for counting is provided so that the detection region exists at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the upstream region 355 always passes. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the counting detection sensor 372, the prize ball corresponding to the winning of the variable winning device 132 is paid out. Further, the detection sensor 373 for V prize is provided so that the detection region exists at a position where the game ball flowing into the V prize region 356 always passes. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the detection sensor 373 for V winning, the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is set to the predetermined lottery mode. More specifically, when the game ball is detected by the detection sensor 373 for V winning during the opening / closing execution mode, the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode in which the winning probability is higher than usual after the opening / closing execution mode.

Further, the discharge detection sensor 374 is provided so that the detection area exists at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the discharge area 357 always passes. Based on the detection results from the ejection detection sensor 374 and the V winning detection sensor 373, it is determined whether or not the game ball remains in the variable winning device 132.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the probability that the game ball winning the variable winning device 132 is guided to the V winning area 356 differs depending on the type of the jackpot result (depending on the type of the opening / closing execution mode). .. However, the drive timing of the shutter drive unit 359 is constant regardless of the type of jackpot result (regardless of the type of open / close execution mode). The high and low probabilities of being guided to the V winning area 356 are different depending on the opening / closing timing of the distribution member 352, so that the game ball wins the variable winning device 132 at the timing when it is easily guided to the V winning area 356. The distribution member 352 is opened in the open / close execution mode of the V high expectation mode in which the distribution member 352 is opened, and the distribution member 352 is opened so as to win the variable winning device 132 at the timing when the game ball is difficult to be guided to the V winning area 356. A low-expected opening / closing execution mode is set.

As described above, the drive timing of the shutter drive unit 359 is uniform in each open / close execution mode. Specifically, the shutter 358 is a V winning area after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the open / close execution mode. It switches to the mode of guiding to 356, and then switches to the mode of guiding to the discharge region 357. In the open / close execution mode of the V high expectation mode, before the elapse of the predetermined period from the start of the open / close execution mode so that the variable winning device 132 can be won at the timing when the shutter 358 is guided to the V winning area 356. The first round game is set to start. On the other hand, in the open / close execution mode of the V low expectation mode, the predetermined period elapses from the start of the open / close execution mode so that the variable winning device 132 cannot be won at the timing when the shutter 358 is guided to the V winning area 356. It is set so that the first round game is started later and after switching to the mode of guiding to the discharge area 357.

FIG. 88 shows a distribution table according to the present embodiment. The distribution table is a table that is referred to when the result of the winning / failing determination is a jackpot result, and is used to determine the type of jackpot result.

Sorting for the first ball entry unit, which is referred to when a big hit result is obtained in the hit / fail judgment of the hold information acquired based on the ball entry into the first operation port 133 shown in FIG. 88 (a). For the second ball entry section, which is referred to when a big hit result is obtained in the hit / fail judgment of the table and the hold information acquired based on the entry into the second operation port 134 shown in FIG. 88 (b). In the distribution table of, both are set so as to be either a normal jackpot result or an advantageous jackpot result. However, the ratio between the normal jackpot result and the advantageous jackpot result is set to be different, and the distribution table for the second ball entry section has an advantageous jackpot result than the distribution table for the first ball entry section. It is set so that the probability is high.

The normal jackpot result is a result that the opening / closing execution mode is executed as the opening / closing execution mode of the above V low expectation mode, and in this opening / closing execution mode, for example, eight round games are executed. After the open / close execution mode based on the normal jackpot result, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode.

The advantageous jackpot result is a result that the opening / closing execution mode is executed as the opening / closing execution mode of the above V high expectation mode, and in this opening / closing execution mode, for example, eight round games are executed. After the open / close execution mode based on the advantageous jackpot result, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode continues over a predetermined number of game times (50 times).

As described above, the winning / losing lottery mode is set to the high probability mode by guiding the game ball to the V winning area 356 during the opening / closing execution mode, and the high probability mode extends over a predetermined number of times (50 times) of the game times. To continue. Therefore, based on the advantageous jackpot result, the opening / closing execution mode of 8 rounds can be executed, and the high-probability mode and the high-probability support mode of the high-probability gaming state can be executed 50 times. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot result, although it is possible to execute the opening / closing execution mode for 8 rounds, the game shifts to the normal gaming state which is the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. Therefore, when a big hit result is obtained, the advantage for the player differs greatly depending on whether the advantageous big hit result or the normal big hit result is distributed.

Then, in the distribution table for the first ball entry section, the normal jackpot result is distributed with a probability of 50%, and the advantageous jackpot result is distributed with a probability of 50%. On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second ball entry section, the normal jackpot result is distributed with a probability of about 17%, and the advantageous jackpot result is distributed with a probability of about 83%. Therefore, the distribution table for the second ball entry section is set to be more advantageous to the player than the distribution table for the first ball entry section.

As the flow of the game in the present embodiment, first, in the normal game state, the game ball is launched so as to flow down the left side region PE2, and a prize is generated in the first operating port 133. The hold information for the first ball entry section is acquired based on the winning of the first operating port 133, and the winning / failing determination is made based on the hold information. If a big hit result is obtained in the hit / fail determination, the open / close execution mode by the variable winning device 132 is executed. If the jackpot result is a normal jackpot result, the game ball is not guided to the V winning area 356 during the open / close execution mode, and returns to the normal game state after the open / close execution mode. Return to the game aiming at the operation port 133.

If the jackpot result is an advantageous jackpot result, the game ball is guided to the V winning area 356 during the opening / closing execution mode, and is set to the high probability game state of the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode. .. In the high-probability game state, the game can be performed without significantly reducing the number of balls held by performing the game in which the right region PE3 is allowed to flow down to generate a prize in the second operating port 134. The high-probability game state ends when 50 game times are performed. Therefore, in the high-probability game state, the big hit result is obtained before the game times based on the winning of the second operating port 134 are performed 50 times, and the advantageous big hit result is obtained again, so that the game times of 50 times are performed again. The high-probability game state is reset, and the high-probability game state continues. On the other hand, if the jackpot result is not obtained even if the game times are performed 50 times, or if the jackpot result is obtained in the middle but the normal jackpot result is obtained, the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state at that time. Transition.

Here, in the high-probability gaming state as described above, when the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state as a result of a normal jackpot, the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode, so that the second operating port 134 is won. Will be difficult to generate, and it will not be possible to receive a winning / failing lottery (sorting lottery) on the side of the second ball entry portion, which is advantageous for the player. In particular, if the number of hold information on the second ball entry side is less than the upper limit and a normal jackpot result is obtained, the upper limit of hold information that should be easily reachable in the high frequency support mode is stored. Compared to the case where the result is a normal jackpot in the state of being played, it means that the winning / failing lottery on the side of the second entry section could not be received by the difference from the upper limit number. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when such an event occurs, a predetermined notification is performed.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing an effect setting process for a jackpot in the present embodiment. As described above, this effect setting process is a process (step S1504) executed when starting a game round that results in a big hit in the variation start process (FIG. 27) on the notification / effect control device 82 side. ..

In step S5801, the current gaming state is grasped, and it is determined whether or not the gaming state is high. If the game is in the normal game state instead of the high-probability game state, the process proceeds to step S5802, the effect table for normal result notification is acquired, and the effect pattern of the current game times is determined. In the effect table for normal result notification, a plurality of effect patterns for notifying the jackpot result are set just before the variation display time elapses (for example, 2 sec before, the first timing) according to the set variation display time. Therefore, the current production pattern is determined by lottery or the like from these plurality of production patterns. When determining the effect pattern, the processing result of the stop result determination process (step S1503) for the immediately preceding jackpot is also referred to, and the effect pattern corresponding to the stop result to be stopped is determined.

If it is determined in step S5801 that the gaming state is high, the process proceeds to step S5803. In step S5803, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot result is a normal jackpot result. If it is an advantageous jackpot result instead of the normal jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S5802 to determine the effect pattern based on the effect table for normal result notification.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S5803 and it is determined that the current game turn is a game turn that normally results in a big hit during the high probability gaming state, the process proceeds to step S5804. That is, the case of proceeding to step S5804 is a case where the high-probability gaming state ends in this game round and the game shifts to the normal gaming state. In this case, in step S5804, a process of grasping the number of reserved information on the second ball entry side is performed. In step S5805, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved information on the second entry portion side is 2 or less. If the number is not two or less, that is, if there are three or four reserved information on the second ball entry side even when the high-probability gaming state ends in the current game, the process proceeds to step S5802. Normally, the effect pattern determination process is performed based on the effect table for notification of the result.

On the other hand, when the number of hold information on the second ball entry side is 2 or less, it is determined in step S5806 whether or not the hold information on the second ball entry side is 0. If the number is one or two instead of zero, the effect table for notification of the previous result is acquired in step S5808 to determine the effect pattern of the current game. In the effect table for prior result notification, the jackpot result is notified by the first predetermined period (for example, 6 sec) earlier than the variation display time elapses according to the set fluctuation display time (big hit at the second timing). A plurality of effect patterns (the result of which the result is notified) are set, and the current effect pattern is determined by lottery or the like from these plurality of effect patterns. When determining the effect pattern, the processing result of the stop result determination process (step S1503) for the immediately preceding jackpot is also referred to, and the effect pattern corresponding to the stop result to be stopped is determined.

After performing the process of step S5807, the high-speed flag is set in the RAM 244. The high-speed flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to specify the timing of notifying the game result in the current game times.

When it is determined in step S5806 that the number of reserved information on the second ball entry portion side is 0, in step S5809, the effect table for immediate result notification is acquired and the effect pattern of the current game round is determined. In the effect table for immediate result notification, a plurality of effect patterns are set according to the set variation display time, in which the jackpot result is notified earlier by the second predetermined period (for example, 12 sec) than the variation display time elapses. Therefore, the current production pattern is determined by lottery or the like from these plurality of production patterns. Comparing the first predetermined period and the second predetermined period, the second predetermined period is set longer than the first predetermined period. That is, the result of the game round is notified earlier in the effect pattern determined in the effect table for immediate result notification than in the effect pattern determined in the effect table for prior result notification. When determining the effect pattern, the processing result of the stop result determination process (step S1503) for the immediately preceding jackpot is also referred to, and the effect pattern corresponding to the stop result to be stopped is determined.

After performing the process of step S5809, the ultra-high speed flag is set in the RAM 244. The ultra-high-speed flag is a flag for the MPU 242 to specify the timing of notifying the game result in the current game times.

After executing the processes of step S5802, step S5808, or step S5810, the effect pattern determined by these processes is set as the current effect pattern in step S5811, and then the present effect setting process is terminated. ..

Next, the variable processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 90. As described above, the variable processing process is a process performed as one process (step S1406) of the variable display control process (FIG. 26) on the notification / effect control device 82 side.

In the variable processing, first, in step S5901, it is grasped whether or not it is the fluctuation start timing of all the symbol rows. By the way, the RAM 244 is provided with an elapsed time counter for grasping the elapsed time from the start of the game round, and at the start of the game round (more specifically, at the start of the variable start processing), the elapsed time counter is provided. Update is started. The effect pattern determined by the fluctuation start process is associated with the information of the elapsed time counter, and the MPU 242 can specify the execution timing of various effects by referring to the elapsed time counter. can. In step S5901, it is determined whether or not it is the fluctuation start timing from the elapsed time counter and the effect pattern in the game times being executed. In the following description, the elapsed time counter and the effect pattern are referred to in the process of determining whether or not each effect is the execution timing, as in the process of step S5901.

When it is the fluctuation start timing of all the symbol rows, the high-speed fluctuation start processing of all the symbol rows is executed in step S5902. In this process, the display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in response to the start of the high-speed fluctuation display, and by outputting a command to the display control device 212, the symbol display device 41 displays the high-speed fluctuation of all the symbol rows. To start.

After executing the process of step S5902, in the following step S5903, the variation start process of the display unit KP is executed in the special display area OE. In this process, a command is output to the display control device 212 to start the variable display of the display unit KP in the special display area OE in the symbol display device 41. At this timing, the fluctuation display on the main display unit 43 on the main control device 81 side is also started, and the fluctuation display is started at the same time as the display unit KP on the main display unit 43 and the special display area OE. After executing the process of step S5903, the process for changing is terminated.

If it is not the fluctuation start timing of all the symbol rows in step S5901, it is determined in step S5904 whether or not it is the deceleration timing of the upper symbol row Z1. If it is the deceleration timing, the deceleration process of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is executed in step S5905, and then the process for changing is terminated. In the deceleration process, the indicator lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in correspondence with the deceleration of the upper symbol row Z1, and the command is output to the display control device 212 so that the symbol display device 41 displays the upper symbol row Z1. The fluctuation display is switched from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation.

If it is not the deceleration timing of the upper symbol row Z1 in step S5904, it is determined in step S5906 whether or not it is the deceleration timing of the lower symbol row Z3. If it is the deceleration timing, the deceleration process of the lower symbol sequence Z3 is executed in step S5907, and then the process for changing is terminated. In the deceleration process, the indicator lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in correspondence with the deceleration of the lower symbol row Z3, and by outputting a command to the display control device 212, the symbol display device 41 displays the lower symbol row Z3. The fluctuation display is switched from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation.

If it is not the deceleration timing of the lower symbol row Z3 in step S5906, it is determined in step S5908 whether or not it is the deceleration timing of the middle symbol row Z2. If it is the deceleration timing, the deceleration process of the middle symbol sequence Z2 is executed in step S5909, and then the variable intermediate process is terminated. In the deceleration process, the indicator lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in correspondence with the deceleration of the middle symbol row Z2, and by outputting a command to the display control device 212, the symbol display device 41 displays the middle symbol row Z2. The fluctuation display is switched from high-speed fluctuation to low-speed fluctuation.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the deceleration timing of the middle symbol row Z2 overlaps with the timing when the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped. For example, the reach line is formed by the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3. If so, the deceleration process of the medium symbol row Z2 for reach is performed in step S5909. Such processing will be described in detail later.

If it is not the deceleration timing of the middle symbol row Z2 in step S5908, it is determined in step S5910 whether or not it is the stop timing of the upper symbol row Z1. If it is the stop timing, the stop process of the upper symbol sequence Z1 is executed in step S5911, and then the variable intermediate process is terminated. In the stop process, the indicator lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in response to the stop of the upper symbol string Z1, and a command is output to the display control device 212 so that the symbol display device 41 displays the upper symbol string Z1. Stop the fluctuation display.

If it is not the stop timing of the upper symbol row Z1 in step S5910, it is determined in step S5912 whether or not it is the stop timing of the lower symbol row Z3. If it is the stop timing, the stop process of the lower symbol sequence Z3 is executed in step S5913, and then the variable intermediate process is terminated. In the stop process, the indicator lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in response to the stop of the lower symbol string Z3, and by outputting a command to the display control device 212, the symbol display device 41 displays the lower symbol string Z3. Stop the fluctuation display.

If it is not the stop timing of the lower symbol row Z3 in step S5912, it is determined in step S5914 whether or not it is the stop timing of the middle symbol row Z2. If it is the stop timing, the stop processing of the middle symbol sequence Z2 is executed in step S5915, and then the variable intermediate processing is ended. In the stop process, the indicator lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled in response to the stop of the middle symbol string Z2, and by outputting a command to the display control device 212, the symbol display device 41 displays the middle symbol string Z2. Stop the fluctuation display. The stop processing of the middle symbol sequence Z2 will be described in detail later.

If it is not the stop timing of the middle symbol sequence Z2 in step S5914, the processing for various effects during fluctuation is executed in step S5916, and then the processing for changing is terminated. In such processing, the display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64 are controlled based on the effect pattern set in the variation start process, and a command is output to the display control device 212 to produce an effect on the symbol display device 41. To be done.

Next, the deceleration process of the middle symbol sequence Z2 in step S5909 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S6001, it is determined whether or not the game times this time are game times corresponding to the reach display. If the game is a game in which the reach display does not occur, the process proceeds to step S6002, a process of setting the speed of the middle symbol sequence Z2 in the high-speed fluctuation display to the medium speed fluctuation is performed, and then the main deceleration process is ended.

If it is determined in step S6001 that the game is a game in which the reach display occurs, the process proceeds to step S6003. The process after step S6003 is a process of setting the speed of the variation display of the middle symbol sequence Z2, which is the final variation symbol sequence, to any of low-speed fluctuation, high-speed fluctuation, and ultra-high-speed fluctuation in the current reach display.

That is, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 92, after the reach display is generated by the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 (FIG. 92 (a)), the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol row Z2 as the final fluctuation symbol row. The low-speed fluctuation shown in FIG. 92 (b), the high-speed fluctuation shown in FIG. 92 (c), and the ultra-high-speed fluctuation shown in FIG. 92 (d) are provided. As the fluctuation speed, the high-speed fluctuation is set to be faster than the low-speed fluctuation, and the ultra-high-speed fluctuation is set to be faster than the high-speed fluctuation. Further, the medium speed fluctuation set when the reach does not occur is set to be faster than the low speed fluctuation and slower than the high speed fluctuation. More specifically, low-speed fluctuation is the speed of advancing by 0.5 frame (symbol) in 1 sec, medium-speed fluctuation is the speed of advancing by 1 frame (symbol) in 1 sec, and high-speed fluctuation is the speed of advancing by 1 frame (symbol) in 1 sec. It is the speed at which it advances by (symbol), and the ultra-high-speed fluctuation is the speed at which it advances by 10 frames (symbol) in 1 sec.

When it is determined that the reach has occurred in step S6001, it is determined in step S6003 whether or not the high-speed flag is set. As described above, the high-speed flag is a flag that is set when the holding information on the second entry portion side is one or two at the start of the game round, which usually results in a big hit during the high-probability game state. .. If it is not set, the process proceeds to step S6004 to determine whether or not the ultrafast flag is set. As described above, the ultra-high-speed flag is a flag that is set when the number of reserved information on the second entry portion side is 0 at the start of the game round, which usually results in a big hit during the high-probability game state. If it is not set, the process proceeds to step S6005, the speed of the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is set to low speed fluctuation, and the main deceleration process is completed.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S6003 and the game number is a normal jackpot result in a high-probability game state and the holding information on the second entry portion side is one or two, in step S6006. The speed of the fluctuation display of the middle symbol sequence Z2 is set to high speed fluctuation. After that, in step S6007, the first correction process of the stop timing of the middle symbol string Z2 is executed, and then the main deceleration process is ended.

As shown in FIG. 93, in the present embodiment, of the variation display time before the confirmation display in each game time, the period during which the variation display of each symbol sequence is performed and each symbol sequence are stopped before the confirmation display. The period during which the current state (temporary stop, result display, result notification) is maintained is set for each variable display time. For example, in a game round in which the variable display time is set to 20 sec, normally, the variable display is performed for 18 sec, the result display is performed for 2 sec, and then the final display is performed. As described above, in the temporary stop, at least one of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 gently reciprocates and finely moves, or at least a part of characters such as octopus (see FIG. 6) constituting the main symbol and the sub symbol is moving. Then, although the design seems to be stopped at first glance, it is performed so as to maintain an incomplete stopped state (stop display). Then, when the period (2 sec) in which the result display as the temporary stop is maintained elapses, the reciprocating fine movement and the movement of the character are not performed as the final display, and the state is completely stopped.

Further, for example, in the normal time, when the variation display time is 30 sec, the variation display is performed for 28 sec, the result display is performed for 2 sec, and then the definite display is performed. When the variation display time is 60 sec, the variation display is performed for 58 sec, the result display is performed for 2 sec, and then the final display is performed. That is, regardless of the length of the variable display time, the period of result display in which each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is temporarily stopped before the final display is uniformly set to 2 sec.

On the other hand, in the situation where the prior result notification flag and the immediate result notification flag are set, that is, in the game times in which the normal jackpot result is obtained during the high probability game state and the number of pending information is small, the above The length of the result display changes when the temporary stop is performed before the confirmation display.

That is, in the game round in which the variable display time is 20 sec, when the prior result notification flag is set, the period in which the result is displayed is changed (extended) from 2 sec to 6 sec, and the period in which the variable display is continued accordingly is It is changed (shortened) from 18 sec to 14 sec. In addition, when the immediate result notification flag is set in the game round in which the variable display time is 20 sec, the period in which the result is displayed is changed (extended) from 2 sec to 12 sec, and the period in which the variable display is continued accordingly is It is changed (shortened) from 18 sec to 8 sec.

When the prior result notification flag is set in a game with a variable display time of 30 sec, the period for which the result is displayed is changed (extended) from 2 sec to 6 sec, and the period during which the variable display is continued is from 28 sec. It is changed (shortened) to 24 sec. In addition, when the immediate result notification flag is set in the game round in which the variable display time is 30 sec, the period in which the result is displayed is changed (extended) from 2 sec to 12 sec, and the period in which the variable display is continued accordingly is It is changed (shortened) from 28 sec to 18 sec.

When the prior result notification flag is set in a game with a variable display time of 60 sec, the period for which the result is displayed is changed (extended) from 2 sec to 6 sec, and the period during which the variable display is continued is from 58 sec. It is changed (shortened) to 54 sec. In addition, when the immediate result notification flag is set in the game round in which the variable display time is 60 sec, the period in which the result is displayed is changed (extended) from 2 sec to 12 sec, and the period in which the variable display is continued accordingly is It is changed (shortened) from 58 sec to 48 sec.

Returning to the explanation of the deceleration process (FIG. 91) of the middle symbol sequence Z2, in the first correction process of step S6007, the variation display time of the current game times is grasped, and not 2 sec before the end timing of the variation display time. , The process of correcting the stop timing is performed so that the variation display ends so that the middle symbol string Z2 stops 6 seconds (first predetermined period) before.

If it is determined in step S6004 that the ultra-high-speed flag is set, and the number of games held is 0, which is the result of a normal jackpot during a high-probability game state, and the number of pending information on the second entry portion side is 0. In step S6008, the speed of the fluctuation display of the middle symbol sequence Z2 is set to ultra-high speed fluctuation. After that, in step S6009, the second correction process of the stop timing of the middle symbol string Z2 is executed, and then the main deceleration process is ended.

In the second correction process of step S6009, the fluctuation display time of the current game times is grasped, and the middle symbol sequence Z2 is stopped 12 seconds (second predetermined period) before the end timing of the fluctuation display time. The process of correcting the stop timing is performed so that the variable display ends.

In this way, by changing the speed of the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2 in the reach display, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped until the final stop position without changing the position where the middle symbol row Z2 finally stops. The design can be changed. Here, in the high-probability game state, the middle symbol row Z2 fluctuates to the final stop position, and the period from the start of the result display to the start of the final display, that is, the respective symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are provisionally. When the game ball is launched aiming at the second operating port 134 during the stopped period, the expected number of balls entered is about 3 game balls are launched during the normal 2 sec result display period (2 seconds). 0.6sec x 3), of which 0 to 1 can be expected to win, the first result is notified and about 10 game balls are launched during the 6sec result display period (0.6sec x 10). ), Among them, 3 or more prizes can be expected, and the expected number of balls will increase. In addition, during the 12 sec result display period in which the immediate result notification is performed, about 20 game balls are launched (0.6 sec x 20), of which 6 or more prizes can be expected, and the expected number of balls is further increased. To increase. As a result, the time is secured when the result notification is performed and the hold information on the second entry portion side is to be acquired after the high probability gaming state is determined to end.

By the way, in the game round in which each reach display is performed in the present embodiment, the time required for the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 to stop and the reach line to be formed is secondly corrected by the above-mentioned immediate result notification. It is set so that the period for displaying the result when the processing is performed is secured. For example, in a game in which the reach display is performed when the reach display time is 20 sec, which is the shortest variation display time when the reach display is performed, it takes time for the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 to stop and the reach line is formed. The time is set as a time shorter than 6 sec. Therefore, by performing the second correction process as an immediate result notification, the inconvenience that the middle symbol sequence Z2 can be stopped before the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 does not occur.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing a stop process of the middle symbol sequence Z2 performed in step S5915 in the variable intermediate process. In the variable processing, in the stop timing determination process of the middle symbol sequence in step S5914, the stop timing is determined based on the results of the first correction process and the second correction process.

First, in step S6101, a process of stopping the changing middle symbol sequence Z2 is performed. After that, in step S6102, as a result notification process, at least one of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 gently reciprocates and finely moves, or at least a part of a character such as an octopus constituting the main symbol or the sub symbol moves. I do. That is, the process of step S6101 and step S6102 starts the result display as a temporary stop.

In the following step S6103, it is determined whether or not the high-speed flag is set. If the high-speed flag is set, the process of erasing the high-speed flag is performed in step S6104, and then the first driving notification is set in step S6105 to end the main stop process.

As for the first driving notification, as shown in FIG. 95 (a), if the game round ends as it is, the high frequency support mode ends and the second entry section side win / fail lottery (sorting lottery). Is performed as a non-advantageous suggestion YB indicating that the As a non-advantageous suggestion YB, for example, while pointing to the hold number display area Da and recognizing that the number of hold information is small, the characters "Yabaiyo yabaiyo" are displayed, and when the game round ends as it is, the player is notified. Indicates a disadvantage. Further, in the first driving notification, the remaining time until the end of the game round, that is, the remaining period until the end of the game round and the transition from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode is displayed over time. Remaining time display ZK is performed. The remaining time display ZK is set so that, for example, in a rectangular image, the color is changed over time from one of the left and right sides, and the color of the entire rectangle changes when the remaining time becomes 0, and the remaining time is visually changed. Make it easy to grasp. The non-advantageous suggestion YB and the remaining time display ZK are displayed at positions that do not overlap with the result display (combination of symbols for notifying the jackpot result) by each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3. As a result, the player will not be able to receive the winning / failing lottery (sorting lottery) on the side of the second entry section when the current game round is completed, along with the game result which is usually a big hit result, and the remaining time until then. Can be clearly grasped.

Returning to the description of the stop processing of the middle symbol sequence Z2, when it is determined in step S6103 that the high-speed flag is not set, it is determined in step S6106 whether or not the ultra-high-speed flag is set. If the ultra-high-speed flag is not set, this stop processing ends as it is. If the ultra-high-speed flag is set, the process of erasing the ultra-high-speed flag is performed in step S6107. After that, in step S6108, the second driving notification is set, and the main stop process is completed.

As the second input notification, as shown in FIG. 95 (b), the low-frequency transition notification DE that explicitly indicates that the high-frequency support mode is terminated is performed together with the non-advantageous suggestion YB and the remaining time display ZK. In the low-frequency transition notification DE, it is indicated as "electric support" which is a general name of the high-frequency support mode, and "electric support end" is displayed. The low-frequency transition notification DE is also displayed at a position that does not overlap with the result display (combination of symbols that notify the jackpot result) by each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3.

In the present embodiment, the flow of the game when the prior result notification or the immediate result notification is performed will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 96.

When the effect time for displaying the variation of the game times started at the timing ta1 elapses at the timing ta2, the result display as a result of the game times is performed, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are temporarily stopped. Then, the result display (result notification) is completed, and the confirmation display is started at the timing ta3 when the variation display time from the timing ta1 elapses. Then, the confirmed display time elapses at the timing ta4. In this case, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the timing ta1 to the timing ta2 are fluctuating, but the timing ta2 to the timing ta4 are stopped (temporarily stopped). On the other hand, in the main display unit 43, the timing ta1 to the timing ta3 fluctuate, and the timing ta3 to the timing ta4 are stopped.

If the game times this time is a high-probability game state (high-frequency support mode) and the game result is a normal jackpot result, when the open / close execution mode is started at timing ta4, the support mode changes to the low-frequency support mode. Transition. When the open / close execution mode ends at the timing ta5, since the open / close execution mode is based on the normal jackpot result as described above, the support mode after the open / close execution mode is set to the low frequency support mode. As a result, even if the game ball is launched aiming at the second operating port 134, it is difficult to win a prize in the second operating port 134. It will be necessary to switch to a game that receives a winning / failing lottery (1 operating port 133 side).

In this case, the period from when the result of this game is notified until when the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode, that is, after when the low-frequency support mode is notified, the low-frequency support mode is used. The period until the transition to is the period of timing ta2 to timing ta4, and in the present embodiment, it is 2 sec (temporary stop period) + 0.7 sec (confirmed display period).

On the other hand, when the current game time is in a high-probability game state and the game result is a normal jackpot result, and the prior result notification is performed, the production time elapses for the game time started at the timing tb1. The result display as a temporary stop is started at the timing tb2, and the variation display time of the current game times elapses at the timing tb3. Then, the open / close execution mode is started after the confirmed display time of the timing tb3 to the timing tb4.

In this case, the period from when the result of this game is notified until when the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode, that is, after when the low-frequency support mode is notified, the low-frequency support mode is used. The period until the transition to is the period of timing tb2 to timing tb4, and although the timing tb3 and timing tb4 have the same timing as the timing ta3 and timing ta4, the timing tb2 is set as an earlier timing than the timing ta2. There is. Therefore, the period of timing tb2 to timing tb4 is 6 sec (temporary stop period) + 0.7 sec (confirmed display period) in the present embodiment, which is longer than the period of timing ta2 to timing t4 and low frequency support. There is a grace period for the second operating port 134 to win a prize after knowing that the mode will be changed.

When the current game round is in a high-probability game state and the game result is a normal jackpot result, and the immediate result notification is performed, the game round started at the timing ct1 is the timing ct2 at which the production time elapses. The result display as a temporary stop is started, and the variation display time of the current game times elapses at the timing ct3. Then, the open / close execution mode is started after the fixed display time of the timing tc3 to the timing tc4.

In this case, the period from when the result of this game is notified until when the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode, that is, after when the low-frequency support mode is notified, the low-frequency support mode is used. The period until the transition to is the period of timing tc2 to timing tc4, and although timing tc3 and timing tc4 have the same timing as timing ta3, tb3 and timing ta4, tb4, timing tc2 is higher than timing ta2 and tb2. It is set as an early timing. Therefore, the period of timing tc2 to timing tc4 is 12 sec (temporary stop period) + 0.7 sec (confirmed display period) in the present embodiment, and the period of timing ta2 to timing t4 and the period of timing tb2 to timing tb4. It is longer than the period, and the grace period for winning the second operating port 134 after knowing that the mode will shift to the low frequency support mode is secured more.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the game state shifts to a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the current game state based on the game result, the game result is notified before the game result is notified in the normal game times. And said. By doing so, it is possible to prepare for the transition (preparation for obtaining a hold or preparing for the preparation) after knowing in advance that the gaming state will be disadvantageous to the player.

If the number of reserved information on the second ball entry side that is the target of the support mode is less than the upper limit in the game times of the game result (normal jackpot result) that is in the low frequency support state during the high frequency support mode, The game result is notified first, and the transition to the low frequency support mode is notified. As a result, if the hold information on the 2nd ball entry side is not acquired during this game round, the opportunity to receive the winning / failing lottery on the 2nd ball entry section side will be lost by that amount, and we do not want to lose it. It can be used as a motivation to launch a game ball aiming at the second operating port 134. In other words, as described above, by aiming at the second operating port 134, the support mode is the target of the support mode at the last minute when the support mode is switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. The hold information on the ball side is stored up to the upper limit, and it is possible to feel that the benefits of the high-frequency support mode have been fully enjoyed.

The winning / failing lottery (sorting lottery) on the side of the second entry section is more advantageous for the player than that on the side of the first entry section. As a result, it is possible to further arouse the feeling of losing the opportunity to receive the winning / failing lottery on the side of the second ball entry club.

When the prior result notification or the immediate result notification is performed, the fluctuation speed of the final variable symbol string Z2 is changed to adjust the period until the symbol of the corresponding middle symbol string Z2 fluctuates to the stop position. As a result, it is not necessary to change the stop result, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load when the effect is changed due to the prior result notification or the immediate result notification.

Arrangement in which the first operating port 133 from which the holding information on the first ball entering portion side is acquired and the second operating port 134 from which the holding information on the second entering ball portion side is acquired can be separated in the game area PE. And said. More specifically, when the game ball is launched aiming at the first operating port 133, the game ball does not reach or is difficult to reach the second operating port 134, and the game ball is launched aiming at the second operating port 134. In the case where the game balls are allowed to reach the first operating port 133, the game ball does not reach or is difficult to reach. As a result, the rarity of the high-frequency support mode in which the hold information on the second ball entry side is acquired is increased, and the significance of performing the prior result notification and the immediate result notification in the game times of shifting to the low-frequency support mode is improved. Can be done. That is, for example, in a configuration in which the game ball is launched aiming at the first operating port 133 and the game ball easily reaches the second operating port 134 (for example, the gauge of the first embodiment), the low frequency support is provided. Even in the mode, winning the second operating port 134 will occur extremely rarely, and as described above, it is a good deal to acquire the hold information on the second ball entry side up to the upper limit just before the end of the high frequency support mode. This is because there is a possibility that

Since the variable winning device 132 is arranged in the lower region PE4, even if the game ball is launched aiming at the left region PE2 or the game ball is launched aiming at the right region PE3. , It is possible to generate a prize in the variable winning device 132. Therefore, as described above, by aiming at the second operating port 134 just before the end of the high-frequency support mode, there is no inconvenience that a winning opportunity to the variable winning device 132 occurs.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the winning / losing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is set to the high probability mode by guiding the game ball that has won the variable winning device 132 to the V winning area 356. If the variable winning device 132 cannot be won at a timing that can lead to the V winning area 356, the player suffers a great disadvantage. Therefore, by doing the above, the player does not suffer a disadvantage by preventing the phenomenon that the V winning area 356 does not occur so much that the second operating port 134 is aimed at. Can be done.

In the above embodiment, the timing at which the result display as a temporary stop is started is changed by changing the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol sequence Z2, but the point is that the timing at which the result display is started changes (early). The fluctuation speed of the other symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be changed, or the fluctuation symbol may be suddenly stopped and the result display may be started without changing the fluctuation speed.

Although the decision to perform the prior result notification or the immediate result notification is made at the start of the game round, it may be made in the middle of the game round. In this case, for example, at the timing of decelerating the middle symbol sequence Z2, the number of reserved information on the second ball entry portion side is grasped, and the prior result notification or the immediate result notification is performed according to the number. good.

Also in this embodiment, it is possible to apply a configuration for changing the fixed display time as in each of the above embodiments.

That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 97, in the stop start processing on the main control device 81 side, the high frequency support mode is performed by lengthening the final display time of the game times, which is the normal jackpot result in the high probability game state. It may be configured to delay the timing of transitioning from the low frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode.

Specifically, in step S6201, it is determined whether or not the game is in the high probability gaming state. When not in the high-probability gaming state, the first finalized display time is set to 0.2 sec in the normal state in step S6202. On the other hand, when the game is in a high-probability game state, it is determined in step S6203 whether or not the current game result is a normal jackpot result. If it is not a normal jackpot result, the first finalized display time at the normal time is set in step S6202. If it is a normal jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S6204 to perform a process of ascertaining the number of reserved information on the second ball entry side. Then, in step S6205, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved information on the second ball entry portion side is 2 or less, and if it is 3 or 4, the process proceeds to step S6202. If the number is two or less, it is determined in step S6206 whether or not the number is zero. If the number is one or two instead of zero, the first final display time this time is set to 4.7 sec in step S6207. On the other hand, when the number is 0, the first final display time this time is set to 10.2 sec in step S6208.

After the processing of step S6202, step S6207, or step S6208 is executed, the first confirmation display start processing is performed in step S6209, and then the stop start processing is ended.

In the above configuration, when the first fixed display time of 0.2 sec is set in step S6202, the variable display time ends after the temporary stop of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is performed and the result display is started. The sum of the 2 secs up to this point, the first definite display time (0.2 sec), and the second definite display time (0.5 sec) is 2.7 sec. On the other hand, when the first fixed display time of 4.2 sec is set in step S6207, 2 sec from the start of the result display after the temporary stop of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is performed until the end of the variable display time. The sum of the first definite display time (4.2 sec) and the second definite display time (0.5 sec) is 6.7 sec, which is the same length as the case where the prior result notification is performed in the above embodiment. It becomes. Further, when the first fixed display time of 10.2 sec is set in step S6208, 2 sec from the start of the result display after the temporary stop of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is performed to the end of the variable display time. The sum of the first definite display time (10.2 sec) and the second definite display time (0.5 sec) is 12.7 sec, which is the same length as the case where the immediate result notification is performed in the above embodiment. It becomes. As a result, it is possible to secure a grace period for acquiring the hold information on the side of the second entry section.

Further, according to the present modification, it is possible to substantially delay the timing of shifting to the low frequency support mode in the game times in which the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode. That is, in the fifth embodiment, the configuration is such that the transition to the low frequency support mode is notified first within the range in which the variable display time and the fixed display time are not changed, but in this modification, the fixed display time is confirmed. By extending the display time, the timing at which the game result of this time is reflected, that is, the start timing of the open / close execution mode is delayed. By doing so, at the end of the high-frequency support mode, which is advantageous for the player, the start of the open / close execution mode is delayed when the holding information on the second entry portion side, which is the target of the support mode, is small. Therefore, it is possible to extend the high-frequency support mode by that amount and secure a period for acquiring the hold information on the second ball entry side.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a new game property is realized by utilizing the configuration in which the timing for reflecting the game result is changed according to the number of reservations in the modified example of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the V operation processing in the present embodiment. The V operation process is a process for displacing the shutter 358 of the variable winning device 132 according to the fifth embodiment. The V operation process is started in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

The game board of the present embodiment is substantially the same as the game board 24 of the first embodiment, and the variable winning device 32 of the first embodiment is referred to as the variable winning device 132 of the fifth embodiment. It has a replaced configuration. That is, each operating port is configured by the operating port unit 33, and the game ball that has flowed into the upper operating port 33a enters the first ball entry unit 33d and the second ball entry unit 33e.

As the jackpot result, the type of jackpot result is determined with reference to the distribution table in the first embodiment. That is, the first-class jackpot result in which the 16-round round game is carried out and the second-class jackpot result in which the four-round round game is carried out are set, and any of the jackpot results is set. Even if they are sorted, they are set to the high frequency support mode of 100 times after the open / close execution mode. However, the high or low of the winning / failing lottery mode is determined by whether or not V winning occurs during the opening / closing execution mode, that is, whether or not the inflow of game balls into the V winning area 356 in the variable winning device 132 occurs. NS.

In step S6301, it is determined whether or not the V cycle measurement flag is set in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The V cycle measurement flag is a flag that is set when the condition for operating the shutter 358 of the variable winning device 132 is satisfied (when a definite notification of transition to the open / close execution mode is performed), and the V cycle measurement is performed. After the flag is set, the shutter 358 is switched to the mode of guiding to the V winning area 356 at a predetermined cycle. If the V cycle measurement flag is not set, the V operation process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the V cycle measurement flag is set, the process proceeds to step S6302.

In step S6302, a process of subtracting 1 from the V cycle counter VS is executed. The V cycle counter is a counter for the MPU 202 to grasp the period after the V cycle measurement flag is set. In the present embodiment, "7500" is input when the V cycle measurement flag is set. (Equivalent to 30 sec).

In step S6303, it is determined whether or not the V cycle counter VS has become 0, and if it is not 0, the V operation processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6303 that the V cycle counter is 0, the shutter 358 moves to the V winning area 356 by grasping the driving state of the shutter driving unit 359 in step S6304. It is determined whether or not the mode is such that the ball is guided. When the drive unit 359 for the shutter is not drive-controlled and is in a mode of guiding to the discharge area 357 instead of the V winning area 356, the drive of the shutter drive unit 359 is started in step S6305. By doing so, the shutter 358 is switched to the mode of guiding the game ball to the V winning area 356. Then, in step S6306, the process of inputting "250" to the V cycle counter VS is performed, and then the process for this V operation is terminated. The value input in step S6306 corresponds to the period during which the shutter 358 is held in the mode of guiding the shutter 358 to the V winning region 356, and corresponds to 1 sec in the present embodiment.

If the drive unit 359 for the shutter is driven and controlled in step S6304 and the shutter 358 is in a mode of guiding the game ball to the V winning area 356, the process proceeds to step S6307. In step S6307, by ending the driving of the shutter drive unit 359, the mode is switched to guide the shutter 358 to the discharge region 357. Then, in step S6308, the V cycle measurement flag is cleared, and then the V operation processing is terminated.

That is, in the present embodiment, the shutter 358 is switched 30 seconds after the confirmation notification of the transition to the open / close execution mode is performed, and the shutter 358 is guided to the V winning area 356, and the state is 1 sec. After being maintained for a long time, the mode is switched to the mode of guiding to the discharge region 357.

In the present embodiment, the definite notification of shifting to the open / close execution mode indicates the definite display shown in each of the above-described embodiments. That is, the switching between the mode guided to the V winning area 356 and the mode guided to the discharge area 357 is performed at a predetermined cycle after the confirmation display is started.

FIG. 99A is a flowchart showing the stop start processing in the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, in step S6401, the process of grasping the current common hold number CRN is executed. Then, in step S6402, a process of setting the first fixed display time according to the number of common hold number CRNs is performed. Such a process is a process corresponding to a modified example of the fifth embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the first final display time is set based on the tables shown in FIGS. 100 (a) and 100 (b).

As a table for determining the first fixed display time, a table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 100 (a) and a table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 100 (b) are provided. In step S6402, the first finalized display time is determined by acquiring a table according to the height of the winning / failing lottery mode.

In the table for the low probability mode, when the game result is an out-of-game result, the first fixed display time of 0.2 sec is uniformly set regardless of the value of the common hold number CRN. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot result, 20 sec is set when the common hold number CRN is 1 to 3, and 15 sec is set when the common hold number CRN is 4 to 6, and the larger the number of holds, the first. The confirmation display time is set to be short. When the common hold number CRN is 7 to 8, the first confirmed display time is set to be 0.5 sec, and the value of the common hold number CRN is at or near the upper limit (8). In some cases, the first fixed display time is set to be even shorter.

In the table in the high probability mode, when the game result is out of order, the first definite display of 0.2 sec is uniformly displayed regardless of the value of the common hold number CRN, as in the table for the low probability mode. The time is set. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot result, when the common hold number CRN is 1 to 6, the first fixed display time similar to the table for the low probability mode is set and is 1 to 3. In the case, 20 sec is set, and in the case of 4 to 6, 15 sec is set. When the common hold number CRN is 7 to 8, the first fixed display time of 0.5 sec or 15 sec is set. Which time is set is determined by lottery, for example, 0.5 sec is set with a 50% probability, and 15 sec is set with a 50% probability.

Returning to the explanation of the stop start process, in step S6402, after executing the process of setting the first finalized display time according to the winning / losing lottery mode, the game result, and the value of the common hold number CRN, in step S6403. , Performs the start processing of the first confirmation display. After that, in step S6404, the V distribution start process is executed, and then the stop start process ends.

In the V distribution start process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 99 (b), it is determined in step S6501 whether or not the current game number is the game number of the jackpot result. If it is not a jackpot result, the V distribution start process is terminated as it is. In the case of a game number of jackpot results, in step S6502, a process of setting "7500" in the V cycle counter VS is performed (corresponding to 30 sec). Then, in step S6503, the process of setting the V cycle measurement flag is performed, and then the process for starting the V distribution is completed. By this process, the positive determination is made in step S6301 in the V operation process (FIG. 98), and the drive control of the shutter drive unit 359 in the variable winning device 132 is started.

In the game state transition process (FIG. 16) of the present embodiment, when it is determined in step S803 that there is a shift in the open / close execution mode, the opening period of the open / close execution mode is set to 15 sec in the opening process of step S804. do. Then, in the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S806, a round game is started in which the variable winning device 132 is allowed to win a prize based on the elapse of the opening period.

The state in which the V prize is generated in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. In the following description, a situation in which the mode is low probability is assumed.

First, the open / close execution mode to be executed when the common hold number CRN is 1 to 3 will be described. When the variation display of the game times started at the timing ta1 ends at the timing ta2 and the confirmation display is started, when the common hold number CRN is small (1 to 3), the first confirmation display time is set. Is set to 20 sec (see FIG. 100 (a)). Since 0.5 sec is set for the second confirmed display time as in each of the above-described embodiments, a total of 20.5 sec is set as the confirmed display time. The open / close execution mode is started at the timing ta3 when the confirmed display time elapses. In the open / close execution mode, since 15 sec is set as the opening period as described above, the first round game is started at the timing ta6 when the opening period elapses, and the variable winning device 132 is allowed to win a prize. ..

As described above, the switching control for allocating to either the V winning area 356 or the discharging area 357 is performed at a predetermined cycle after the confirmation notification of the transition to the open / close execution mode is performed. That is, the mode is switched to the mode of guiding to the V winning area 356 at the timing ta4 30 sec after the timing ta2 which is the start timing of the first confirmation display, and after the mode is maintained for 1 sec, the timing is thereafter. At ta5, the mode is switched to the mode of guiding to the discharge region 357.

In this case, at the timing (timing ta4 to timing ta5) in which the winning game ball is guided to the V winning area 356 side, winning the variable winning device 132 is not allowed. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode this time, the inflow of the game ball (V winning) into the V winning area 356 does not occur substantially, and the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is set to the low probability mode. Will be.

On the other hand, when the variation display of the game times started at the timing tb1 ends at the timing tb2 and the confirmation display is started, when the common hold number CRN is large (7 to 8), the first confirmation display As the time, 0.5 sec, which is shorter than the case where the common hold number CRN is small, is set (see FIG. 100 (a)). In this case, the final display time is set to 1.0 sec in total. At the timing tb3 when the confirmed display time elapses, the open / close execution mode is started, and at the timing tb4 when the opening period of 15 sec elapses, the first round game is started, and the variable winning device 132 is allowed to win a prize. NS.

Similar to the case of the timing ta2, the switching control for allocating to either the V winning area 356 or the discharging area 357 is performed at a predetermined cycle after the confirmation notification of the transition to the open / close execution mode is performed. Will be. That is, it is switched to the mode of guiding to the V winning region 356 at the timing tb5, which is 30 seconds after the timing tb2, and after the mode is maintained for 1 sec, it is then guided to the discharge region 357 at the timing tb6. It is switched to the mode of.

In this case, at the timing (timing tb5 to timing tb6) in which the winning game ball is guided to the V winning area 356 side, the variable winning device 132 is allowed to win a prize. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode this time, the inflow of the game ball (V winning) into the V winning area 356 is substantially generated, and the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is set to the high probability mode. Will be.

As described above, the number of holds and the high probability mode can be changed by changing the presence or absence of V winning in the open / close execution mode according to the number of common hold numbers CRN of the game times in which the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs. It is possible to create a new playability associated with the probability of setting to. For example, as shown in FIG. 100 (c), when the occurrence of the V prize in the low probability mode is confirmed to shift to the open / close execution mode in the situation where the common hold number CRN is 7 to 8. Therefore, if the common hold number CRN is used for this division, the V winning probability in the low probability mode is 25%. On the other hand, the occurrence of the V prize in the high probability mode occurs with a probability of 50% when the definite notification of the transition to the open / close execution mode is performed in the situation where the common hold number CRN is 7 to 8. Therefore, by dividing by the common hold number CRN, the V winning probability in the high probability mode is 12.5%, which is lower than that in the low probability mode.

On the other hand, the common hold number CRN increases or decreases depending on the level of the support mode. Specifically, in the high-frequency support mode, the support by the electric accessory 34 of the lower operating port 33b is frequently generated, so that the winning of the second ball entry portion 33e side is likely to occur, and as a result, the winning is likely to occur. The value of the common hold number CRN tends to be close to the upper limit value. On the other hand, in the low-frequency support mode, since the support by the electric accessory 34 cannot be expected, the prize is mainly won through the upper operating port 33a. Therefore, it can be said that the value of the common hold number CRN is unlikely to be close to the upper limit value. Then, if a big hit result is obtained when the support mode is the low frequency support mode, it is difficult for V prizes to occur, so the winning / losing lottery mode after the open / close execution mode is likely to be set to the low probability mode, and the high frequency support is provided. If a big hit result is obtained in the mode, V winning is likely to occur, so that the winning / failing lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is likely to be set to the high probability mode.

In this way, by associating the V prize occurrence rate with the common hold number CRN, it is possible to make the V prize occurrence rate different depending on the state in which the value of the common hold number CRN tends to increase or decrease. ..

Since the common hold number CRN is the total value of the number of hold information on the first ball entry section 33d side and the number of hold information on the second ball entry section 33e side, the hold information on the second ball entry section 33e side. Even in the high-frequency support mode in which the information is easily accumulated, in order for the value of the common hold number CRN to be close to the upper limit value, it is necessary to generate a prize in the upper operating port 33a. Therefore, as compared with the configuration in which the V winning rate is determined by the number of reserved information on the second winning portion 33e side, the difficulty of generating the V winning (setting a short first fixed display time) is increased, and the playability is increased. Can be improved.

The ease with which the reserved information can be accumulated may also differ depending on the variable display time of each game. FIG. 102 shows a variation display time table for reach generation.

As shown in FIG. 102 (a), in the low frequency support mode (normal gaming state), the variation display time set when reach occurs is, for example, 30 sec, 60 sec, 90 sec, depending on the value of the variation type counter CS. Is set. Then, different reach displays are associated with each other according to the length of the variable display time. For example, normal reach A, normal reach B, and normal reach C are set for a variable display time of 30 sec, and these normal reach A to C are the production content and the expected degree of the jackpot result (selection rate selected at the time of jackpot), respectively. ) Is set to be different. Further, a super reach is set for the variable display time of 60 sec or 90 sec. The super reach is a reach display set so that the expectation of a big hit result is higher than that of the normal reach. For example, the effect content of the reach display is set so as to be an advanced form of the normal reach. Then, super reach A is set for the variable display time of 60 sec, and super reach B is set for the variable display time of 90 sec. Super Reach A and Super Reach B are set so that the expected degree of jackpot result and the content of the production are different, and Super Reach B is set so that the jackpot expectation is higher than that of Super Reach A.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 102 (b), in the high frequency support mode (high probability gaming state), the fluctuation display time set when the reach occurs is, for example, 3 sec, depending on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS. 15 sec is set. Even in the high-frequency support mode, different reach displays are associated with each other according to the length of the variable display time. For example, a short reach is set for a variable display time of 3 sec, and a variable display of 15 sec is set. A long reach is set for time. The short reach and the long reach are, for example, reach in which the period during which the variation display of the middle symbol row Z2 is performed after the upper and lower reach lines are formed is different. In the short reach and the long reach, the long reach is set so that the expectation of a big hit result is higher.

Incidentally, the variation display time set in the reach generation variation display time table is set longer than the variation display time set in the reach non-generation variation display time table. Further, the above-mentioned variation display time table for reach generation is referred to when the result is out of alignment. In the reach generation variation display time table that is referred to when the jackpot result is obtained, the value of the variation type counter CS assigned to each variation display time (each reach display) is different, and the reach display that has a long variation display time is displayed. , The value of the variable type counter CS is assigned so that it is easier to select than the case where the result is out of the above.

As described above, when the reach occurs in which the fluctuation display time of the game times becomes longer than usual, the digestion speed of the reserved information becomes slow. That is, the pending information is likely to be accumulated due to the occurrence of reach.

In particular, since the reach display with a long variable display time is set so that the jackpot expectation is higher, it is possible to store the hold information based on the reach display in which the jackpot result can be expected. There is. In other words, it can be said that it is more advantageous for the player to store up to the upper limit of the common hold number CRN as the reach display with a higher expectation of big hit is performed. By doing so, for example, depending on the content of the reach display, even a player who is convinced of the jackpot result can be made to fire the game ball and acquire the hold information, and the game ball can be fired. It is possible to deter the so-called stop strike.

The ease of accumulating hold information differs between the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, and the high-frequency support mode is easier to accumulate hold information than the low-frequency support mode. However, the speed of digesting the pending information is faster in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode. Then, even in the high frequency support mode, an event in which the common hold number CRN is not the upper limit value may occur at the time of a big hit. In particular, since the reach display in the high-frequency support mode is set to be shorter than the reach display in the low-frequency support mode, it is attempted to hurry to acquire the hold information after the reach display is started in the high-frequency support mode. However, there is a possibility that the common hold number CRN does not reach the upper limit value by the end of the reach display (end of the game round). By doing so, in the high-frequency support mode, the common hold number CRN can be played near the upper limit value, and so-called stoppage can be suppressed.

<7th embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the first fixed display time is set in relation to the opening period in the open / close execution mode. FIG. 103 is a pass / fail table and a distribution table according to the present embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 103 (a) and 103 (b), in the present embodiment, as a result of the winning / losing lottery, in addition to the jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode is executed, a special deviation result and a normal deviation result are set. Has been done. If the result of the winning / failing lottery is a special deviation result or a normal deviation result, neither of them shifts to the open / close execution mode, but the length of the first finalized display time to be set is different.

In the winning / failing table for the low-probability mode in which the winning / failing lottery mode is referred to in the low-probability mode, as shown in FIG. 103 (a), the first confirmed display time is 24. 5 sec is set. On the other hand, the first definite display time is set to 0.2 sec for the out-of-normal results that are sorted relatively frequently. It should be noted that the first confirmed display time set at the time of the normal deviation result is the same length as the first confirmed display time set at the time of the jackpot result, and the confirmed display time of 0.2 sec is set at the time of the jackpot result.

In the win / fail table for the high probability mode in which the win / fail lottery mode is referred to in the high probability mode, the same first fixed display time is set for each result as shown in FIG. 103 (b). Specifically, 0.2 sec is set as the first definite display time for any of the jackpot result, the special deviation result, and the normal deviation result. In other words, the jackpot result and the normal loss result are set to the same first fixed display time regardless of the level of the win / fail lottery mode, while the special loss result is 24 when the win / fail lottery mode is the low probability mode. .5 sec is set, 0.2 sec is set in the high probability mode, and the first confirmed display time set differs depending on the height of the winning / failing lottery mode.

The second finalized display time is constant regardless of the height of the winning / losing lottery mode and the game result, and 0.5 sec is set for both.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 103 (c), as the distribution destination of the jackpot results, the first-class jackpot result A, the first-class jackpot result B, the second-class jackpot result A, and the second-class jackpot result B is provided. The first-class jackpot results A and B correspond to the first-class jackpot results described above, and are the game results of shifting to the open / close execution mode in which the round game of 16 rounds is executed. Further, the second-class jackpot results A and B correspond to the above-mentioned second-class jackpot results, and all of them are game results that shift to the open / close execution mode in which the round game of four rounds is executed.

The difference between the first-class jackpot result A and the first-class jackpot result B, and the second-class jackpot result A and the second-class jackpot result B is the length of the opening time in the opening / closing execution mode. That is, in the opening process of step S804 in the game state transition process (FIG. 16), if the type 1 jackpot result A or the type 2 jackpot result A, the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode is set to 15.0 sec. .. On the other hand, in the case of the first-class jackpot result B or the second-class jackpot result B, the opening period of the open / close execution mode is set to 24.3 sec.

In this case, when the type 1 jackpot result A and the type 2 jackpot result A are obtained, the total of the first confirmed display time, the second confirmed display time, and the opening time is 15.7 sec (0.2 sec + 0.5 sec + 15.0 sec). The period from the start of the final display of these results to the opening of the variable winning device 32 is 15.7 sec. Further, in the case of the first type jackpot result B or the second type jackpot result B, the total of the first confirmed display time, the second confirmed display time and the opening time is 25.0 sec (0.2 sec + 0.5 sec + 24.3 sec). The period from the start of the final display of these results to the opening of the variable winning device 32 is 25.0 sec.

As a result, when a special deviation result is obtained in the low probability mode, the period from the start of the final display of the special deviation result to the start of the next game round, the first type jackpot result B, and the second When the seed jackpot result B is obtained, the period from the start of the final display of these results to the opening of the variable winning device 32 corresponds to the period of the same length (25.0 sec).

Next, the fluctuation start processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 104. As described above, the variation start process is a process performed in step S506 in the game turn control process (FIG. 13) as a process on the main control device 81 side, and the variation display on the main display unit 43 is performed by such a process. The pattern and stop result are set.

In the present embodiment, in steps S6501 to S6506, similarly to the processing of steps S701 to S706, the winning / failing determination processing, the type determination processing at the time of winning the jackpot, and the stop result setting processing for each jackpot are performed. In step S6504, it is determined whether or not it is either the first-class jackpot result A or the first-class jackpot result B, and if it is either, in step S6505, the first-class jackpot result A. And the stop result setting process for the type 1 jackpot result B is performed. In step S6505, when the type 1 jackpot result A is set, the stop result corresponding to the type 1 jackpot result A is set, and when the type 1 jackpot result B is set, the stop result corresponds to the type 1 jackpot result B. Set the stop result. The stop result corresponding to the first-class jackpot result A and the stop result corresponding to the first-class jackpot result B are visually identifiable.

If a negative determination is made in step S6504, the stop result setting process for the type 2 jackpot result A and the type 2 jackpot result B is performed in step S6506. Then, in step S6506, when the type 2 jackpot result A is set, the stop result corresponding to the type 2 jackpot result A is set, and when the type 2 jackpot result B is set, the type 2 jackpot result B is set. Set the corresponding stop result. The stop result corresponding to the type 2 jackpot result A and the stop result corresponding to the type 2 jackpot result B are visually identifiable. Further, the stop result corresponding to the type 2 jackpot result A and the stop result corresponding to the type 2 jackpot result B are apparently both the stop result corresponding to the type 1 jackpot result A and the type 1 jackpot result B. Different to the extent that they can be identified.

If it is determined in step S6502 that the jackpot is not won, the process proceeds to step S6507 to determine whether or not the result is a special loss. If it is not a special deviation result, the stop result setting process for the normal deviation is performed in step S6508. In step S6508, the stop result is set so as to be visually identifiable from the stop result corresponding to each of the jackpot results.

If it is determined in step S6507 that the result is a special deviation, the stop result setting process for the special deviation is performed in step S6509. In step S6509, the stop result is set so as to be visually identifiable different from the stop result corresponding to each of the jackpot results and the stop result corresponding to the normal deviation. In particular, the stop result corresponding to the special deviation result is compared with the stop result of each jackpot result, and the stop result corresponding to the first type jackpot result B and the stop result corresponding to the second type jackpot result B are different. The results are very different.

After executing any of the processes of step S6505, step S6506, step S6508, and step S6509, the same processes as those of steps S708 to S710 are executed in steps S651 to S6512.

That is, in the present embodiment, as compared with the first embodiment, the first type jackpot result A and the first kind jackpot result B exist as the first kind jackpot result, and the second kind jackpot result is the second type. There is a seed jackpot result A and a second kind jackpot result B. In addition, as a result of deviation, there are a normal deviation result and a special deviation result. In the variation start processing in the present embodiment, the stop result is set so that these game results can be identified by the main display unit 43.

Next, the stop start processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 105. As described above, the stop start processing is a processing for setting the first fixed display time.

In step S6601, it is determined whether or not the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode. When the high probability mode is used instead of the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S6602, and the first fixed display time of the current game round is set to 0.2 sec (see FIG. 103 (b)). Further, even in the low probability mode (step S6601: YES), if it is determined in step S6602 that the result is not a special deviation result, the first finalized display time is set to 0.2 sec in step S6602 (FIG. 103 (a)). On the other hand, in the low probability mode (step S6601: YES) and the special deviation result (step S6603: YES), in step S6604, the first confirmed display time of the current game times is set as 24.5 sec. Execute the process. After setting the first confirmation display time in step S6602 or step S6604, the start processing of the first confirmation display is executed in step S6605, and then the main stop start processing is ended.

Next, the opening process according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 106. The opening process is a process performed in step S804 in the game state transition process (FIG. 16) as a process on the main control device 81 side.

In step S6701, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode started this time is the opening / closing execution mode based on the type 1 jackpot result A or the type 2 jackpot result A. In the case of the opening / closing execution mode based on these jackpot results, the opening time of the opening / closing execution mode this time is set to 15.0 sec in step S6702 (see FIG. 103 (c)). On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6701 and the opening / closing execution mode to be started this time is the first type jackpot result B or the second type jackpot result B, in step S6703, the opening time of the current opening / closing execution mode is set to 24. It is set to 3 sec (see FIG. 103 (c)). After executing the process of step S6702 or step S6703, the process of starting the measurement of the opening time is performed in step S6704, and then the process for this opening is ended.

Next, as the processing on the notification / effect control device 82 side in the present embodiment, the stop result determination processing for the jackpot (step S1404, FIG. 27) of the fluctuation start processing (step S1404, FIG. 27) in the fluctuation display control processing (FIG. 26) Step S1503) and the stop result determination process for reach will be described.

In the stop result determination process for the jackpot, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 107, whether or not the game result of the game times started this time is the first-class jackpot result A or the second-class jackpot result A in step S6801. To judge. In the case of these jackpot results, it is determined in step S6802 whether or not it is the first type jackpot result A. In the case of the first type jackpot result A, in step S6803, the stop result in which the same specific symbol (main symbol with an odd number) combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is obtained in this game. Determined as the result of stopping times. Further, when it is determined in step S6802 that the result is not the type 1 jackpot result A but the type 2 jackpot result A, the same non-specific symbol (even number) is placed on one effective line L1 to L5 in step S6804. The stop result in which the combination of the main symbols marked with) is established is determined as the stop result of this game.

In step S6801, when it is determined that the result is neither the first type jackpot result A nor the second type jackpot result A, that is, the game result of the game round to be started this time is the first kind jackpot result B or the second kind jackpot result B. If there is, the process proceeds to step S6805. In step S6805, a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, a main symbol with "3", a main symbol with "4", and a main symbol with "1" are attached on one effective line L1 to L5. The stop result for which the combination of) is established is determined as the stop result of this game. The stop result (3.4.1), which is a combination of predetermined symbols, is a stop result showing a so-called chance eye, unlike the stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established as described above. In this case, the set effect pattern does not stop the symbol string Z2 that finally stops in the reach display to be executed, and a predetermined character (for example, a school of fish) is hidden as it is so as to hide the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. When the predetermined character is moved to a position where it does not overlap with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the effect pattern is changed so that the above chance eyes are stopped.

After executing any of the processes of step S6803, step S6804, and step S6805, the process of storing the address of the stop symbol is performed in step S6406, and then the stop result determination process ends.

On the other hand, in the stop result determination process for reach, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 108, in step S6901, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game times started this time is a special deviation result. If it is not a special deviation result but a normal deviation result, the stop result in which the combination of the deviation reach symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result in step S6902. If it is determined in step S6901 that the game result of the game times to be started this time is a special deviation result, in step S6903, a combination of predetermined symbols on one effective line L1 to L5 (for example, "3" The stop result that holds the main symbol with "", the main symbol with "4", and the main symbol with "1") is determined as the stop result of this game. That is, the stop result determined in step S6903 is the same as the stop result determined in step S6805, and is a stop result indicating a so-called chance. Further, also in this case, the set effect pattern does not stop the symbol sequence Z2 that finally stops in the reach display to be executed, and a predetermined character (for example, a school of fish) is symbolized so as to hide the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 as it is. When the predetermined character appears in front of the rows Z1 to Z3 and is moved to a position where it does not overlap with the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the effect pattern is changed so that the above chance eyes are stopped.

After executing the process of step S6902 or step S6903, the process of storing the address of the stop symbol is performed in step S6904, and then the stop result determination process ends.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the game times in the symbol display device 41, the stop result of the game times which is the first type big hit result B and the second type big hit result B, and the stop result of the game times which is a special deviation result Are common, and are set so that the same stop result (chance eye) is obtained.

The flow of the game of this embodiment will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 109.

First, the flow of the game when the type 1 jackpot result B or the type 2 jackpot result B is obtained will be described. When the game result of the game times started at the timing ta1 is these jackpot results, the variation display of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41 is completed at the timing ta2, and the above chance eye (3. 4.1) is temporarily stopped. After that, at the timing ta3, the confirmation display is started on the main display unit 43, and the stop result corresponding to the game result is displayed (the stop result corresponding to the first type jackpot result B or the second type jackpot result B is displayed. Corresponding stop result). In this case, a chance effect is generated on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41. The chance effect is, for example, an effect in which the background becomes black and a heartbeat sound (dokundokun) is emitted as a sound effect while the above chance eyes are stopped. The chance effect is a confirmation display and an open / close execution mode. It will continue to be held throughout the opening. That is, even if the open / close execution mode is started at the timing ta5 and the opening is started after the confirmed display time elapses at the timing ta4, the above chance effect is continuously performed (the display screen 41a remains as it is, and the opening / closing execution mode is performed. The heartbeat sound effect is repeatedly emitted).

As described above, when the game result is a jackpot result, the first confirmed display time is set to 0.2 sec, and the second confirmed display time is set to 0.5 sec. Then, the opening time in the open / close execution mode of the first-class jackpot result B and the second-class jackpot result B is set to 24.3 sec. Therefore, the above chance effect will be carried out for a total of 25.0 sec. Then, at the timing ta5 when the opening time elapses, the chance effect ends, the big prize opening 32a is opened, and the big hit effect is started on the display screen 41a.

On the other hand, when the game result of the game times started at the timing tb1 is a special deviation result, the variation display of the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 on the symbol display device 41 ends at the timing tb2, and the above chance eye (3).・ 4.1) is temporarily stopped. After that, at the timing tb3, the confirmation display is started on the main display unit 43, and the stop result corresponding to the game result is displayed (the stop result corresponding to the special deviation result). In this case, the above-mentioned chance effect occurs on the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41. However, since the game result of this time is not the game result of shifting to the open / close execution mode, the chance effect of this time is carried out during the confirmation display. However, since the first confirmed display time is set to 24.5 sec and the second confirmed display time is set to 0.5 sec, the above chance effect is executed for a total of 25.0 sec. Will be. That is, the chance effect based on the special deviation result is performed with the same length as the chance effect performed in the case of the first type jackpot result B or the second type jackpot result B. However, in the case of the first-class jackpot result B or the second-class jackpot result B, the opening / closing execution mode is not started at the timing tb4 corresponding to the timing ta4 at which the opening / closing execution mode is started, and the first-class jackpot result In the case of B or the second type jackpot result B, at the timing tb5 corresponding to the timing ta5 when the big winning opening 32a is opened, the big winning opening 32a is not opened, the next game round is started, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z1 The variable display of Z3 and the main display unit 43 is started. If the hold information is not stored at the timing tb5, the next game round is not started and the above chance effect ends as it is (the background returns to the original color and the heartbeat sound effect stops).

When the open / close execution mode is started at the timing ta4, for example, the display mode of the main display unit 43 may be changed so that it is possible to clearly identify that the game state has changed. Further, for example, in a configuration in which a round display unit indicating the number of round games in the open / close execution mode is provided, it is preferable that the display of the round display unit is started at the timing ta4.

According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

After displaying the stop result of the symbol on the display screen 41a in the case of the first type jackpot result B or the second type jackpot result B that shifts to the open / close execution mode, the first round is performed after the opening of the open / close execution mode. When the period until the big winning opening 32a is opened as a round game of is a special off result that does not shift to the open / close execution mode, after displaying the stop result of the symbol on the display screen 41a, the next game It was set to have the same length as the period until the start of. As a result, it is not possible to determine whether or not the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs from the length of these periods and the opening / closing mode of the large winning opening 32a. Therefore, even if the result is a special deviation that does not cause the transition to the open / close execution mode, it is possible to entertain this period with the expectation that the transition to the open / close execution mode will occur, and the interest will be improved. Is planned.

The symbol on the display screen 41a depending on whether the game result of the game is the first-class jackpot result B or the second-class jackpot result B that shifts to the open / close execution mode, or the special deviation result that does not shift to the open / close execution mode. The stop results of are standardized so that the chances are stopped in each case. As a result, it cannot be determined from the stop result of the display screen 41a whether or not the transition to the open / close execution mode occurs, and a feeling of excitement during the period until the large winning opening 32a is opened or the next game round is started. Can be more entertaining.

The display screen 41a has a configuration in which both results cannot be distinguished as described above, but the main display unit 43 has a configuration in which the stop results are different so that both results can be distinguished. As a result, for example, the manager of the game hall can confirm which result is the result, and the correspondence between the game result and the opening / closing execution mode is guaranteed.

The effect of associating the definite display time with the opening period as described above is performed in the low-probability mode, but not in the high-probability mode. As a result, it is possible to smoothly perform a game in a high probability mode that can frequently result in a big hit.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, when the result is a special deviation and one or more reserved information is stored in the reserved ball storage area 232, the above-mentioned confirmed display time is set or a chance eye is set. It may be configured to stop or produce a chance. As a result, after the chance production, the big winning opening 32a is opened or the next game round is started, and the difference in impression given by the production after the chance production can be increased. ..

In the above embodiment, the opening time of the open / close execution mode in the high probability mode may be shorter than that of the above. That is, in the high-probability mode, the first fixed display time is set to the same time as other game results even if the result is a special deviation result, and for example, the first type jackpot result B in the high-probability mode or The opening time of the type 2 jackpot result B may be 15.0 sec, which is the same as the opening period of the type 1 jackpot result A and the type 2 jackpot result A. In this way, the opening / closing execution mode in the high probability mode can be smoothly executed.

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or may be partially or wholly applied in combination.

(1) In the first embodiment described above, an effect display for displaying a bubble image as a hold notice and an effect for stopping the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 in a stop mode for the hold notice are performed. It may be configured not to execute. That is, the fixed display time or the length of the game time per game may be used as a hold notice. In this case, the configuration is not limited to a configuration in which the final display time is made longer than usual when the hold notice is given, but it may be a configuration in which the confirmation display time is shortened, or a configuration in which both the case of lengthening and the case of shortening are interwoven. Further, a plurality of times having different lengths may be provided as special times, and the expected degree of jackpot in the specific game times (game times subject to the hold notice) may be suggested by the length of the confirmed display time. For example, if the hold information corresponding to the out-of-reach is first specified, the first-class time is likely to be set as the special time, and if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is first specified, the first-class time is set as the special time. It is preferable to have a configuration in which a long type 2 time can be easily set. In a configuration in which the fixed display time or the length of the game time per game is used as a hold notice, the player's interest in the fixed display can be increased to increase the attention to the game, and the number of types of production display can be increased. It is possible to reduce the number of displays and reduce the processing load on control. However, considering the ease of the player's awareness of the hold notice, it is preferable to use the configuration of the above embodiment.

(2) In the first embodiment described above, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the display screen 41a to give a hold notice, but the hold notice is a light emission effect using a light emitting means such as an LED. It may be an accessory production using a decorative movable body (movable accessory) for the movable effect. Further, it does not necessarily have to be visual, for example, an auditory one using sound effects, an olfactory one using an odor, and at least a part of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a firing handle 54). Or the operation unit 75) for directing the sound may be vibrated, or the player may be exposed to wind or water. The point is that the player can feel that the production related to the progress of the game has been performed, and the form is not particularly limited.

When displaying a predetermined effect image and giving a hold notice, a display device other than the symbol display device 41 may be provided to display the effect image on the display screen of the display device. In this case, in order to prevent the player's attention and interest in the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 from being lost, the display screen of the other display device may be made smaller than the display screen 41a of the symbol display device 41, or the display screen may be displayed. It is preferable to arrange the game board 24 at a position farther from the center of the front surface than 41a. However, when compared with the main display unit 43, it is preferable to enlarge the display area or arrange the game board 24 at a position close to the center portion of the front surface.

(3) In the first embodiment described above, when the hold notice is given, the notice display effect is displayed on the final display of each game time, but instead of or in addition to this, the hold notice is given. At the first game round, a notification image for notifying the start of the look-ahead zone effect such as "entering the XX zone" may be displayed. In this case, the notification image is first displayed in large size on the display screen 41a in the confirmation display of the first game round, and then the notification image or "○○ zone" is displayed at the end of the confirmation display or the start timing of the next game round. It is advisable to reduce the character display of and display it, and to continue it until a specific game. That is, it is preferable that the effect image displayed in the final display of the first game time is continuously displayed over the next game time, which makes it easy to understand that the hold notice is ongoing. In this case, in the first game round, the display unit KP or the display unit KP and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are displayed in front of the notification image, and the display unit KP and the like can be visually recognized even while the notification image is displayed. It is good to have a proper configuration. In the next and subsequent game times, it is preferable to display the notification image and the character display so as not to overlap with the display unit KP, the display unit KP, and the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. In this case, the display position of the notification image or the character display may be set to a position that does not overlap with the display unit KP or the like, or the display of the display unit KP or the like may be moved to avoid duplication.

(4) In the first embodiment described above, the result of the specific destination performed during the fluctuation display is reflected in the time length of the final display performed immediately after the fluctuation display. It may be configured to be reflected in the time length of the confirmation display in the times. In this case, the process of determining whether or not the hold information corresponding to the jackpot or missed reach has been identified in advance and the process of setting the first fixed display time based on the determination result are performed at the start timing of the variable display. You may.

(5) In the first embodiment, the first fixed display time is a variable time and the second fixed display time is a fixed time, but the first fixed display time is a fixed time and the second fixed display time is a fixed time. It may be a variable time. In this case, the confirmation display time can be changed even after the confirmation display has started, and when the prior identification is performed during the confirmation display or when the determination processing for the prior identification result is performed during the confirmation display. , The result can be reflected in the confirmation display in progress.

Further, both the first and second finalized display times may be set as variable times. In this case, both confirmed display times may be set based on the same or the same conditions, or may be set based on different or different conditions. As a configuration to be set based on the same type of conditions, for example, when the first specific result is the first result, the first fixed display time is set based on the result, and the first specific result is the first result. When the second result is different from the result, the second final display time can be set based on the result. Further, as a configuration to be set based on different or different conditions, for example, a configuration in which the first fixed display time is set based on the specific result and the second fixed display time is set based on the common hold number CRN. can do.

(6) In the first embodiment described above, the fixed display time is divided into the first fixed display time and the second fixed display time, but the division is not performed and the second fixed display time is not provided. It may be configured. In this case, the second stop display command can also be omitted. Further, the number of divisions of the fixed display time is not limited to 2, and may be 3 or more. In this case, each of the third and subsequent fixed display times other than the first and second fixed display times may be a variable time such as the first fixed display time, or a fixed time such as the second fixed display time. It may be.

Further, in the second embodiment, the fixed display time may be divided into a first fixed display time and a second fixed display time. In this case, as in the first embodiment, the first fixed display time may be a variable time and the second fixed display time may be a fixed time. The 1 fixed display time may be a fixed time, the second fixed display time may be a variable time, or both may be a variable time.

(7) In the first embodiment described above, the first confirmed display time is set at the start timing of the confirmed display of the main display unit 43, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the confirmed display The first confirmed display time may be set at a timing prior to the start timing of. That is, the setting timing of the first finalized display time may be after the start of the variable display on the main display unit 43 and before the start of the finalized display (or before the end of the finalized display if the configuration of (5) above is provided). For example, any timing may be used. This also applies to the process (step S1203) of determining whether or not the pending information corresponding to the jackpot or missed reach has been previously specified.

(8) In the first embodiment, the number of times the hold notice is set (the number of times the first confirmed display time is set as the special time) AN is set to a plurality of times, but it may be once. In that case, the hold notice may be given at the game times immediately before the specific game times that are the target of the hold notice, or the hold notice may be given at the game times even earlier than that.

Further, in the first embodiment, the set number of times AN is uniformly set to 2 times, but the number of times may be different or easily different depending on the type of the previously specified result. For example, if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is specified first, it is easy to select 3 times as the set number AN, and if the hold information corresponding to the missed reach is specified first, 2 times is selected as the set number AN. It can be configured to be easy.

(9) In the first embodiment described above, when the notice display effect for displaying the bubble image is displayed, the first fixed display time is uniformly set as the special time, but it is performed during the variable display. When the first confirmed display time is set as a special time only when the notice display effect is displayed in the confirmed display immediately after the variable display based on the specific result, and the second and subsequent notice display effects are displayed. When the display of the notice display effect is started from the next or later game times, the first confirmed display time may be set as the normal time. When executing the notice display effect from the second time onward, or when starting the notice display effect from the next and subsequent game times, the notification / effect control device 82 or the display control device 212, which is the control device on the sub side. Since it is possible to grasp at the start of the variable display that the notice display effect should be displayed, the timing of the temporary stop of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is set to be earlier than usual to secure the time for the notice display effect. good.

Further, even when the first finalized display time is set to a special time, there may be a case where the notice display effect is displayed and a case where the notice display effect is not displayed. In this case, there are cases where the first confirmed display time is only the special time and the notice display effect is not displayed, and cases where the first confirmed display time is the special time and the notice display effect is displayed at the same time. By providing a difference in the degree of expectation, it is possible to increase the variation of the degree of expectation-related production, and it is possible to diversify the game production. At this time, whether or not to display the notice display effect may be determined by the main control device 81, or by the notification / effect control device 82 or the display control device 212.

(10) In the first embodiment described above, when it has been determined that the special hold information has been specified first, the determination process of whether or not the special hold information has been specified first is restricted. , Alternatively or in addition to this, the process of setting the first fixed display time to the special time may be restricted.

(11) In the first embodiment, at the start timing of the confirmation display, one is selected from a plurality of confirmation display times including a special time, a normal time, and a time saving time, and the first confirmation is performed. Although the display time is set, the first confirmed display time is set to the normal time (time reduction time depending on the common hold number CRN) at a timing before the start of the confirmed display, and the confirmed display is started. If the special hold information is specified in advance, the first confirmed display time may be changed to the special time at the start timing of the confirmed display. With such a configuration, for example, even if a problem occurs in which the first fixed display time is not set as a special time, the setting of the normal time or the time saving time set in advance can remain, so that the fixed display itself is executed. It becomes possible to suppress the inconvenience that becomes impossible.

(12) In the first embodiment described above, when the common hold number CRN is K = 3 or more, the first fixed display time is set to the time reduction time to be shortened. In addition, when the common hold number CRN is equal to or less than the reference number M (for example, 1), the first fixed display time may be longer than the normal time. As a result, the holding information of the holding ball storage area 232 is less likely to be exhausted, and the interruption of the game progress can be suppressed.

(13) In each of the above embodiments, the special display area OE and the display unit KP are provided in the display screen 41a, but the display unit KP is provided in the display screen of a display device different from the symbol display device 41. Alternatively, the display unit KP may be configured by a light emitting display device provided with light emitting means such as an LED. When the display unit KP is provided outside the display screen 41a, it is preferable to provide the display unit KP around the display screen 41a in order to consolidate the points of interest.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, in the variable display area ME of the display screen 41a, the upper symbol row, the middle symbol row, and the lower symbol row are configured to be variablely displayed in the horizontal direction. The three symbol rows may be varied and displayed in the vertical direction, or the symbols of each symbol row may be switched and displayed in the individually set display area. That is, the symbols displayed in the display area may be sequentially replaced in ascending or descending order. Further, the number of symbol rows is not limited to a plurality, and a configuration may include only one row of symbol rows. In the configuration including a plurality of symbol rows, the number of symbol rows may be 2 or 4 or more.

Further, in each of the above embodiments, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed on the same display screen 41a, but a plurality of display screens (display devices) are provided, and one row of symbol rows is provided on each display screen. The configuration may be such that one row of symbols and the remaining two rows of symbols are displayed on separate display screens. In this case, the "picture display means" and the "display means" can be understood as a collective term for them, or can be understood as corresponding to one of the display screens.

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the hold information is acquired based on the winning of the operating ports 33a and 33b, and the hold information is stored up to a predetermined number (4 pieces), respectively. May not be stored. In this way, the configuration can be simplified. This also applies to winning a prize in the through gate 35.

(16) In each of the above embodiments, the hold information based on the winning of the upper operating port 33a is stored up to 4 pieces, but it may be less than 4 pieces, or 5 pieces or more. You may. Further, the upper limit storage number of the reserved information based on each prize in the lower operating port 33b and the through gate 35 may be less than 4 or 5 or more. Further, the upper limit number of stored information based on the winning of the operating ports 33a and 33b and the through gate 35 may be different.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the winning / failing determination is made in the order of winning the operating ports 33a and 33b, but the lower operating port 33b is won more than the hold information based on the winning the upper operating port 33a. The hold information based on the above may be preferentially targeted for the pass / fail judgment, or vice versa.

(18) In the first modification of the first embodiment, when re-variation is performed, all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are uniformly re-variable, but a part of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is re-variated. It may be a variable configuration. For example, it is determined whether or not there is a stop-displayed symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 that can be used as a stop mode of the hold notice, and if it is determined that there is one that can be used, the available symbol sequence is used. It may be configured to revariate only the symbol strings other than the above.

(19) In the first modification of the first embodiment, the stop result is changed via the re-variation of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3, but the configuration may be changed without re-variation. In this case, the stopped-displayed symbols Z1 to Z3 may be instantly changed to another symbol, a shield image may be displayed so as to cover the stopped-displayed symbols Z1 to Z3, or the stopped-displayed symbols Z1 to Z1 may be displayed. An image other than the symbol may be displayed in the display area of Z3, and then the changed symbol may appear when the shield image or the image other than the symbol is deleted. When changing only a part of the stopped-displayed symbol rows Z1 to Z3, it is not always necessary to display a shield image or an image other than the symbol on the entire symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It may be configured to be displayed only for a part of the symbol columns.

(20) In the first modification of the first embodiment, the notification / effect control device 82 determines whether or not to revariate the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3, but the main control device 81 performs the determination. It may be a configuration, or it may be a configuration performed by the display control device 212.

(21) In the first modification of the first embodiment, the prior identification is performed during the progress of the game round, and based on the result, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are reserved in the ongoing game round. The symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are revariated only when the stop display is performed in the stop mode, but when the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in the stop mode of the second hold notice in the subsequent game rounds, or Even when the stop mode of the hold notice is started from the game times after the ongoing game times when the prior identification is performed, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be revariated. In that case, whether or not to execute the re-variation in order to interweave the case where the stop display is performed in the stop mode of the hold notice without the re-variation and the case where the stop display is performed in the stop mode of the hold notice after the re-variation. It is advisable to provide a re-variable lottery means for drawing lots and randomly re-variate.

With such a configuration, even if the stop result of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 does not become the stop mode of the hold notice in the initial stop display, the re-variation is performed until the stop result is confirmed. Will be able to expect. As a result, the player's expectation can be maintained, and the degree of attention to the game can be increased. Further, in the configuration of the modification 1, it is easy for the player to determine which pending information corresponds to the jackpot or the missed reach based on the re-variation, but at random. When the re-variation occurs, it becomes difficult for the jackpot or missed reach to identify the reserved information that has been previously specified, and it is possible to give the fun of guessing the reserved information. The re-variation lottery may be performed by the main control device 81, or may be performed by the notification / effect control device 82 or the display control device 212, which are the control devices on the sub side.

(22) In the first modification of the first embodiment, the main control device 81 sets the first fixed display time to a special time, and in response to this, the notification / effect control device 82 or the display control device 212 has a symbol. Although the configuration is such that the columns Z1 to Z3 are re-variated, the notification / effect control device 82 or the display control device 212 is unique to the configuration, even though the main control device 81 sets the first fixed display time to the normal time. It is also possible to add a configuration in which the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are re-variated by determining the above. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the re-variation, reduce the discomfort of the player when the re-variation is performed, or misunderstand it as a special production and have an excessive sense of expectation. It is suppressed.

However, since the normal time is shorter than the special time, it may be difficult to secure the time for re-variation. Therefore, when the revariation is executed while the first confirmation display time is set to the normal time, the revariation is started before the start of the confirmation display, and the first confirmation display time is the special time. It is better to configure it to execute ahead of schedule. As a result, it is possible to properly secure the re-variation time, and it is possible to suppress inconveniences such as the game round ending in the middle of the re-variation and the time for displaying the stop result displayed as the re-stop cannot be properly secured. Will be done.

(23) In the first modification of the first embodiment, the first fixed display time is uniformly set when the hold notice is executed regardless of whether or not the symbol strings Z1 to Z3 are revariated. Although it is configured to be a time, if the re-variation is not executed even if the hold notice is executed, the first confirmed display time may be configured not to be a special time. In this case, the first finalized display time may be set as the normal time, but since it is necessary to secure the time for displaying the advance notice effect to make the bubble image appear, the first finalized display time that can be set is shorter than the special time. Moreover, a second special time longer than the normal time may be further provided and set to the second special time. In such a configuration, the main control device 81 may determine whether or not to revariate the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3.

(24) In the first modification of the first embodiment, the prior identification is performed during the progress of the game round, and based on the result, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are reserved for the ongoing game round. When the stop display is performed in the stop mode, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are always re-variated regardless of the progress of the game round when the prior identification is performed, but the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displaying the high-speed fluctuation. (Refer to FIG. 25 (c)) When the prior identification is performed, the re-variation is not executed, and the re-variation is performed only when the stop variation is displayed or at least one of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is in the stop-displayed state. It may be a variable configuration. That is, the presence or absence of re-variation may be determined based on the progress of the game times, and the re-variation may be executed when it is determined that the re-variation is to be executed. If it is determined that the re-variation is not executed, the stop result (stop result set at the start timing of the variation display) stored in the register of the MPU 242 of the notification / effect control device 82 is rewritten to the stop mode of the hold notice. From the beginning, it is preferable that the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed in the stop mode of the hold notice. Further, it is preferable to determine whether or not to execute the re-variation based on the content of the hold command (command containing information on the specific result) transmitted from the main controller 81 and the reception timing thereof. ..

(25) In the first modification of the first embodiment, the first stop display command includes the case where the first fixed display time is set to the special time and the case where the first fixed display time is set to the normal time or the time saving time. Although the configuration is such that the information is different, the configuration may include the same information in those cases. That is, regardless of the setting result of the first confirmed display time, at least the information regarding the length of the first confirmed display time, the information regarding whether or not the hold notice is executed, and the start timing of the hold notice in the first stop display command. It may be configured to include information about.

(26) In the second modification of the first embodiment, in the stop start process of FIG. 43, a process of determining whether or not the hold information corresponding to the hit or miss reach is previously specified (step S2504) is performed. The configuration is such that execution is performed at the start timing of the confirmation display of the main display unit 43, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the configuration may be such that execution is performed at a timing earlier than the start timing of the confirmation display. That is, the setting timing of the first fixed display time may be any timing as long as it is after the start of the variable display on the main display unit 43 and before the start of the fixed display.

Further, in the variable display time setting process for complete deviation in FIG. 47, the variable display of the main display unit 43 is a process (step S2904) for determining whether or not the hold information corresponding to the jackpot or the detached reach is previously specified. The configuration is such that the execution is performed at the start timing of, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the configuration may be such that the execution is performed at a timing before the start timing of the variable display. That is, the execution timing of the determination process may be any timing as long as it is after the start of the finalized display performed immediately before the variable display and before the start of the variable display.

(27) In the second modification of the first embodiment, the determination process of whether or not the special hold information is specified by the prior identification is performed at both the start of the variable display and the start of the final display. However, it may be configured to perform only one of them. For example, by configuring the configuration to be performed only at the start of the variable display, the variable display and the confirmed display in the same game can be set as a special time, and one of the variable display and the confirmed display is the special time and the other is the normal time. It is suitable when you want to avoid time.

(28) Although the special figure game times are illustrated in the modified example 3 of the first embodiment, this can also be applied to the configuration of the normal figure game times described in the second embodiment.

(29) In the modified example 3 of the first embodiment, the information regarding the first fixed display time is included in the second information area 342. When it is easy to adjust the data value setting, the configuration may be included in the first information area 341.

(30) In the third modification of the first embodiment, the information regarding the first fixed display time is assigned to the least significant bit LB1, but the information may be assigned to the most significant bit LB8. In this case, the identification bits for distinguishing the first information area 341 (upper byte or preceding command) and the second information area 342 (lower byte or succeeding command) are the first information area 341 and the second information area 342. In either case, the bit may be a bit other than the most significant bit.

(31) In the first embodiment, the main control device 81 transmits a change command and a type command to the notification / effect control device 82 prior to the variable display of the pattern on the main display unit 43. Although it is configured, it may be configured to be transmitted after the variable display of the pattern is performed. For example, during the period when the symbol display device 41 is performing high-speed fluctuation, the fluctuation start command and the type command corresponding to the game times when the fluctuation display is started are output from the main control device 81. Just do it.

(32) In the second embodiment described above, when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the lottery result is removed, and the confirmation display time is lengthened in both the opening result A and the opening result B. However, the confirmation display time may be lengthened only when the result is out of alignment. That is, the final display time may be set based on the result of the winning / failing lottery or the distribution result of the open type. In this case, it is possible to suppress a feeling of strangeness due to a long period from the notification of the opening result to the opening of the electric accessory 34, and the player's misunderstanding as a failure.

(33) In the second embodiment described above, when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the definite display time when the result of the normal figure winning / failing lottery is a wrong result, and the definite display when the opening result is A. Although the time and the maximum definite display time in the case of the opening result B are the same length, some of them may be different from others, or they may be different from each other. However, in consideration of reducing the processing load in the main control device 81 and saving the amount of ROM 203 used, the configuration of the above embodiment is preferable.

(34) In the second embodiment described above, both the result of the normal drawing winning / failing lottery and the open type of the electric accessory 34 are notified, but only one of them may be notified. In addition, when notifying the opening type of the electric accessory 34, the result of the lottery for winning or losing the normal figure is also obtained at the same time.

(35) In the second embodiment described above, the special display effect is a dedicated effect when the electric accessory 34 is opened in the first high winning support state when the support mode is the low frequency support mode. However, the configuration may be feasible even when the electric accessory 34 is opened and closed in the low winning support state. In this case, the special display effect is more likely to be performed in the first high prize support state than in the low prize support state, that is, when the support state of the electric accessory 34 is the first high prize support state, it is preferentially special. The display effect may be performed. However, from the viewpoint of highlighting the first high winning support state and suppressing the confusion of the player, the configuration of the above embodiment is preferable.

Further, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the special display effect may be performed even when the electric accessory 34 is opened in the first high winning support state. In the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34 is opened frequently in the first place. Therefore, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34 is not opened in the first high winning support state. May be.

(36) In the second embodiment described above, in the two lottery systems of the normal symbol and the special symbol, the fixed display time of the normal symbol, which is one of them, is changed based on the game state. 1 Special symbol (design that is displayed in a variable manner based on winning one of the upper operating port 33a and lower operating port 33b) and the second special symbol (winning one of the upper operating port 33a and the lower operating port 33b) It can also be applied in relation to the symbol that is displayed in a variable manner based on. As such a configuration, a pachinko machine (so-called small hit RUSH machine) in which more special miss results (so-called small hits) are included than the complete miss results in the winning / failing lottery result of the second special symbol can be mentioned.

The pachinko machine is configured to have a difference in the degree of advantage of the gaming state depending on the length of the gaming time related to one gaming time in the second special figure. Specifically, when the gaming state is set to a disadvantageous state, the variation display time of the second special figure is made extremely long. As a result, the opening timing of the variable winning device 32 is significantly delayed from the time of winning the operating port, and the opening frequency of the variable winning device 32 per unit time is greatly reduced. On the contrary, when the gaming state is set to the advantageous state, the variable display time of the second special figure is shortened to increase the opening frequency of the variable winning device 32 per unit time. With such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to receive a profit even if the game ball is won in the operating port corresponding to the second special drawing (hereinafter referred to as "second operating port") under a disadvantageous state. It is said that it is easy to receive profits only after winning a prize in the second operating port under an advantageous condition. The fluctuation display time of the first special figure in the disadvantageous state is set to the same time length as that of a general pachinko machine (a shorter time than the fluctuation display of the second special figure in the disadvantageous state), which is a disadvantageous state. In this case, it is possible to play a game by winning a game ball in the operating port corresponding to the first special figure (hereinafter, referred to as “first operating port”).

By the way, under the above configuration, a game ball may be unintentionally won in the second operating port when it is in a disadvantageous state. At this time, if the configuration is such that the game round of the first special figure is started after the game round of the second special figure is completed, the game round of the first special figure is started until the game round of the second special figure is completed. The game round is not started, and the state in which the game progress is impossible continues for a long time. Therefore, in the pachinko machine, a simultaneous variation configuration is adopted so that the game times of the first special figure can be executed even while the game times of the second special figure are being executed. Therefore, similar to the situation that occurs between the normal symbol and the special symbol described in the second embodiment, in the case of a disadvantageous state, the second special figure is reached at the end of the game round of the first special figure. It is possible that the game times of are being executed. Therefore, by making the fixed display time in the game times of the second special figure in the disadvantaged state longer than that in the advantageous state, the variable display time can be shortened by that amount, and the game can be played promptly. It will be possible to support termination.

At that time, it is preferable to lengthen the confirmation display time only when the result of the winning / failing lottery of the second special figure is completely out of order. If the result of the lottery for winning or failing the second special figure is a special wrong result, the result corresponds to the result of opening the variable winning device 32, so that the game round of the first special figure can be executed while this is confirmed and displayed. This is because it is not appropriate.

In addition, in a pachinko machine equipped with a small hit RUSH function, by including the special deviation result in the lottery result of the first special figure, the lottery result is the special deviation result. The 1st game was completed prior to the 2nd game while the 2nd special figure game (2nd game), which is the result of the lottery being out of order, is proceeding at the same time. In some cases, there is a configuration in which the second game can be forcibly terminated (forcibly terminated in a completely disengaged state). This is assumed to be an act of playing a game by intentionally winning a prize in the first operating port while waiting for the variable winning device 32 to be opened based on the winning by intentionally winning a prize in the second operating port in a disadvantageous state. Because it is done. Even if the same special deviation result is obtained, the opening pattern of the variable winning device 32 is different between the second special figure and the first special figure. In the former case, the game ball can be won or can be easily won. While the winning device 32 is opened, in the latter case, the variable winning device 32 is opened in such a manner that the game ball cannot win a prize or it is difficult to win a prize as compared with the case of the second special figure.

In the above case, when forcibly terminating the second game round, instead of forcibly terminating the second game round based on the end of the finalized display of the first special figure, the finalized display of the first special figure is displayed. It is preferable that the second game round is forcibly terminated (confirmation display is started) based on the start. For example, when there is a request to lengthen or shorten the finalized display time of the first game, in the former configuration, the forced end timing may be delayed or earlier depending on the length of the finalized display time. Although there is a possibility of slackening, in the latter configuration, even if the length of the fixed display time is changed, it is suppressed that the forced end timing is affected, and the degree of freedom of the fixed display time can be improved.

(37) In the modified example of the second embodiment, the determination process for determining whether or not the game is paused (step S4702 in FIG. 71) and the final display time setting process based on the result (step). Although S4703) is configured to be performed when the variable display is started, it may be configured to be performed when the final display is started as in the first embodiment. That is, when it is determined that the game is paused during the variation display, the confirmation display time may be shortened by the confirmation display immediately after the variation display. With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly reflect the presence or absence of the game suspension in the fixed display time (and the game time related to one game), and the result of the normal drawing winning / failing lottery and the opening of the electric accessory 34. It becomes possible to inform the player of the type more quickly. In addition, with the above configuration, when it is determined that the game is restarted during the variation display, the confirmation display time is returned to the time during the game in the confirmation display immediately after the variation display. be able to. As a result, it is possible to further suppress the act of intentionally shortening the game time related to one game of the normal game game without the intention of ending the game.

(38) In the modified example of the second embodiment, the configuration in which the patterns of the plurality of lottery systems including the normal drawing and the special drawing change at the same time is illustrated, but the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the plurality of lottery systems coexist. , Even if a plurality of lottery systems coexist, they are not limited to the configuration in which they are changed at the same time. For example, even if the configuration includes only a single lottery system, if the game is terminated with the reserved information remaining, the remaining reserved information is quickly digested due to the configuration of the above modification. , The effect that the next player can easily start the game can be obtained.

(39) In the modified example of the second embodiment, the launch of the game ball is stopped, the special figure game times are not being displayed in a variable manner, and the reserved information of the special figure is not stored. The configuration is such that the game is determined to be suspended when all are satisfied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration is determined to determine that the game is suspended when at least one of them is satisfied. May be.

(40) In the modified example of the second embodiment, when determining whether or not the game is suspended, it is determined whether or not the launch of the game ball is stopped. Alternatively, in addition, the presence / absence of the operation of the effect operation unit 75, the ball lending button, and the return button may be determined, or the operation history may be referred to. In short, the configuration may be such that it is determined whether or not the game is paused based on the operation status of the operating means that the player can operate.

(41) In the third embodiment, an error target (predetermined abnormality occurrence) occurs when the front door frame 14 is opened, the lower plate 72 is full, or a ball is clogged. ), A value is set in the error counter EK, an error flag is set, and processing for an error is performed, but the target of the error is not limited to the above. For example, the gaming machine main body 12 may be opened with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame 13 may be opened, or the upper plate 71 may be full. Further, it is not necessary to set any of the above events as the target of the error, and one or a plurality of these may be set as the target of the error. For example, the opening of the front door frame 14 and the full tank of the lower plate 72 may be regarded as error events, while the occurrence of ball clogging may not be subject to the error.

(41) In the third embodiment, the error counter EK and the error flag are set to reduce the progress speed of the game times, but the target event for reducing the progress speed is also the above. Not limited to. For example, it may be assumed that the launch stop switch of the launch handle 54 has been operated. The launch stop switch is a switch that prevents the game ball from being launched while operating the launch handle 54. Further, a sensor for detecting the remaining game balls of the upper plate 71 is provided, and the progress speed is based on the fact that the main control device 81 grasps by the sensor that the number of remaining game balls of the upper plate 71 is equal to or less than a predetermined number. May be configured to reduce.

(42) In the third embodiment, the game progress speed is reduced by extending the first fixed display time, but the second fixed display time may be extended, and the first fixed display time may be extended. Both the display time and the second final display time may be extended, the variable display time may be extended, or a combination thereof may be used to reduce the progress speed.

(43) In the third embodiment, the first fixed display time of the game times to be executed is extended when the error counter EK is larger than 0 or when the error flag is set. The first fixed display time of a part of the game times performed in the situation may be extended. For example, the first confirmed display time may be extended or not extended by jumping each game a predetermined number of times (for example, once), or if the predetermined result (for example, a deviation result) is obtained in the above situation, the first confirmed display time may be extended or not extended. However, if the result is different from the predetermined result (for example, a jackpot result), the configuration may be extended. Further, the game times to be extended and the game times not to be extended may be determined by using various counters (C1, C2, C3, CS, etc.) for determining whether or not the game times are executed in the above situation.

(44) In the third embodiment described above, a value (CRN + 1 or CRN) corresponding to the common hold number CRN at the time when the error event occurs is set in the error counter EK, but the error event occurs. The error counter EK may be configured to set a value corresponding to the common hold number CRN when a predetermined period (for example, 10 sec) elapses from the timing of occurrence, or the common hold number CRN at the time when an error event occurs. A value obtained by adding a predetermined number larger than 1 to the error counter EK may be set. Further, it is also possible to set a value according to the common hold number CRN at the timing when the game is stopped after the error occurs (for example, the timing when the launch handle 54 is returned to the initial position or the timing when the launch handle 54 is released). Alternatively, the value may be set according to the common hold number CRN at the timing when a predetermined period elapses from the timing when the game is stopped. Assuming that the common hold number CRN at the time when the predetermined period elapses, for example, it is possible to add a time lag until the game ball launched immediately before the error occurs wins the upper operating port 33a or the like as the starting ball entry portion. It is possible.

(45) In the third embodiment, the time set in the first definite display time is not limited to the above (5.0 sec), and may be longer or shorter than this. Further, the time to be set in the first fixed display time does not have to be the same uniformly, and it is easy to set a long time in the case where the error event has just occurred, and the time from the occurrence of the error event is long. The set time may be shortened as the lapse of time, or vice versa. Assuming that the game result of the game times performed at the time of the error event is most likely to be overlooked, the first game time performed at the time of the error event occurs. It can be said that the configuration that maximizes the fixed display time is preferable.

(46) In the third embodiment, the length of the first definite display time may be determined in relation to the elapsed time from the occurrence of the error. For example, it can be said that the shorter the period from the occurrence of the error event to the start timing of the first confirmation display, the more likely it is that the error is still being dealt with and the game result is overlooked. Therefore, if the first fixed display time is set as the elapsed time is shorter in relation to the elapsed time from the occurrence of the error event as described above, the game result may be overlooked. It can be further reduced.

(47) In the third embodiment, the length of the first finalized display time may be determined in relation to the variable display time of each game. For example, if the first fixed display time of a game with a long variable display time is set to be short, and the first fixed display time of a game with a short variable display time is set to be long, Similar to the above (46), the first confirmed display time can be set in relation to the elapsed time from the occurrence of the error, and it is necessary to actually measure the elapsed time in order to set in relation to the elapsed time. It does not occur and the processing load can be reduced. In addition, the first fixed display time of the game times in which the long variable display time is set is set to be long, and the first fixed display time of the game times in which the short variable display time is set is set to be short. May be good. Assuming that the game times with a longer variable display time are more likely to be a big hit result, by doing the above, the game results of the game times that the player will be highly interested in will be obtained. It is possible to preferably avoid an event that is overlooked.

(48) In the third embodiment, the delay effect is performed, but the delay effect may be simply extended and the delay effect may not be performed. In particular, when an error occurs, processing for recovery will be performed, so it is considered that a configuration that does not add new processing for production will greatly contribute to early recovery.

(49) In the third embodiment, when an error event occurs, the error event occurrence information may be output to, for example, a hall computer as an external output. In this case, in a situation where the first confirmation display time is extended, such as when the error counter EK is larger than 0 or when the error flag is set, the occurrence information of the above error event is continuously output. If the output of the occurrence information of the error event is stopped based on the fact that the error counter EK becomes 0 or the error flag is cleared, the manager of the game hall can perform the first fixed display time. It is possible to clearly grasp the situation where the extension is being carried out.

(50) In the third and fourth embodiments, the position of the accessory provided in the gaming machine may be displaced in the situation where the first final display time is extended. That is, it is a configuration in which the delay effect is performed through the position displacement of the accessory. Specifically, when the accessory is placed in the first position, the delay effect is not performed, and the first position and the position are not affected. Is configured to have a delay effect when it is arranged at a different second position. The first position and the second position may be different positions to the extent that they can be visually identified by the player or the manager of the game hall. For example, the first position indicating that the delay effect is not performed is , It may be arranged in a position that is invisible or difficult to see from the player or the manager of the game hall, and may be configured to be visible or easy to see by being displaced to the second position.

(51) The delay effect in the third and fourth embodiments is not limited to the above mode, and for example, the background color is changed or the brightness of the display screen 41a or the game board 24 is changed (decreased). Alternatively, the configuration may be performed by another indicator lamp unit 63 or the like.

(52) In the third and fourth embodiments, when the first fixed display time is extended, the delay effect is performed during the first fixed display time, but the variable display time or the third (2) The delay effect may be performed during the finalized display time, or may not be performed during the first fixed display time, but may be performed during the variable display time, the second finalized display time, or one of them.

(53) In the modified example of the third embodiment, the error flag is erased based on the operation of the firing handle 54. For example, the touch sensor provided on the firing handle 54 is turned on. Although it is not operated next to it, the error flag may be erased based on the touch of the player's hand, or other operation units of the gaming machine (operation buttons for directing, ball rental button, etc.). The error flag may be cleared based on the operation of the machine or the touch of the operation unit. In addition, the start of the game, such as that the game ball has been launched, that the game ball has been launched and entered the predetermined ball entry section, that the conditions for paying out the game ball have been met, that a hit / fail judgment has been made, etc. Assuming that the condition is satisfied (the situation has already been satisfied), the error flag may be cleared.

(54) In the modified example of the third embodiment, the error flag is cleared when the game start operation is performed on condition that the error is resolved, but the error is resolved. Even if this is not done, the error flag may be cleared when the game start operation is performed.

(55) In the modified example of the third embodiment, when the game operation is performed, the error flag is not set even if an error event occurs, and the game operation is not performed. The error flag may be set on the condition of.

(56) In the fourth embodiment, the player may be informed that the operation flag is set so that the player can grasp the situation. For example, the presence / absence of the operation flag may be notified by controlling the light emission of a light emitting unit such as an LED built in the operation button 77 or provided near the operation button 77, or the display may be displayed on the display screen 41a. May be.

(57) In the fourth embodiment, when the operation flag is set, the time set for the first finalized display time may be longer or shorter than 30 sec. Further, the time to be extended may be set as a predetermined time (30 sec) in advance, and the extension of the predetermined time may be allocated to each hold information by dividing the time according to the stored hold information. Specifically, when the common hold number CRN is 2, a predetermined time may be allocated for 15 sec and 15 sec and set as the first fixed display time of each game.

(58) In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the variable display time of the game times is set as the first fixed display time as it is, but for example, a predetermined period in the game times (for example, from the start of the reach display). The time until the end) may be set as the first final display time.

(59) In the modified example of the fourth embodiment, the first fixed display time of the game times that results in the jackpot is set as the variable display time of the game times, but the game results are not limited to this. However, not only the game times that result in the game, but also the first fixed display time of the other game times may be set as the variable display time of the game times. For example, when the game times that result in a big hit are specified by the process for holding notice, the variable display time of the game times is set to the first for the game times that are performed before the game times that result in the big hit. It may be configured to be set as a fixed display time. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect from being overlooked in a configuration in which a continuous effect is generated over a plurality of game times by a hold notice as in the first embodiment.

In addition, as the first fixed display time of the game times that result in the jackpot, the total time of the variable display time of the game times that result in the jackpot and the variable display time of the game times that are executed before that is set. It may be configured to be set. In this case, as the effect during the first finalized display, in addition to the effect of the game times that result in a big hit, it is preferable that the effect of the game times that is performed before that is performed.

(60) In the fifth embodiment, when the result is a normal jackpot that shifts to the low frequency support mode during the high frequency support mode, the variation display of the symbol ends early. As the game times when the support mode ends, the variation display of the symbol may end earlier in the predetermined number of times (50 times) of the game times.

(61) In the fifth embodiment, when the high-frequency support mode advantageous to the player ends, the variation display of the symbol ends early. For example, the high-probability mode advantageous to the player. The above configuration may be applied when the above is completed.

(62) In the fifth embodiment, the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol row Z2 is changed to end the fluctuation display of the symbol earlier, but the fluctuation speed of the other symbol rows Z1 and Z3 is also changed. Alternatively, instead of changing the fluctuation speed, a sudden stop may be made to end the fluctuation display of the symbol.

(63) In the fifth embodiment, when the number of holds on the second ball entry side is small, the variation display of the symbol is terminated early, but the number of holds on the first ball entry side is also taken into consideration. Then, it may be configured to decide whether or not to end the variation display of the symbol early. For example, if the hold information on the first ball entry section side is stored but the hold information on the second ball entry section side is not stored, the variation display of the symbol is terminated early and the second ball entry section is entered. Even if the hold information on the part side is not stored, if the hold information on the first ball entry part side is not stored, the variation display of the symbol may not be terminated early.

(64) In the fifth embodiment, the opening pattern of the electric accessory 134a may be added to determine the end timing of the variation display of the symbol. For example, if the electric accessory 134a is immediately opened, it can be said that the hold information on the second entry portion side can be replenished immediately, but if the electric accessory 134a is not easily opened, the first 2 It can be said that it is difficult to replenish the hold information on the ball entry side. Therefore, the opening timing of the electric accessory 134a is grasped, and if the opening timing is the first timing, the variation display of the symbol is terminated at the timing corresponding to the first timing, and the opening timing is from the first timing. In the case of the second timing, which is also late, the variation display of the symbol may be terminated at a timing corresponding to the second timing and earlier than in the case of the first timing. Further, the variable display of the symbol may be terminated in accordance with the opening timing of the electric accessory 134a. For example, the end timing of the variation display may be set so as to enter the second operating port 134 by firing the game ball at the timing when the variation display of the symbol ends.

(65) Needless to say, in the fifth embodiment, the first driving notification effect and the second driving notification effect are not limited to the above.

(66) In the fifth embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is set based on the number of reservations on the second ball entry side at the start of the game round, which is the result of the normal jackpot in the high frequency support mode. Although the configuration is such that the effect of the game times is performed according to the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern may be changed in the middle of the game times. For example, at the start timing of the deceleration process of the middle symbol row, the number of holds on the second ball entry portion side is grasped again, and the fluctuation speed of the middle symbol row Z2 is set according to the hold number. By doing so, when the hold information on the second entry part side is acquired and the hold information is replenished during the game round, it is possible to perform a normal effect. Therefore, even if the number of holdings at the start of the game is small, it is possible to prevent the player from stopping first.

(67) In the fifth embodiment, when the hold information on the first special figure side and the hold information on the second special figure side are stored, the second special figure is more than the hold information on the first special figure side. A so-called priority digestion configuration in which the hold information on the drawing side is prioritized and is the target of the pass / fail judgment may be applied. More specifically, the hold information on the second special figure side acquired after the hold information on the first special figure side is subject to the hit / fail judgment before the hold information on the first special figure side. May be. As described above, the distribution table for the first ball entry section and the distribution table for the second ball entry section have different advantages, and the second special drawing side is more advantageous for the player. However, it is not preferable for the player to determine whether or not the hold information on the first special figure side is correct or not in the high frequency support mode in which the hold information on the second special figure side is easily acquired. Therefore, if the above priority digestion configuration is applied, it is possible to postpone the hold information on the first special figure side in the high frequency support mode, and when it is notified at an early stage that a normal jackpot result will be obtained. In addition, it is possible to easily obtain the reserved information on the second special drawing side, which is advantageous for the player.

(68) In the configuration for extending the first fixed display time as in the modified example of the fifth embodiment, if the hold information is acquired (supplemented) during the first fixed display time, it is set. The configuration may be such that the process ends without waiting for the elapse of the first finalized display time.

(69) In the sixth embodiment, the larger the number of holds, the shorter the first fixed display time, which makes it easier for V prizes to occur. However, the larger the number of holds, the longer the first fixed display time. The V prize may be easily generated.

(70) In the sixth embodiment, the operation of the shutter 358 in the variable winning device 132 realizes a high or low advantage such as whether or not a V winning is generated, but the advantage depends on other accessories. May be realized. For example, in the game area PE, the accessory is provided upstream of the variable winning device 132, and when the accessory is arranged at the first position, the game ball is guided to the variable winning device 132, and the first When it is arranged in a second position different from the first position, the game ball is not or is not easily guided to the variable winning device 132. Then, the operation of the accessory is configured to start from the timing at which the definite notification in the game round is started, and the timing at which the accessory is arranged at the first position is such that the variable winning device 132 is opened in the open / close execution mode. The time from the definite notification to the opening timing of the variable winning device 132 is adjusted so as to overlap or not overlap with the timing. As a result, even if the opening / closing execution mode is entered or the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 132 is performed, it is possible to generate a situation in which a prize is likely to occur in the variable winning device 132 and a situation in which it is unlikely to occur. ..

(71) In the sixth embodiment, the V winning rate is configured to be different based on the value of the common hold number CRN, but the hold information on the first ball entry side and the hold on the second ball entry section side. One of the information may be used to make the V winning rate different. For example, when the game board 124 of the fifth embodiment is applied, almost no hold information on the second entry portion side is acquired in the low probability mode (low frequency support mode), and the high probability mode (high frequency support) is applied. During the mode), it becomes difficult to acquire the hold information on the first ball entry side. Therefore, for example, in the low probability mode (low frequency support mode), the first confirmed display time is set so that the V winning rate differs depending on the number of reserved information on the first ball entry side, and the high probability mode (high frequency). During the support mode), the first confirmed display time may be set so that the V winning rate differs depending on the number of reserved information on the second ball entry side.

(72) In the sixth embodiment, when the common hold number CRN is 7 or 8 in the high probability mode, the first fixed display time is set by lottery, but 7 In some cases, 15.0 sec is set, and in the case of eight, 0.5 sec is set. The length of the first fixed display time may be determined by the number of holds. In this case, as long as the jackpot result is obtained in the situation where the common hold number CRN is 8 (upper limit number), V prize will be generated, and it will be a novel playability that completely links the hold number and the consecutive villa rate. can do. In such a configuration, it is preferable to make it more difficult to acquire the hold information in the high-frequency support mode than the above so that the permanent villa does not occur. Specifically, the frequency with which the electric accessory 34 is opened is lower than the above, and the fluctuation display time when reach is not generated in the high frequency support mode is shorter than the above, or higher. It is conceivable that the fluctuation display time when reach occurs in the frequency support mode is shorter than the above.

(73) In the seventh embodiment, the first definite display time of the special deviation result and the opening time of the opening / closing execution mode based on the first type jackpot result B and the second type jackpot result B are adjusted, respectively. So, the finalized display time of the special deviation result and the total of the finalized display time and the opening time of these jackpot results are set to be the same length, but the adjustment of the first confirmed display time, the adjustment of the opening time, the first The relationship between the special deviation result and these jackpot results may be defined by adjusting each of the two fixed display time adjustments or by adjusting one or a plurality of combinations.

(74) Needless to say, in the seventh embodiment, the chance effect is not limited to the above.

(75) In the seventh embodiment, when the result is a special deviation, the first fixed display time is set based on the relationship with the type 1 jackpot result B and the type 2 jackpot result B. However, the above-mentioned first finalized display time may be set at a predetermined ratio in the case of a normal deviation result. Specifically, for example, a predetermined lottery may be performed when the result is out of the ordinary, and the first final display time may be set when the lottery is won.

(76) In each of the above embodiments, the number of prize balls (“1”) based on the entry into the second entry portion 33e or the second operation port 134 is transferred to the first entry portion 33d or the first operation port 133. The number of prize balls is set to be less than the number of prize balls (“3”) based on the number of balls entered, but the number is not limited to this. The number of prize balls based on the entry into the second entry unit 33e and the second operating port 134 is equal to or greater than the number of prize balls based on the entry into the first entry section 33d and the first operation port 133. It is also possible to set so as to be.

However, as already described, setting the number of prize balls based on the balls entering the second ball entry unit 33e and the second operating port 134 shown in the above embodiment to "1" accelerates the game progress. In order to emphasize the difference between the normal gaming state and the high-accuracy gaming state, it has a close relationship with the shortening of the variable display time and the like. If the number of prize balls based on the balls entering the second ball entry unit 33e or the second operating port 134 is set to "2", "3", etc., many prize balls are given to the player. obtain. For this reason, when trying to suppress the granting of excessive benefits, devise a way to reduce the ball entry rate (acquisition rate of hold information), or reduce the reduction range of the variable display time and the fixed display time. It is expected that it will be necessary to take measures such as doing so. This is a factor that hinders the speeding up of the progress of the game. Therefore, it is preferable that the number of prize balls based on the balls entering the second ball entry portion 33e and the second operating port 134 is set to "1" so that the increase of the game balls in the highly accurate gaming state can be suppressed.

(77) In each of the above embodiments, by devising the structure of the operating port unit 33, the game ball that has entered the upper operating port 33a can be placed in either the first entry portion 33d or the second entry portion 33e. On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the lower operating port 33b is configured to enter only the second entry portion 33e, but this may be changed as follows. Specifically, even if the lower operating port 33b and the electric accessory 34 associated therewith are provided separately from the upper operating port 33a, and a configuration corresponding to the second ball entry portion 33e is added to the lower operating port 33b. good. That is, the game ball that has entered the upper operating port 33a can enter either the first entry portion 33d or the second entry portion 33e, while the game ball that has entered the lower operating opening 33b is separately provided. It may be configured to enter the second ball entry portion. In such a configuration, the number of prize balls when the ball enters the first ball entry unit 33d or the second ball entry unit 33e through the upper operating port 33a is set to "3", and the added second ball entry unit is added. It is also possible to set the number of prize balls to "1" when a ball enters through the lower operating port 33b.

(78) In each of the above embodiments, the notification / effect control device 82 and the display control device 212 are separately provided, but one control device that integrates the functions of the respective control devices 82 and 212 may be provided. ..

(79) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory is opened a predetermined number of times when the game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game ball in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine, which is a big hit when a right is entered, a pachinko machine equipped with other accessories, an arrange ball machine, a game machine such as a sparrow ball, and the like.

In addition, a non-ballistic gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line that can be seen from the display window, a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

Further, the gaming machine body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts the rotation of the reel.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

The invention described in each of the following feature groups states that "some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a pattern display device for variablely displaying a pattern. In this type of gaming machine, for example, it is provided in a gaming area. A lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a winning state, and a variable display of the pattern is started. When the lottery is won. In, the background technology that a specific pattern combination or the like is stopped and displayed and the gaming state shifts to the specific gaming state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-074175) is described as "still improved in improving the interest." There is room for it. ”This invention was made with the problem to be solved.

<Characteristic A group>
Features A1. An acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for a working port by the main control device 81) to acquire special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the acquisition means, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing the hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant information, and
The privilege granting means (main control device 81) capable of granting the privilege to the player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being the granting result that the special information corresponds to the granting information. (A function to execute the game state transition process) and
A pattern display means (main display unit 43, symbol display device 41) capable of variably displaying a pattern, and
Based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the symbol, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped and displayed as one of the game times. , A display control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the main control device 81) that controls the display of the pattern display means, and
With
The display control means
A stop display period setting means (a function of executing the stop start processing by the main control unit 81) for setting the stop display period for performing the stop display, and
A stop display execution means (a function of executing a confirmation display process by the main control device 81) that executes the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means, and
With
When a predetermined condition is satisfied during the variable display or immediately after the variable display, the stop display period setting means sets the stop display period of the stop display immediately after the variable display to the first period (the first fixed display time is special. When the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the variable display or the stop display immediately after the variable display, the stop display period of the stop display immediately after the variable display is defined as the first period. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for setting a different second period (fixed display time when the first fixed display time is set to a normal time).

According to the above configuration, the stop display period of the game time can be different depending on whether the predetermined condition is satisfied in the middle of the game time or not. This makes it possible to change the period from the start of the variable display of the pattern to the end of the stop display of the pattern (the game time related to one game) according to the situation change that occurs during the game. Become.

By the way, in general, in recent gaming machines, variable display of a pattern is performed based on a predetermined variable display period, and once the variable display starts, the period cannot be changed. For this reason, for example, when there is a request to change the game time of the game in the middle of the game, if the variable display period is changed to respond, the design of the game machine must be renewed. .. Even if such a change can be realized, during the variable display, it is usual that the visual or auditory game effect is aligned with the variable display period separately from the variable display of the pattern, and in some cases, it is performed. , There are also cases where those game productions are performed in combination. For this reason, in case the variable display period is changed during the variable display, it is necessary to have a configuration in which various effect adjustments can be executed in the middle of the variable display, which is inconvenient in that the burden on the effect design is significantly increased. be. In this respect, in this configuration, the game time of the game times is changed by utilizing the stop display period. As a result, it is possible to change the game time for one game while keeping the variable display period as a predetermined period. Moreover, since the original purpose of the stop display is to show the result of the grant determination, there are many cases where the game effect is not performed during the stop display period, or even if it is performed, it is simple. Therefore, even if the stop display period is changed, the adjustment burden on the production can be lightened, and the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. As described above, according to this configuration, it is possible to change the game time of the game time in the middle of the game time while suppressing the inconvenience in the game design. As a result, it is possible to allow the sudden addition of the game production to enhance the production effect, change the tempo of the game progress, and the like, and it is possible to improve the interest.

In feature A1, "When a predetermined condition is satisfied during the variable display or immediately after the variable display, the stop display period setting means ... The stop display period of the stop display immediately after the variable display is set to the first stop display period. The "means for setting the second period different from the period" is changed to "the stop display period setting means sets the stop display period of the game times to the first period (first fixed) when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game times. A fixed display time when the display time is set to a special time), and when the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the game, the stop display period of the game is set to a second period (second period) different from the first period. 1) Means for setting the fixed display time to the normal time) ”may be read as.

Feature A2. The feature A1 is characterized in that the stop display period setting means includes a stop display setting means for setting the stop display period at a timing after the start of the variable display and before the end of the stop display. Described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the length of the stop display period can be changed according to the situation change after the start of the variable display. At this time, in this configuration, since the stop display period is set before the end of the stop display at the latest, the stop display can be properly executed. That is, according to this configuration, it is possible to change the game period related to one game time in the middle of the game time while suppressing the occurrence of inconvenience in the execution of the stop display.

Feature A3. As the stop display setting means, a means for setting a stop display period corresponding to the start timing of the stop display (a function of executing a stop start processing by the main control device 81) is provided. The gaming machine described in A2.

According to the above configuration, the situation change that occurs before the start timing of the stop display can be reflected in the length of the stop display period. As a result, it is possible to deal with the situation change that occurs at the end of the variable display, and the optimum configuration can be obtained when the game period related to one game is changed in the middle.

Feature A4. It is characterized in that it is provided with an effect control means (a function of executing a stop start process by the notification / effect control device 82) for controlling the game effect to be performed by a predetermined effect means during the stop display. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A3.

The length of the stop display period can be changed according to the situation change during the game, but according to the above configuration, it is possible to add or reduce the game effect according to the above situation change in the stop display. Become. In other words, it is possible to utilize the stop display period as a period for adjusting the effect, and it is easier to adjust the effect compared to the case of adding or reducing in the variable display where the game effect is likely to occur frequently. Will be possible.

The "predetermined effect means" of feature A4 may be configured such that the "picture display means" also serves as the "predetermined effect means", or a means different from the "picture display means" may play a role. ..

Feature A5. The first period is longer than the second period.
The effect control means is characterized in that it includes means for controlling so that a predetermined game effect (notice display effect for causing a bubble image to appear) is performed when the stop display period is the first period. The gaming machine described in A4.

According to the above configuration, by setting the stop display period to the first period on the longer side, it is possible to execute a predetermined game effect, so that it is possible to allow the addition of the game effect during the execution of the game times. .. As a result, it is possible to expand the production opportunities and enhance the production effect.

Feature A6. The gaming machine according to feature A4 or A5, wherein the effect control means includes means for ending the game effect performed during the stop display by the end of the stop display.

For example, if the game production is continued even after the end of the stop display (after the end of the game round), there is a concern that it will be difficult for the player to recognize the boundary with the subsequent game round. Further, by overlapping with the game production executed in the next game round, the distinctiveness between the productions may be lowered, or the player's understanding of the production may be hindered. In this regard, according to this configuration, since the game effect performed during the stop display is finished by the end of the stop display, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed, and the game is easy to play. It becomes possible to improve the play.

Feature A7. A first control means (main control device 81) including the display control means and
A second control means (notification / effect control device 82, display control device 212) including the effect control means is provided.
The first control means issues a predetermined command (first stop display command) including period information corresponding to the first period or the second period in accordance with the start timing of the stop display. The gaming machine according to any one of features A4 to A6, which comprises means for outputting to (a function of executing a confirmation display process by the main control device 81).

According to the above configuration, the first control means is responsible for controlling the variable display and the stop display of the pattern, and the second control means is responsible for the execution control of the game effect. Therefore, the load of the control process can be distributed. This makes it possible to suppress load concentration as compared with the case where each of the above controls is performed by a single control device. On the other hand, in the configuration in which the game effect is executed on the premise of the stop display, the second control means has to function as a lower device of the first control means. It is configured to output commands. Therefore, the reception timing of the predetermined command can be grasped as the start timing of the stop display, and the second control means can easily grasp the start timing of the stop display as compared with the case where the command is output in advance. .. Moreover, since the command includes the period information corresponding to the first period or the second period, it is possible to grasp the length of the stop display period at the same time. As a result, the number of times a command is sent and received when the stop is displayed is reduced, and the load on both control means can be reduced.

In addition, the feature A7 "has a first pattern as the pattern, and has
When the game round is executed, a second symbol different from the first symbol is variably displayed in the symbol display means or a display means different from the symbol display means, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is obtained. Is provided with a second pattern display control means (a function of executing variable display control processing by the notification / effect control device 82) that controls the display of the pattern display means or the different display means so as to stop and display.
A first control means (main control device 81) including the display control means and
A second control means (notification / effect control device 82, display control device 212) including the display control means for the second pattern is provided.
The first control means issues a predetermined command (first stop display command) including period information corresponding to the first period or the second period in accordance with the start timing of the stop display. It is provided with a means for outputting to (a function of executing a confirmation display process by the main control device 81). "

Feature A8. When the stop display period is set to the first period, the stop display period setting means is longer than the second period as the first period, and the stop display period is set for the stop display. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, which comprises means for setting a period shorter than the period of variable display executed immediately before.

If the stop display period is unnecessarily lengthened, it is easy to get the impression that the waiting time from the end of the variable display to the start of the next variable display is long, which may induce a feeling of delay. In this respect, in this configuration, even if the stop display period is set as the first period on the longer side, the period is shorter than the variable display period. As a result, the game can be played at a good tempo even when the stop display period is long, and the playability can be guaranteed.

Feature A9. In the stop display period, a variable period (one of the first fixed display time and the second fixed display time) in which the period corresponding to the first period or the second period can be set, and the length are fixed. A configuration in which a fixed period (one of the first fixed display time and the second fixed display time) is included, and the variable period and the other of the fixed period are started after one of the variable period and the fixed period has elapsed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A8, which is characterized in that.

In the above configuration, since the stop display period includes a fixed period with a fixed length, it is possible to preferably secure the minimum required stop display period even when the length of the stop display period is variable. It becomes.

Feature A10. The stop display period has nothing to do with the first stop display period (one of the first fixed display time and the second fixed display time) set based on the establishment status of the predetermined condition and the establishment status of the predetermined condition. The second stop display period (the other of the first fixed display time and the second fixed display time) set in is included, and after one of the first stop display period and the second stop display period elapses, the said The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, wherein the first stop display period and the other of the second stop display period are started.

According to the above configuration, apart from the first stop display period whose length changes according to the fulfillment status of the predetermined condition, the second stop display period set regardless of the fulfillment status of the predetermined condition is provided. .. As a result, it is possible to make multiple adjustments by setting the second stop display period as a fixed period to secure the minimum stop display period, or by setting it as a variable period that can be set based on conditions other than the predetermined conditions. It is possible to expand the range of selection as compared with the case where the stop display period is composed of only the first stop display period. In particular, when the first stop display period starts after the lapse of the second stop display period, the stop display period can be changed even after the start of the stop display, and special information is generated during the stop display. It will be possible to deal with.

Feature A11. The stop display period setting means
The first means for setting the stop display period to the second period, and
Based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second means for changing the stop display period set in the second period by the first means to the first period, and
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, the stop display period set in the second period is subsequently changed to the first period. In this case, for example, even if there is a problem that the stop display period is not set to the second period, the setting of the first period made in advance can remain, so that it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the stop display itself cannot be executed. become.

Feature A12. A lottery means (a function of executing a winning / failing determination process by the main control device 81) that performs a lottery process based on the establishment of predetermined predetermined conditions (winning of a winning port), and
Based on the lottery processing being performed by the lottery means, the game rotation operation is started by the predetermined notification means (main display unit 43, symbol display device 41), and the notification result corresponding to the result of the lottery processing is obtained. The game turn control means (game turn control process by the main control device 81) that controls the predetermined notification means so that the game turn operation is performed with the end of the game turn operation as one game turn. Function to execute) and
With
The game time control means is characterized by including means (a function of executing a stop start process by the main control device 81) for defining a game period related to one game time of the game time in the middle of the game time. A game machine to play.

According to the above configuration, since the game period of the game time can be specified in the middle of the game time, adjustments such as lengthening or shortening the game time are in progress during the game time. Can be done. As a result, when a game effect is performed using the above game period, it is possible to allow a sudden addition or deletion of the game effect, and it is possible to increase the flexibility of the effect adjustment.

In addition, each configuration described in any one of the above-mentioned features A1 to A11 may be applied to the feature A12. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature A13. An acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for a working port by the main control device 81) to acquire special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the special information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers.
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the given information, and if a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information A grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) for sequentially performing the grant determination, and
The privilege granting means (main control device 81) capable of granting the privilege to the player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being the granting result that the special information corresponds to the granting information. (A function to execute the game state transition process) and
The game rotation operation is started based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, and the notification result corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination means is used to end the game rotation operation. As one time, the game time control means (by the main control device 81) that controls a predetermined notification means so that the game turn operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Function to execute game times control processing) and
With
The game turn control means is a means for defining the timing at which the game turn operation of the next game turn with respect to the game turn is started in the middle of the game turn (execution of the stop start time processing by the main control device 81). A gaming machine characterized by having a function to play.

According to the above configuration, since it is possible to specify the start timing of the next game round in the middle of the game round, the start timing can be delayed or advanced. As a result, when a game effect is performed using the game times, it is possible to allow a sudden addition or deletion of the game effect, and it is possible to increase the flexibility of the effect adjustment.

In addition, each configuration described in any one of the above-mentioned features A1 to A11 may be applied to the feature A13. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

The "predetermined condition" in the above feature A1 does not necessarily have to be a single condition, and may be composed of a plurality of conditions. Therefore, for example, in the case of a configuration having the first condition and the second condition as the conditions, the case where both of them are satisfied is interpreted as the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the case where at least one of them is not satisfied. Can be understood as the case where the predetermined condition is not satisfied. At that time, the case where both the first condition and the second condition are satisfied is not necessarily limited to the case where those conditions are satisfied at the same time. For example, after the first condition is satisfied, the second condition is satisfied. It may be a gradual one such that is established. Further, the fact that a specific condition is not satisfied can be interpreted as a "predetermined condition". That is, the case where the above-mentioned specific condition is not satisfied can be understood as the case where the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the case where the above-mentioned specific condition is satisfied can be understood as the case where the predetermined condition is not satisfied. This also applies to the above features A2 to A13.

Feature A14. An acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for a working port by the main control device 81) to acquire special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the acquisition means, and
Grant determination means (a function of executing the hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the grant information, and
The privilege granting means (main control device 81) capable of granting the privilege to the player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being the granting result that the special information corresponds to the granting information. (A function to execute the game state transition process) and
A pattern display means (main display unit 43) capable of variablely displaying a pattern, and
Based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, the symbol display means starts variable display of the symbol, and stops and displays the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. A display control means for performing display control (a function of executing game turn control processing by the main control device 81) and
With
At least the first control means (main control device 81) including the display control means, and
A second control means (notification / effect control device 82) that controls the game based on a command output from the first control means, and
With
The display control means
A stop display period setting means (a function of executing the stop start processing by the main control unit 81) for setting the stop display period for performing the stop display, and
A stop display execution means (a function of executing a confirmation display process by the main control device 81) that executes the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means, and
With
The first control means is characterized in that it includes means for outputting information regarding a stop display period in a predetermined command (variation command) to be output based on the variable display. Machine.

According to the above configuration, since the variable display command output based on the variable display includes information on the stop display period and is output, the dedicated command for the stop display period can be omitted. It is possible to reduce the number of commands. Further, since the command for variable display is also used as a notification command for the stop display period, it is possible to reduce the number of times the command is exchanged between the first control means and the second control means, and both of the control means can be used. It becomes possible to reduce the load of.

In the feature A14, the "predetermined command to be output based on the variable display" is changed to "a predetermined command including information on the mode of the variable display" or "prior to the variable display being performed". Alternatively, it may be read as "a predetermined command to be output based on the variable display".

Feature A15. The predetermined command includes a first information area (first information area 341) containing information on the type of the command, and a second information area (second information area 342) containing information on the variable display period. Is set,
The gaming machine according to feature A14, wherein the first control means includes means for including information on a stop display period in the second information area and outputting the information.

According to the above configuration, since the information regarding the stop display period is included in the second information area and output, it is possible to facilitate the harmony with other commands while suppressing the generation of surplus bits.

<Characteristic B group>
Feature B1. An acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for a working port by the main control device 81) to acquire special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the special information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers.
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the given information, and if a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information A grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) for sequentially performing the grant determination, and
The privilege granting means (main control device 81) capable of granting the privilege to the player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being the granting result that the special information corresponds to the granting information. (A function to execute the game state transition process) and
A pattern display means (main display unit 43, symbol display device 41) capable of variably displaying a pattern, and
Based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the symbol, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped and displayed as one of the game times. , A function of executing a display control means (a function of executing a game time control process by the main control device 81) for controlling the display of the pattern display means so that each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. )When,
The information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the determination by the grant determination means is before the predetermined special information is subject to the determination. (A function to execute confirmation processing for hold notice by the main controller 81) and the destination identification means to be specified at the timing of
With
The display control means
A stop display period setting means (a function of executing the stop start processing by the main control unit 81) for setting the stop display period for performing the stop display, and
A stop display execution means (a function of executing a confirmation display process by the main control device 81) that executes the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means, and
With
When the identification is performed by the prior identification means during the variable display or the stop display immediately after the variable display, the stop display period setting means sets the stop display period of the stop display immediately after the variable display of the prior identification means. A gaming machine characterized in that it includes means for setting based on a specific result (a function of executing a stop start processing by the main control device 81).

According to the above configuration, it is possible to correlate the determination result of the grant determination for the special information to be specified in advance with the stop display period of the game times. As a result, the length of the stop display period can be utilized as a suggestion effect of a specific result or the like, and the effect variation can be diversified. Moreover, in the above configuration, when the advance identification is performed during the game round, the stop display period of the game round is set based on the result of the prior identification, so that the content of the special information is promptly reflected in the game round. be able to. For example, in a configuration in which when the first identification is performed by the first identification means during the progress of the game time and the result is reflected in the next and subsequent game times, the specific game time that is the target of the first identification is the ongoing game time. If it is the next game round, it will be difficult to secure an opportunity to change the stop display period. In this respect, according to this configuration, since the stop display period can be changed including the ongoing game times, it is possible to stably secure the change opportunity. In particular, in a configuration in which the stop display period is used as a suggestion effect, the opportunity to execute the effect can be expanded and the interest can be improved.

In feature B1, "The stop display period setting means is the stop display period of the stop display immediately after the variable display when the identification is performed by the prior identification means during the variable display or the stop display immediately after the variable display. "Means for setting the above based on the specific result of the prior identification means", "The stop display period setting means stops the game times when the identification is performed by the prior identification means during the game rounds." It may be read as "means for setting the display period based on the specific result of the prior identification means".

Feature B2. The display control means includes a destination identification determination means (a function of executing the process of step S1203 by the main control device 81) for determining whether or not the identification result of the destination identification means is a predetermined result.
The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the stop display period setting means sets a stop display period based on a determination result of the prior identification determination means.

For example, if the configuration is such that each time the prior identification is performed by the prior identification means, it is directly reflected in the setting of the stop display period, and the prior identification is performed multiple times in one game. The display period may be forced to be set again, which may increase the processing load. In this respect, in this configuration, the first specific process and the process of determining the result are performed separately, and the stop display period is set based on the latter result. At this time, by executing the determination process in accordance with the setting timing of the stop display period, it is possible to collectively set the stop display period, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature B3. When it has been determined that the specific result of the prior identification means is a predetermined result, the determination process in the prior identification determination means and the specific result of the prior identification means in the stop display period setting means The gaming machine according to feature B2, characterized in that it includes limiting means (a function of executing the process of step S1202 by the main controller 81) that limits at least one of the stop display period setting processes based on the above.

For example, in a configuration in which a suggestion effect suggesting a specific result or the like is performed over a plurality of game times, the ongoing game time is the execution target of the suggestion effect started from the previous game times. In some cases. In such a case, if the stop display period is set based on the specific result that occurs during the game, there is a possibility that the setting may be changed or duplicated. In this regard, in this configuration, when it has been determined that the specific result of the prior identification means is a predetermined result, the determination process by the prior identification determination means and the stop display period based on the specific result of the prior identification means. Since it is configured to limit at least one of the setting processes of, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of setting changes and duplication.

Feature B4. The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein the limitation is not restricted even if the limitation is applied by the limiting means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to continue the prior identification process while limiting the determination process by the prior identification determination means in order to suppress the change or duplication of the stop display period setting. As a result, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that even other game effects using the previously specified result are restricted, and it is possible to make the configuration suitable for diversifying and compounding the effects.

Feature B5. When the specific result of the prior identification means is the first result (identification of information corresponding to a jackpot or reach occurrence), the stop display period setting means sets the stop display period to the first period (first confirmed display time). The fixed display time when set to a special time), and when the specific means is not specified during the variable display or the stop display immediately after that, or the specific result of the prior identification means is the first result. When the second result (identification of information corresponding to the normal deviation result) is different from the second period (the first confirmed display time is set to the normal time), the stop display period is different from the first period. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, which comprises means for setting a fixed display time).

According to the above configuration, the stop display period can be changed according to the content of the result specified by the prior identification means, and the length of the stop display period is utilized as a suggestion effect suggesting the prior specific result or the like. Can be realized in a practically preferable manner.

Feature B6. The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the first period is longer than the two periods.

For example, it is usually configured that the first period when the first result is the first result is shorter than the second period when the first result is not specified or the first result is not the first result. The second period, which is a typical stop display period, must be set to a longer period, which may delay the progress of the game. In this regard, in this configuration, since the first period is made longer than the second period, the restriction of the first period can be eliminated when shortening the second period, and the second period is stopped and displayed. It is possible to make the period suitable for the original purpose of the period. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress the delay in the progress of the game and to make the configuration suitable for utilizing the stop display period as a suggestion effect.

Feature B7. It is equipped with an effect control means (a function of executing a stop start process by the notification / effect control device 82) that controls the game effect to be performed by a predetermined effect means.
The effect control means controls means (processing of steps S1602 and S1603 by the notification / effect control device 82) to control so that a special effect (notice display effect for causing a bubble image to appear) is performed in the stop display period, which is the first period. The gaming machine according to feature B6, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

According to the above configuration, since the special notification is performed using the first period on the longer side, it is possible to execute the special effect after appropriately securing the effect time. Further, by configuring the special effect during the stop display period, it is possible to clearly differentiate from other effects performed during the variable display. In particular, during the stop display period, the pattern is stopped and displayed, and the grant determination result has already been displayed. Therefore, by executing the special effect during such a period, it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the pattern and effectively increase the degree of attention to the special effect. Moreover, since the special production can be performed in the ongoing game times when the advance identification is performed, it is possible to allow the addition of the special production in the middle, and it is possible to expand the production opportunities.

The "predetermined effect means" of feature B7 may be configured such that the "picture display means" also serves as the "predetermined effect means", or a means different from the "picture display means" may play a role. ..

Feature B8. It has the first pattern as the pattern,
When the game round is executed, a second symbol different from the first symbol is variably displayed in the symbol display means or a display means different from the symbol display means, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is obtained. Is provided with a second pattern display control means (a function of executing variable display control processing by the notification / effect control device 82) that controls the display of the pattern display means or the different display means so as to stop and display.
When the identification is performed by the prior identification means, the second pattern can be stopped and displayed with a stop result corresponding to the specific result of the prior identification means.
The display control means for the second pattern is
When the stop display period is set to the first period by the stop display period setting means, the second pattern that is stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display is changed to the stop result corresponding to the specific result of the prior identification means. Equipped with a changing means to change (a function to execute re-variation processing by the notification / effect control device 82)
The gaming machine according to feature B6 or B7, wherein the changing means makes the change during the stop display period, which is the first period.

According to the above configuration, the second pattern is displayed separately from the first pattern. Since this second pattern is stopped and displayed with a stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination, it is assumed that the player is paying close attention to it. On top of that, in this configuration, the second pattern can be stopped and displayed with a stop result corresponding to the first specific result, and the second picture is used to suggest a first specific specific result or the like. Has been done. Therefore, the player can easily notice the suggestion effect, and it is possible to suitably increase the expectation for the subsequent game times. Moreover, according to this configuration, when the stop display period is set to the first period, the second pattern is changed to the stop result corresponding to the previously specified result. As a result, changes in the stop result can be added in the middle, and it becomes possible to expand the production opportunities. In addition, since the above change is made in the first period, which is the longer period, the change period can be properly secured, the change cannot be made properly, and the display period of the stop result after the change cannot be secured. Such inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

In addition, the feature B8 is configured so that "when the identification is performed by the first identification means, the pattern can be stopped and displayed with a stop result corresponding to the identification result of the first identification means.
The display control means
When the stop display period is set to the first period by the stop display period setting means, the picture stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display is changed to the stop result corresponding to the specific result of the destination specific means. Equipped with a means of change
The change means may be read as "the change is made in the stop display period, which is the first period."

Feature B9. The changing means is a means (notification) in which the second pattern stopped and displayed with the end of the variable display is variably displayed again in the stop display period, and the stop result corresponding to the specific result of the destination specific means is stopped and displayed. The gaming machine according to feature B8, which is provided with a function for executing re-variation processing and stop display processing processing by the effect control device 82).

For example, if the stop result is changed instantaneously, the player may not notice the change. In this respect, according to this configuration, the revariable display makes it easier to notice the change in the stop result, and the significance of the suggestion effect by changing the second pattern can be suitably secured. In addition, by making the display revariable, it is possible to add fun to guess which stop result will be changed, and the interest will be improved.

Feature B10. The gaming machine according to feature B9, wherein the changing means includes means for variably displaying the second pattern again when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the stop display.

According to the above configuration, since the second pattern is revariably displayed after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the stop display period, it is possible to easily confirm the stop result before the revariable display. In addition, it becomes easier to recognize that the re-variable display has been made, and it becomes possible to promote the player's understanding of the production. Moreover, by providing a time reserve before the re-variable display, it is possible to arouse the expectation for the re-variable display and improve the interest.

Feature B11. The display control means for the second pattern is
The first changing means as the changing means and
When the stop display period is set to the second period by the stop display period setting means, the second pattern that is stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display is changed to a stop result different from the stop result that is stopped and displayed. With a second change means to change,
The game according to any one of features B6 to B10, wherein the second changing means includes means for starting the change before the start of the stop display in which the stop display period is the second period. Machine.

According to the above configuration, since the second pattern can be changed even when the stop display period is the second period, the frequency of changing the second pattern can be increased. As a result, it is possible to reduce the discomfort of the player when the second pattern is changed, and to prevent the player from having an excessive sense of expectation due to misunderstanding as a special effect. However, since the second period is shorter than the first period, there is a concern that it will be difficult to secure the change period. In this respect, in this configuration, when the second pattern is changed in the situation where the stop display period is the second period, the change of the second pattern is started before the start of the stop display, as compared with the case of the first period. It is said to be configured to move forward. Therefore, it is possible to properly secure the change period, and it is possible to suppress inconveniences such as the change cannot be properly performed and the display period of the stop result after the change cannot be properly secured.

Feature B12. The display control means has any one of features B8 to B11 characterized in that the display control means includes means for maintaining the stop display result of the first symbol even if the stop result of the second symbol is changed by the change means. The described gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, even when the stop result of the second symbol is changed, it is possible to recognize that the stop display state is in the first symbol, and the function and significance of the stop display can be guaranteed. It will be possible.

When any of the above features B9 to B12 is applied to the above-mentioned feature B8 that has been replaced, "second pattern"-> "picture" and "second picture display control means" in each of the above features B9 to B12. → Each reading of "display control means" can be performed.

Feature B13. As the first period, a type 1 period and a type 2 period having different lengths can be set.
The first type period is defined as the first period depending on whether the specific result of the prior specifying means is the first predetermined result or the specific result is a second predetermined result different from the first predetermined result. The gaming machine according to any one of features B5 to B12, wherein at least one of the probability to be set and the probability to set the second type period are different.

According to the above configuration, the length of the first period may be different depending on whether the specific result of the prior specifying means is the first predetermined result or the specific result is the second predetermined result. As a result, when the stop display period of the first period is executed, it is possible to give the enjoyment of guessing the specific content from the length of the stop display period, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Feature B14. An acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for a working port by the main control device 81) to acquire special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the special information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers.
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the given information, and if a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information A grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) for sequentially performing the grant determination, and
The privilege granting means (main control device 81) capable of granting the privilege to the player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being the granting result that the special information corresponds to the granting information. (A function to execute the game state transition process) and
A pattern display means (main display unit 43, symbol display device 41) capable of variably displaying a pattern, and
Based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the symbol, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped and displayed as one of the game times. , A function of executing a display control means (a function of executing a game time control process by the main control device 81) for controlling the display of the pattern display means so that each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. )When,
The information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the determination by the grant determination means is before the predetermined special information is subject to the determination. (A function to execute confirmation processing for hold notice by the main controller 81) and the destination identification means to be specified at the timing of
With
The display control means
A stop display period setting means (a function of executing the stop start processing by the main control unit 81) for setting the stop display period for performing the stop display, and
A stop display execution means (a function of executing a confirmation display process by the main control device 81) that executes the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means, and
Prepare
The stop display period setting means includes means for setting the stop display period of the stop display based on the specific result of the prior identification means (a function of executing the stop start processing by the main control device 81). A featured gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, the same effect as that of the above feature B1 can be expected. In addition, each configuration described in any one of the above-mentioned features B1 to B13 may be applied to the feature B14. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Characteristic C group>
Feature C1. An acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for a working port by the main control device 81) to acquire special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the special information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers.
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the given information, and if a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information A grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) for sequentially performing the grant determination, and
The privilege granting means (main control device 81) capable of granting the privilege to the player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being the granting result that the special information corresponds to the granting information. (A function to execute the game state transition process) and
A pattern display means (main display unit 43, symbol display device 41) capable of variably displaying a pattern, and
Based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the symbol, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped and displayed as one of the game times. , A function of executing a display control means (a function of executing a game time control process by the main control device 81) for controlling the display of the pattern display means so that each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. )When,
With
The display control means
A stop display period setting means (a function of executing the stop start processing by the main control unit 81) for setting the stop display period for performing the stop display, and
A stop display execution means (a function of executing a confirmation display process by the main control device 81) that executes the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means, and
With
The stop display period setting means
The grasping means (processes S1208 to S1211 by the main control device 81) for grasping the number of game times performed before the execution of the specific game time corresponding to the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is executed. Function) and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a stop display setting means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1211 to S1218 by the main control device 81) for setting a stop display period based on the grasping result of the grasping means. ..

According to the above configuration, the length of the stop display period can be set in consideration of the number of game times performed before the execution of the specific game time. As a result, for example, when a specific effect is performed during the stop display period of each game that is executed before the specific game, the number of executions is suppressed to increase depending on the number of stored special information. Will be done.

In addition, in feature C1, "a grasping means for grasping the number of game times performed before the execution of a specific game time corresponding to a predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means" is set as a "stop display period setting target". It may be read as "a grasping means for grasping the number of the target game times from the specific game times corresponding to the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means".

Feature C2. The information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the determination by the grant determination means is before the predetermined special information is subject to the determination. Equipped with a destination identification means (a function of executing confirmation processing for holding notice by the main control device 81) to be specified at the timing of
The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the stop display setting means includes means for setting a stop display period based on a specific result of the prior identification means and a grasp result of the grasping means.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to correlate the result of the grant determination corresponding to the special information to be specified in advance with the stop display period of the game times. As a result, the length of the stop display period can be utilized as a suggestion effect of a specific result or the like, and the effect variation can be diversified.

On the other hand, in the above configuration, a plurality of special information can be stored, and the pre-identification of the pre-identification means may be performed in a situation where the number of stored special information is large. In such a case, the specific game times targeted for the destination will be executed with a large delay from the timing of the destination identification by the destination identification means. In such a case, if the configuration is such that the first specific result is immediately reflected in the stop display period of the game times, the number of other game times intervening until the specific game times increases, and as a result, a suggestion effect for which game times is produced. It becomes difficult for the player to grasp what is happening, which may cause confusion for the player. Further, for example, in a configuration in which the stop display period is set as a special period until immediately before the execution of the specific game times when the advance is specified by the first identification means, the number of repetitions depends on the number of stored special information. It is expected that the number will increase and the player will misunderstand the intention of the production. In this respect, in this configuration, the stop display period is set based on the number of the target game times for which the stop display period is set, which is the number of the target game times retroactive from the specific game times. As a result, in addition to being able to adjust the number of intervening game times between the time when the stop display period is set to the special period and the time when the specific game times are executed, the stop display depends on the number of stored special information. The occurrence of inconveniences such as a large number of repetitions in which the period is a special period is also suppressed. As a result, the function as a suggestion effect during the stop display period can be suitably exhibited, and the interest can be improved.

Feature C3. The grasping means
A storage number grasping means (step S1301 by the main control device 81) for grasping the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means when the special information to be specified by the prior identification means is stored in the acquired information storage means. (Function to execute the processing of) and
2. The feature C2 is characterized in that it includes means for grasping the number of times based on the grasping result of the storage number grasping means (a function of executing the processing of steps S1208 and S1209 by the main control device 81). Amusement machine.

For example, if another special information that follows the special information that is previously specified is stored in the acquired information storage means, the subsequent special information may be included in the calculation target and the number of game times may not be properly grasped. There is. In this regard, in this configuration, since the number of stored special information when the previously specified special information is stored is grasped and the number of game times is grasped based on the result, the influence of the subsequent special information can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature C4. When the number of times grasped by the grasping means is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times, the stop display setting means sets the stop display period to a first period corresponding to the specific result of the prior identification means being a predetermined result ( The fixed display time when the first fixed display time is set to a special time), and when the number of times grasped by the grasping means is larger than the predetermined number of times, the stop display period is different from the first period. The gaming machine according to feature C2 or C3, which comprises means for setting two periods (a fixed display time when the first fixed display time is set to a normal time).

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the number of stored special information is large, the stop display period can be set as the first period only for the game times that are relatively close to the specific game times. As a result, when the length of the stop display period is used as a suggestion effect for a specific result, etc., the length of the stop display period and the specific game times can be easily associated with each other among the players, and the function as a suggestion effect. Can be suitably exhibited.

When the feature C4 is applied to the feature C2, "The stop display setting means determines the stop display period when the grasp result of the grasp means is the first result, and the specific result of the prior identification means is a predetermined result. A means for setting the stop display period to a second period different from the first period when the grasping result of the grasping means is a second result different from the first result. It may be read as "I have."

Feature C5. The stop display period setting means sets the stop display period to the first period based on the number of memories grasped by the storage number grasping means and the predetermined number of times when the identification is performed by the prior identification means. It is provided with a waiting number setting means (a function of executing the process of step S1209 by the main control device 81) for setting the waiting number of times (waiting number counter WC) for waiting for the process to be set.
The gaming machine according to feature C4, wherein the stop display setting means sets a stop display period based on the number of waits when the number of waits is set by the means for setting the number of waits.

According to the above configuration, once the waiting number is set, the stop display period can be set by managing the waiting number thereafter. Therefore, it is not necessary to compare the number of stored items with the predetermined number of times each time the stop display period is set, and to determine which period to set the stop display period based on the result, which is a processing load. Can be reduced.

Feature C6. When the stop display period is set to the first period in the target game times for which the stop display period is set, the stop display period setting means may perform the stop display period in a plurality of game times including the target game times. C4 or C5.

Since the original purpose of the stop display is to show the result of the grant determination to the player, if the stop display period is extremely long, it is easy for the player to get the impression that the player is delayed, and conversely, if it is extremely short, the player However, it becomes difficult to recognize the judgment result. Therefore, the difference between the first period and the second period tends to be limited, and there is a concern that the player may not notice or overlook even if the stop display period is set as the first period. In this regard, according to this configuration, when the stop display period is set as the first period in the target game times, the stop display period is also set as the first period in the subsequent game times. Therefore, even if an oversight occurs in the first game round, it can be noticed in the later game round, and the function as a suggestion effect can be suitably exhibited.

Feature C7. The configuration is such that the first number of games and the second number of games, which are different from each other, can be set as the plurality of game times.
The first number of times as the plurality of game times, depending on the case where the specific result of the prior identification means is the first predetermined result and the case where the specific result is a second predetermined result different from the first predetermined result. The gaming machine according to feature C6, wherein at least one of the probability of setting the game times and the probability of setting the second game times is different.

According to the above configuration, the number of game times in which the stop display period is the first period is determined depending on whether the specific result of the prior identification means is the first predetermined result or the specific result is the second predetermined result. Can be different. As a result, it is possible to give the pleasure of guessing the specific content from the number of executions in the first period, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Feature C8. The plurality of game times is a predetermined number of game times (set number of times AN).
When the identification is performed by the prior identification means, the stop display period setting means actually sets the stop display period based on the number of memories grasped by the storage number grasping means and the specific number of times. The game according to feature C6 or C7, which is provided with an execution number setting means (a function of executing a process of grasping the execution number DN of a special period setting by the main control device 81) for setting the number of executions as a period. Machine.

The number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means varies each time, but in this configuration, the number of executions with the stop display period as the first period is actually set based on the magnitude relationship between the number of storage and the specific number of times. Will be done. Therefore, the stop display period can be set as the first period within the range of the number of memories each time, and the suggestion effect can be appropriately performed.

Feature C9. Described in any one of features C6 to C8, wherein the execution number setting means includes means for setting the execution number so that the stop display period of the specific game times does not become the first period. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, it is suppressed that the stop display period is continuously set as the first period even though the variable display of the specific game times is completed. As a result, it is possible to make it easy to understand which game time the target of the suggestion effect is, and it is possible to preferably exert the function as the suggestion effect.

Feature C10. When the number of storages grasped by the storage number grasping means is equal to or greater than the specific number of times, the execution number setting means sets the specific number of times as the number of executions with the stop display period as the first period, and the storage number setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C6 to C9, which comprises means for setting a number of times less than the specific number of times as the number of times of execution when the number is less than the specific number of times.

According to the above configuration, a different number of executions is set depending on whether the number of stored items is equal to or greater than the specified number of times or less than the specified number of times. Therefore, even in the latter case, the stop display period can be set as the first period. , It becomes possible to expand the execution opportunity of the suggestion production.

Feature C11. When the number of storages grasped by the storage number grasping means is equal to or greater than the specific number of times, the execution number setting means sets the specific number of times as the number of executions with the stop display period as the first period, and the storage number setting means. The game according to any one of features C6 to C9, which comprises means for limiting the setting of the first period when the number of stored memories grasped by the number grasping means is less than the specific number of times. Machine.

According to the above configuration, since the setting of the first period is restricted when the number of memories is less than the specific number of times, it is suppressed that the change of the stop display period extends to the stop display of the specific game times. NS. As a result, it is suppressed that it becomes difficult to understand which game time the target of the suggestion effect is, and the function as the suggestion effect can be suitably exhibited.

Feature C12. When the identification is performed by the prior identification means during the variable display or the stop display immediately after the variable display, the stop display setting means sets the stop display period of the stop display immediately after the variable display of the prior identification means. The gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C11, which comprises means for setting based on a specific result (a function of executing a stop start processing by the main control device 81).

According to the above configuration, when the advance identification is performed, the stop display period of the game times in progress is set based on the result of the advance identification, so that the content of the special information can be promptly reflected in the game times. .. As a result, it is possible to set the first period including the stop display period of the ongoing game times, and it is possible to expand the execution opportunity of the suggestion effect.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. An acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for a working port by the main control device 81) to acquire special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the special information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers.
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the given information, and if a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information A grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) for sequentially performing the grant determination, and
The privilege granting means (main control device 81) capable of granting the privilege to the player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being the granting result that the special information corresponds to the granting information. (A function to execute the game state transition process) and
A pattern display means (main display unit 43, symbol display device 41) capable of variably displaying a pattern, and
Based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the symbol, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped and displayed as one of the game times. , A function of executing a display control means (a function of executing a game time control process by the main control device 81) for controlling the display of the pattern display means so that each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. )When,
With
The display control means
A stop display period setting means (a function of executing the stop start processing by the main control unit 81) for setting the stop display period for performing the stop display, and
A stop display execution means (a function of executing a confirmation display process by the main control device 81) that executes the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means, and
With
When the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means changes during the variable display or the stop display immediately after the variable display, the stop display period setting means changes the stop display period of the stop display immediately after the change. A gaming machine comprising means for performing (a function of executing the processing of steps S1216 to S1218 by the main control device 81).

According to the above configuration, since the stop display period is changed when the number of stored special information changes, the number of stored special information and the length of the stopped display period can be correlated. As a result, for example, when the number of stored special information is large, the stop display period is shortened to advance the start timing of the next game round, or conversely, when the number of stored special information is small, the stop display period. By lengthening, it is possible to make adjustments such as making it difficult for the special information of the acquired information storage means to run out. Moreover, in this configuration, when special information is stored, the stop display period of the ongoing game times can be changed. Therefore, the change in the number of stored special information can be promptly reflected in the stop display period. As a result, especially when the stop display period is shortened, the responsiveness can be improved as compared with the configuration in which the time is adjusted after waiting for the next game round, and more efficient game progress is promoted. Will be possible.

Feature D2. When the number of stored items is less than a predetermined number (K = 3), the stop display period setting means sets the stop display period to the first period (the fixed display time when the first fixed display time is set to the normal time). When the number of stored items is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the stop display period is set as the second period (the definite display time when the first definite display time is set to the time saving time), which is shorter than the first period. The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the main controller 81 includes a function of executing the processes of steps S1216 to S1218).

According to the above configuration, when the number of stored special information is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the stop display period is set to the second period on the shorter side. Therefore, one game is played compared to the case where the stop display period is the first period. The game period related to the above can be shortened. As a result, efficient game progress can be promoted, and playability can be improved.

Feature D3. The display control means
A variable display period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting a variable display period for performing the variable display, and
A means for executing the variable display based on the variable display period set by the variable display period setting means (a function of executing a game rotation control process by the main control device 81) is provided.
The variable display period setting means sets the variable display period as the first type period when the number of stored items is less than the specific number, and sets the variable display period from the first type period when the number of stored items is equal to or more than the specified number. The gaming machine according to feature D2, characterized in that it is provided with means for a short second-class period.

According to the above configuration, when the number of stored special information is equal to or more than a specific number, the variable display period is set to the second period on the shorter side. The game period can be shortened. As a result, it becomes possible to realize a smoother game progress as compared with the case where only one of these periods is shortened. In particular, under the configuration in which the stop display period of the game in progress can be set based on the number of stored special information when the special information is stored, the stop display period is shortened prior to the shortening of the variable display period. can do. As a result, shortening can be started quickly, and further efficiency improvement can be promoted.

Feature D4. The gaming machine according to feature D3, wherein the predetermined number and the specific number are the same number.

According to the above configuration, when the period is shortened by the variable display, the period of the stop display before and after that can be shortened, and the shortening of each period of the variable display and the stop display can be preferably harmonized. Will be possible.

Feature D5. The display control means executes the process of step S1216 by the storage number grasping means (main control device 81) for grasping the number of stored special information at the timing corresponding to the setting timing of the stop display period in the stop display period setting means. Function)
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein the stop display period setting means sets the stop display period based on the grasping result of the storage number grasping means.

For example, if the number of stored special information is reflected in the setting of the stop display period each time the special information is stored, the special information is stopped when the special information is stored multiple times during the progress of the game. You may be forced to reset the display period setting. In this regard, in this configuration, since the stop display period can be set based on the number of memories at the set timing of the stop display period, re-setting is suppressed even if multiple memories occur, and the processing load is reduced. Becomes possible.

Feature D6. The stop display period setting means sets the stop display period as the first predetermined period when the number of stored items is larger than a predetermined reference number, and sets the stop display period as the first predetermined period when the number of stored items is equal to or less than the reference number. (1) The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, which comprises means for setting a second predetermined period longer than a predetermined period.

According to the above configuration, when the number of stored special information is less than or equal to the reference number, the stop display period is set to the second predetermined period on the longer side. The game period related to the game times can be lengthened. As a result, the special information of the acquired information storage means is hard to run out, and it becomes possible to suppress the interruption of the game progress.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. An acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for a working port by the main control device 81) to acquire special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the special information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers.
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the given information, and if a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information A grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) for sequentially performing the grant determination, and
The privilege granting means (main control device 81) capable of granting the privilege to the player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being the granting result that the special information corresponds to the granting information. (A function to execute the game state transition process) and
A pattern display means (main display unit 43, symbol display device 41) capable of variably displaying a pattern, and
Based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the symbol, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped and displayed as one of the game times. , A function of executing a display control means (a function of executing a game time control process by the main control device 81) for controlling the display of the pattern display means so that each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. )When,
The information corresponding to the determination result when the predetermined special information stored in the acquired information storage means is subject to the determination by the grant determination means is before the predetermined special information is subject to the determination. (A function to execute confirmation processing for hold notice by the main controller 81) and the destination identification means to be specified at the timing of
With
The display control means
A variable display period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) for setting a variable display period for performing the variable display, and
A means for executing the variable display based on the variable display period set by the variable display period setting means (a function of executing the game turn control process by the main control device 81) and
A stop display period setting means (a function of executing the stop start processing by the main control unit 81) for setting the stop display period for performing the stop display, and
A means for executing the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means (a function of executing a confirmation display process by the main control device 81) and
With
The variable display period setting means includes means for setting a variable display period based on the specific result of the prior identification means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2904 to S2917 by the main control device 81).
The stop display period setting means is characterized by including means for setting a stop display period based on the specific result of the prior identification means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2504 to S2518 by the main control device 81). A game machine to play.

According to the above configuration, since the means for setting the variable display period and the stop display period based on the information specified by the prior identification means is provided, the gaming period related to one game time is provided according to the specific result of the prior identification means. Can be changed. As a result, the length of the game period related to one game can be utilized as a suggestion effect such as the above-mentioned determination result, and the effect variation can be diversified.

Feature E2. When the identification is performed by the prior identification means during the variable display or the stop display immediately after the variable display, the stop display period setting means sets the stop display period of the stop display immediately after the variable display of the prior identification means. The gaming machine according to feature E1, characterized in that it includes means for setting based on a specific result (a function of executing a stop start processing by the main control device 81).

According to the above configuration, when the advance identification is performed, the stop display period of the game times in progress is set based on the result of the advance identification, so that the content of the special information can be promptly reflected in the game times. .. As a result, even if the game time that is the target of the prior identification is the game time that is performed after the game time that is in progress, it is possible to secure an opportunity to change the stop display period, and to execute the suggestion effect. It will be possible to expand.

Feature E3. The display control means
At the first timing, which is after the start of the variable display and before the start of the stop display immediately after the variable display, the first destination for determining whether or not the specific result of the destination specifying means is a predetermined result. Identification means (a function of executing the process of step S2504 by the main control device 81) and
At the second timing, which is after the start of the stop display immediately after the start and before the start of the variable display immediately after the stop display, it is determined whether or not the specific result of the prior identification means is a predetermined result. 2 Destination identification determination means (function to execute the process of step S2904 by the main controller 81) and
With
The stop display period setting means includes means for setting the stop display period based on the determination result of the first destination identification determination means (a function of executing the stop start processing by the main control device 81).
The variable display period setting means has a function of executing a means for setting a variable display period based on a determination result of the second destination identification determination unit (a function of executing a variable display time setting process for complete disconnection by the main control device 81). )When,
The gaming machine according to the feature E1 or E2, which comprises the above-mentioned feature E1 or E2.

According to the above configuration, the variable display period and the stop display are performed regardless of whether the first specific result is the predetermined result during the stop display or the first specific result is the predetermined result during the variable display. It is possible to start changing the period as soon as possible and expand the opportunities for changing the period.

Feature E4. The game according to feature E3, wherein the first timing corresponds to the start timing of the stop display immediately after the first timing, and the second timing corresponds to the start timing of the variable display immediately after the first timing. Machine.

According to the above configuration, in the first destination identification determination means, the determination process is performed according to the start timing of the stop display, that is, the setting timing of the stop display period, so that the destination identification that occurs by the start of the stop display The result can be reflected in the stop display period of the stop display. Further, in the second destination identification determination means, the determination process is performed according to the start timing of the variable display, that is, the setting timing of the variable display period. It can be reflected in the variable display period of the display. That is, no matter which timing during the game round, the prior identification can be promptly reflected in the stop display period and the variable display period, and the change opportunity can be further expanded.

Feature E5. The display control means
First, it is determined whether or not the specific result of the prior identification means is a predetermined result at any timing after the start of the variable display and before the start of the stop display immediately after the variable display. The destination identification determination means (function of executing the process of step S2504 by the main control device 81) and
It is determined whether or not the specific result of the prior identification means is a predetermined result at any timing after the start of the stop display immediately after the start and before the start of the variable display immediately after the stop display. A second destination identification determination means (a function of executing the process of step S2904 by the main controller 81) and
Priority means (processing of steps S2502 and S2902 by the main control device 81) in which one of the determination result of the first destination identification determination means and the determination result of the second destination identification determination means is prioritized over the other is executed. Function) and
With
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein the stop display period setting means and the variable display period setting means set each period based on a determination result on the side prioritized by the priority means.

According to the above configuration, since the first-first identification determination means and the second first-identification determination means are provided, the first-specific result is obtained when the first-specific result becomes a predetermined result during the stop display and during the variable display. In any case where the predetermined result is obtained, the change of the variable display period and the stop display period can be started as soon as possible, and the opportunity for changing the period can be expanded. On the other hand, when the above two determination means having different determination timings are provided, if the first determination is made between the determination of one determination and the determination of the other, the determination results conflict and the period is set. May lead to duplication or change in the middle. In this respect, in this configuration, since each period is set based on the determination result of the side prioritized by the priority means, the determination result can be unified, and duplication of period setting and intermediate change are preferably suppressed. Will be possible.

It is possible to apply the configuration of the above feature E4 to the feature E5. In this case, a further effect can be obtained by applying the configuration of the feature E4.

Feature E6. The priority means determines the determination means on the side of the first-first identification determination means and the second first-identification determination means that first determines that the specific result of the first identification means is a predetermined result. The gaming machine according to feature E5, which is characterized in that the result is prioritized.

According to the above configuration, it can be a practically preferable mode for unifying the determination results. In particular, if the configuration gives priority to the determination result of the determination means on the side that later determines that the specific result is a predetermined result, it is necessary to wait for the later determination result, so that the setting of the period is likely to be delayed. In this configuration, the occurrence of such a delay is suppressed, and the variable display period and the stop display period can be changed from an early stage.

Feature E7. The variable display period setting means has a first period (8.0 sec) and a second period (1.0 sec) shorter than the first period as a variable display period that can be set.
The stop display period setting means has a first predetermined period (0.7 sec) and a second predetermined period (2.0 sec) longer than the first predetermined period as a stop display period that can be set.
The variable display period setting means includes means for setting the variable display period to the second period when the specific result of the prior identification means is a predetermined result.
Any of the features E1 to E6, wherein the stop display period setting means includes means for setting the stop display period to the second predetermined period when the specific result of the prior identification means is a predetermined result. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the above configuration, when the predetermined result is a predetermined result, the stop display period is lengthened while the variable display period is shortened, so that the proportion of the stop display in one game can be increased. .. This makes it possible to enhance the presence of the stop display and increase the degree of attention to the suggestion effect.

Feature E8. The gaming machine according to feature E7, characterized in that the second predetermined period is provided with means for making the second predetermined period longer than the second period.

Normally, the stop display period is extremely short compared to the variable display period, but by making an extreme change that reverses the long-short relationship between the stop display period and the variable display period, the player feels a great deal of discomfort. Can be given. As a result, the player can easily notice the suggestion effect, and it becomes possible to suitably increase the expectation for the subsequent game times.

Feature E9. The feature E7 or E8, wherein the total period of the second period and the second predetermined period is shorter than the total period of the first period and the first predetermined period. Pachinko machine.

It is assumed that the player's interest will be more likely to be directed to the specific game times corresponding to the special information specified in advance. However, according to the above configuration, the time required until the specific game times can be shortened. As a result, the player can play the specific game times as soon as possible, and the interest can be improved.

Feature E10. The variable display period setting means sets the variable display period of the game times performed before the specific game times corresponding to the predetermined special information based on the specific result of the prior specific means.
Any one of the features E1 to E9, wherein the stop display period setting means sets the stop display period of the game times performed before the specific game times based on the specific result of the prior specific means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, there is a difference in each period of the variable display and the stop display performed before the specific game times according to the specific result of the prior specific means, so that the suggestion effect using the prior specific result is performed. The above can be a practically preferable embodiment.

<Characteristic F group>
Features F1. The first lottery means (the hit / fail determination process for the special drawing by the main control device 81) that performs the first lottery based on the establishment of the predetermined first condition (the winning of the game ball to the operating ports 33a and 33b) is performed. Function to execute) and
Based on the fact that the first lottery is performed by the first lottery means, the predetermined display means (main display unit 43, symbol display device 41) starts variable display of the pattern, and corresponds to the result of the first lottery. The first display control means (a function of executing the game time control process by the main control device 81) that controls the display of the predetermined display means, and the stop display of the stop result as one time of the first game time.
A second lottery means for performing a second lottery different from the first lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition (a winning of a game ball to the through gate 35) different from the first condition (a second lottery means). A function that executes the pass / fail judgment process for a normal drawing by the main controller 81) and
Based on the fact that the second lottery is performed by the second lottery means, the pattern is variable in the predetermined display means or a display means different from the predetermined display means (design display device 41, accessory display unit 44). A second display control that controls the display of the predetermined display means or the different display means, with the display being started and the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery being stopped and displayed as one of the second game times. Means (a function of executing the normal game time control process by the main control device 81) and
With
As a gaming state, it has a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state (low frequency support mode) and a second gaming state (high frequency support mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. ,
A game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) for shifting the game state to any of the plurality of game states based on the lottery result of the first lottery is provided.
The second display control means
The stop display period setting means for setting the stop display period for performing the stop display (a function of executing the setting process of the normal figure confirmation display time by the main control device 81) and
A means for executing the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means (a function of executing the normal game time control process by the main control device 81), and
With
The stop display period setting means is a means for setting a stop display period (main control) so that the stop display period in the first gaming state is longer than the stop display period in the second gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having (a function of executing a function of executing a setting process of a fixed display time of a normal figure) by the device 81.

Under the second gaming state, which is advantageous to the player, the player is expected to continue the game until the end of the gaming state, but under the first gaming state, which is disadvantageous to the player, the first lottery is entered. It is conceivable that the player will try to round up the game when the corresponding first game round is completed. However, in the configuration in which the first game round and the second game round corresponding to the second lottery coexist, the second game round may remain in an unfinished state at the end of the first game round. In such a case, the result of the second lottery may be anxious and the player may not be able to finish the game, or the game may be finished while leaving a favorable result for the player. In this respect, in this configuration, the stop display period related to the second game in the first game state is longer than that in the second game state. In this case, in the first game state, the period of the variable display of the second game can be shortened by the length of the stop display period of the second game. Therefore, the time required for the stop result to be displayed can be shortened, and the result of the second lottery can be notified to the player as soon as possible. As a result, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience is preferably suppressed, and the playability is improved.

Feature F2. The feature F1 is characterized in that the other of the first game and the second game can be executed during the execution of one of the first game and the second game. Amusement machine.

In the configuration in which one of the first and second game times can be executed while the other can be executed, the stop display period related to the second game time is lengthened, so that the second game time is not yet performed at the end of the first game time. Even when it is finished, it is possible to increase the probability that the pattern of the second game is in the stopped display state. When the symbol of the second game is in the stopped display state, the result of the second lottery can be immediately grasped by visually recognizing the symbol, but the probability is increased, so that the frequency of occurrence of the result waiting event itself is reduced. This makes it easier to promptly inform the result of the second lottery.

Feature F3. The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein the second gaming state is a state in which the execution frequency of the second gaming times per unit time is more likely to be higher than that of the first gaming state.

In the first game state, it is required that the execution frequency of the second game times per unit time is lower than that in the second game state. Under such restrictions, by making the stop display period of the second game in the first game state longer than that in the second game state, the execution frequency of the second game per unit time in the first game state It is possible to shorten the period of the variable display of the second game while suppressing the increase in the number of games. As a result, it is possible to promptly notify the player of the result of the second lottery while suppressing the function of the first game state from being impaired.

Feature F4. A launching means (game ball launch mechanism 53) capable of launching a game ball based on a predetermined launch operation, and
A ball entry portion (lower operating port 33b) into which a game ball launched by the launching means can enter, and
A first state (open state) in which a game ball can or is easily entered into the ball entry portion, and a second state in which the game ball cannot enter the ball entry portion or is more difficult to enter than the first state. (Closed state), variable ball entry means (electric accessory 34) that can be switched to, and
A variable control means (main control device 81) that performs switching control for switching the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state based on the result of the second lottery by the second lottery means becoming a predetermined result. (Function to execute processing for electric service support) and
A privilege granting means (a function of executing a game state transition process by the main control device 81) capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the first lottery being a specific result, and
With
The gaming machine according to feature F3, wherein the first lottery means includes means for performing the first lottery based on the entry of a gaming ball into the entry portion.

According to the above configuration, during the game, the player pays more attention to the first game (first lottery) on the side that is strongly linked to the privilege grant, and to the second game (second lottery). Interest is expected to be lower than in the first game. Therefore, even if the stop display period of the second game is extended, it becomes less noticeable during the game, and the induction of a feeling of extension can be suppressed. In this way, in the configuration in which a plurality of lottery systems of the first and second lottery coexist, by lengthening the stop display period of the pattern related to the lottery system on the side where the player is less interested, the feeling of extension during the game can be achieved. It is possible to promptly notify the result of the second lottery when the first game round is completed, while suppressing the hindrance of the game motivation.

Feature F5. As the stop display period that can be set in the first game state, there are a plurality of periods (4.0 sec, 10.0 sec, 16.0 sec) having different lengths.
The stop display period setting means is a means (mainly) for selecting one of the plurality of periods and setting it as the stop display period based on the result of the second lottery being a predetermined result in the first gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature F4, which comprises a function of executing the processing of steps S3702 to S3704 by the control device 81).

Due to the configuration of lengthening the stop display period of the second game, the grace period from when the player grasps the result of the second lottery until the variable ball entry means is set to the first state tends to be long. As a result, when it is grasped that the variable ball entry means is switched to the first state without the intention of ending the game, the so-called stop hitting in which the game ball is launched at the timing of switching to the first state is induced. I am concerned. In this respect, according to this configuration, since the stop display period of the second game round is diversified, it is suppressed that the period until the second variable ball entry means is switched to the first state is not uniform. NS. This makes it difficult for the player to predict the timing of switching to the first state, and it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience.

Feature F6. Notification control means (notification / effect control device 82, display control device 212) that controls so that specific notification (special display effect) corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control is performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41). )
The notification control means provides the predetermined notification means so that when the variable ball entry means is switched from the second state to the first state, the specific notification is performed before switching to the first state. Equipped with specific notification means to control
The specific notification means is
When the length of the stop display period related to the second game round is equal to or longer than the predetermined length, the specific notification is started during the stop display of the pattern related to the second game round, and the length is less than the predetermined length. In this case, a timing setting means for setting the start timing of the specific notification so that the specific notification is started before the start of the stop display of the pattern related to the second game round, and
A means for starting the specific notification based on the start timing set by the timing setting means, and a means for starting the specific notification.
The gaming machine according to the feature F5, which is characterized by the above.

According to the above configuration, when the specific notification is performed by utilizing the stop display period, it is possible to appropriately secure the time for the specific effect even when the stop display period is variable.

Feature F7. Notification control means (notification / effect control device 82, display control device 212) that controls so that specific notification (special display effect) corresponding to the execution mode of the switching control is performed by a predetermined notification means (symbol display device 41). )
The notification control means provides the predetermined notification means so that when the variable ball entry means is switched from the second state to the first state, the specific notification is performed before switching to the first state. Equipped with specific notification means to control
The specific notification means is specified so that there are cases where the specific notification is executed in the first execution period and cases where the specific notification is executed in a second execution period different from the first execution period. The gaming machine according to feature F5, which comprises means for setting an execution mode of notification.

If the execution period of the specific notification is standardized, it may be possible to predict the switching timing from the start timing of the specific notification to the first state. In this regard, according to this configuration, since the execution period of the specific notification is diversified, it is difficult to predict the switching timing to the first state based on the start timing of the specific notification, so that the so-called stoppage is achieved. It becomes possible to suppress.

Feature F8. The feature F7 is characterized in that the notification mode of the specific notification is common between the case where the specific notification is performed in the first execution period and the case where the specific notification is performed in the second execution period. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, it is difficult to determine the execution period of the specific notification from the notification mode of the specific notification. This makes it difficult to predict the timing of switching from the start timing of the specific notification to the first state, and it is possible to suppress the so-called stoppage.

In the feature F8, "the notification mode of the specific notification is common" may be read as "the notification mode of the specific notification is difficult to identify or cannot be identified". Even in this case, the same effect as in the above case can be obtained.

Feature F9. As the gaming state, there are a first gaming state (low frequency support mode) and a second gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the variable ball entry means is more likely to be the first state than the first gaming state. And
As the mode of the first state in the variable ball entering means, a first aspect (low winning support state) and a second aspect (first high) in which a game ball is easier to enter the ball entry portion than the first aspect. Winning support status), and has
The variable control means includes means for performing the switching control so that the mode of the first state becomes the second mode based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.
The gaming machine according to any one of features F5 to F8, wherein the predetermined condition is configured to be feasible in the first gaming state.

According to the above configuration, in the second gaming state, which is likely to be the first state, the control state (referred to as the support state for convenience) of the variable ball entering means with one or a plurality of switching controls as one set is at short intervals. Since it is easy to repeat, even if one support state is missed, the player's psychology that the next support state should be supplemented is easy to work. On the other hand, in the first gaming state, which is unlikely to be the first state, the period from the end of the support state to the occurrence of the next support state tends to be long, and it is difficult to expect the next occurrence itself in the first place. Therefore, under the first gaming state, there is a strong need to effectively utilize the opportunity of switching control according to the second aspect. In this respect, in this configuration, by providing the feature of the feature F1 through the feature F5, it is possible to suppress the end of the game while leaving an opportunity to be switched and controlled by the second aspect, and the needs of the player. It can be configured to be suitable for.

Feature F10. The stop display period setting means is characterized by comprising means for setting the stop display period so that the stop display period related to the second game round is longer than the stop display period related to the first game round. The gaming machine according to any one of F1 to F9.

According to the above configuration, the period of the variable display related to the second game can be shortened by the amount of the lengthened stop display period related to the second game. As a result, when the player shifts his / her line of sight to the second game while watching the first game, it becomes easier to quickly grasp the result of the second lottery. As a result, the time required to return the line of sight to the first game round is shortened, and the occurrence of inconveniences such as the stop result of the first game round and the game effect during the first game round are suppressed. On the other hand, since the stop display period of the first game is shortened, it is suppressed that the player gives an extended impression while visually recognizing the first game, and the motivation for the game is hindered. Is suppressed.

When the feature F10 is applied to the feature F2, "when the player shifts his / her line of sight from the first game to the second game during the game, the pattern of the second game is stopped and displayed. This can increase the frequency with which the line of sight can be quickly returned to the first game round, and more preferably suppresses the stop result of the first game round and the oversight of the game effect during the first game round. The effect of being able to do it is expected.

Features F11. A means for initiating the other stop display of the first game and the second game is provided based on the start of the stop display in one of the first game and the second game. The gaming machine according to any one of features F2 to F10.

When there is a request to lengthen or shorten the stop display period of one pattern, for example, the stop display of the other pattern is started based on the end of the stop display of one pattern. If there is, there is a possibility that the start timing of the stop display in the other pattern may be delayed or advanced depending on the length of the stop display period of one pattern. In this respect, according to this configuration, even if the length of the stop display period is changed, it is possible to suppress the influence on the start timing of the stop display in the other pattern, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the stop display period.

Feature F12. The first lottery means (the hit / fail determination process for the special drawing by the main control device 81) that performs the first lottery based on the establishment of the predetermined first condition (the winning of the game ball to the operating ports 33a and 33b) is performed. Function to execute) and
Based on the fact that the first lottery is performed by the first lottery means, the predetermined display means (main display unit 43, symbol display device 41) starts variable display of the pattern, and corresponds to the result of the first lottery. The first display control means (a function of executing the game time control process by the main control device 81) that controls the display of the predetermined display means, and the stop display of the stop result as one time of the first game time.
A second lottery means (by the main control device 81) different from the first lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition (winning of a game ball to the through gate 35) different from the first condition. Function to execute the pass / fail judgment process for ordinary drawings) and
Based on the fact that the second lottery is performed by the second lottery means, the pattern is variable in the predetermined display means or a display means different from the predetermined display means (design display device 41, accessory display unit 44). A second display control that controls the display of the predetermined display means or the different display means, with the display being started and the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery being stopped and displayed as one of the second game times. Means (a function of executing the normal game time control process by the main control device 81) and
With
The second display control means
The stop display period setting means for setting the stop display period for performing the stop display (a function of executing the setting process of the normal figure confirmation display time by the main control device 81) and
A means for executing the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means (a function of executing the normal game time control process by the main control device 81), and
With
The stop display period setting means is a means for setting a stop display period related to the second game so that the stop display period related to the second game is longer than the stop display period related to the first game. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, since the stop display period of the second game round is relatively long, the variable display period of the second game round can be shortened by that amount. As a result, when the player shifts his / her line of sight to the second game while watching the first game, it becomes easier to quickly grasp the result of the second lottery. As a result, the time required to return the line of sight to the first game round is shortened, and the occurrence of inconveniences such as the stop result of the first game round and the game effect during the first game round are suppressed. On the other hand, since the stop display period of the first game round is configured to be relatively short, it is suppressed that the player gives an extended impression when playing the game in the first game round, and the game is played. The inhibition of motivation is suppressed.

<Characteristic G group>
Features G1. A lottery means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process for a general drawing by the main control device 81) that performs a lottery process based on the establishment of predetermined predetermined conditions (a winning of a game ball to the through gate 35), and
Based on the lottery process being performed by the lottery means, a predetermined display means (design display device 41, accessory display unit 44) starts variable display of a pattern, and a stop result corresponding to the result of the lottery process. A display control means (a function of executing a normal drawing game time control process by the main control device 81) that controls the display of the predetermined display means so as to stop and display the above.
A game pause determination means (a function of executing the game pause determination process by the main control device 81) for determining whether or not the player is suspending the game, and
With
The display control means
The stop display period setting means for setting the stop display period for performing the stop display (a function of executing the setting process of the normal figure confirmation display time by the main control device 81) and
A means for executing the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means (a function of executing the normal game time control process by the main control device 81), and
With
The stop display period setting means includes means for setting a stop display period based on the determination result of the game pause determination means (a function of executing the process of steps S4702 and S4703 by the main control device 81). A game machine to be.

According to the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the player is suspending the game, and the stop display period of the pattern is set based on the result. As a result, it is possible to correlate the game status of the player with the stop display period of the pattern. In this case, for example, when the game is paused, the stop display period is shortened as compared with the case where the game is in progress, so that the player who is trying to round up the game knows the result of the remaining game times earlier. Is possible, or the game times left by the previous player are quickly digested, making it easier for the next player to start the game. On the contrary, by lengthening the stop display period when the game is paused compared to when the game is in progress, the start timing of the next game round is delayed, which may contribute to securing a short break. can. In this way, by correlating the game status of the player with the stop display period of the pattern, it becomes possible to realize what could not be done with the conventional gaming machine, and the interest is improved.

In the feature G1, the "game pause determination means for determining whether or not the player is suspending the game" is changed to the "game determination means for determining whether or not the player is in the game (according to the main control device 81). It may be read as "a function of executing the game pause determination process)". Further, in the feature G1, while deleting the configuration of the "game pause determination means", "the operation means (launch handle 54) at which the game start operation is performed by the player and the operation for specifying that the operation means has been operated". The configuration has "with a specific means", and "the stop display period setting means sets the stop display period based on the determination result of the game pause determination means" is changed to "the stop display period setting means". , Means for setting the stop display period based on the specific result of the operation specific means (function of executing the process of steps S4702 and S4703 by the main control device 81) ”.

Feature G2. The stop display period setting means sets the stop display period to the first period (4.0 sec to 16.0 sec) when the determination result of the game pause determination means is a result corresponding to the player playing a game. When the determination result of the game suspension determination means is a result corresponding to the player suspending the game, the stop display period is set to be a second period (0.5 sec) shorter than the first period. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the gaming machine is provided with means for setting to (a function of executing the process of steps S4702 and S4703 by the main control device 81).

According to the above configuration, the stop display period is shorter when the game is paused than when the game is in progress. As a result, the player who is trying to round up the game can quickly know the result of the remaining game times, or the game times left by the previous player are quickly digested and the next player plays the game. Ease of play is improved, such as making it easier to start.

Feature G3. Equipped with an operating means (launch handle 54) that can be operated by the player
The game pause determination means includes means for determining whether or not the player is suspending the game based on the operation status of the operation means (a function of executing the process of step S4603 by the main control device 81). The gaming machine according to the feature G1 or G2.

In the above configuration, the player is provided with an operation means that can be operated, and it is determined whether or not the game is paused based on the operation status. As a result, it is possible to determine the presence or absence of a game based on the behavior of the player, and it becomes easy to make an appropriate determination.

Feature G4. A launching means (launching handle 54) capable of launching a game ball based on a predetermined launching operation, and
A ball entry portion (general winning opening 31, operating openings 33a, 33b, through gate 35) through which a game ball launched by the launching means can enter.
With
The game pause determination means is a means for determining whether or not the player is suspending the game based on the status of the launch operation or the launch status of the game ball in the launch means (process of step S4603 by the main control device 81). The gaming machine according to the feature G3, which is characterized by having a function of executing the above.

In the above configuration, it is determined whether or not the game is paused based on the launch operation status of the player or the launch status of the game ball. Since the launch of a game ball is indispensable for a game aimed at entering the game ball into the ball entry portion, according to this configuration, it becomes easy to properly determine the presence or absence of the game.

Feature G5. The lottery means is provided as a first lottery means, and the display control means is provided as a first display control means.
The first display control means starts variable display of a pattern based on the lottery process being performed by the first lottery means, and stops and displays a stop result corresponding to the result of the lottery process. The display control is performed once in one game.
A second lottery means (a second lottery means) that performs a second lottery process different from the lottery process by the first lottery means based on the establishment of a condition different from the predetermined condition (winning of a game ball to the operating ports 33a and 33b). Function to execute the hit / fail judgment process for special figures by the main controller 81),
Based on the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means, a variable display of a pattern is performed on the predetermined display means or a display means different from the predetermined display means (main display unit 43, symbol display device 41). The second display control that controls the display of the predetermined display means or the different display means, with the stop display corresponding to the result of the second lottery process as one time of the second game round. Means (a function of executing the game turn control process by the main control device 81) and
With
The game pause determination means means for determining that the game is in progress when the second game round is executed even if the operation status corresponds to the game pause (step S4604 by the main control device 81). The gaming machine according to feature G3 or G4, which is characterized by having a function of executing processing).

According to the above configuration, even if the operation status for the operating means corresponds to the game suspension, it is determined that the game is in progress when the second game is executed, so that the erroneous determination of the game suspension is suppressed. This makes it possible to improve the determination accuracy.

Feature G6. The lottery means is provided as a first lottery means, and the display control means is provided as a first display control means.
An acquisition means (a function of executing a winning process for a working port by the main control device 81) to acquire special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the special information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers.
Information determination processing is performed to determine whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information is stored. Information determination means (a function of executing the hit / fail determination process for a special figure by the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the information determination process on the information, and
Based on the information determination processing being performed by the information determination means, variable display of a pattern is started in the predetermined display means or a display means (main display unit 43, symbol display device 41) different from the predetermined display means. A second display control means (main control device) that controls the display of the predetermined display means or the different display means, with the stop display corresponding to the result of the information determination process as one time of the game. (Function to execute game times control processing by 81) and
With
The game pause determination means is a means (by the main control device 81) for determining that a game is in progress when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means even if the operation status corresponds to the game pause. The gaming machine according to feature G3 or G4, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S4605).

According to the above configuration, even if the operation status for the operating means corresponds to the game suspension, if the acquired information storage means stores the special information, it is determined that the game is in progress, so that the game suspension is erroneously determined. Can be suppressed, and the determination accuracy can be improved.

Feature G7. The stop display period setting means is based on the result of the determination when the player is determined by the game pause determination means during the stop display during or immediately after the variable display. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G6, which comprises means for setting a stop display period of the stop display immediately after the above.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the responsiveness of changing the length of the stop display period to a change in the game situation, and it is possible to quickly reflect the presence or absence of the game suspension in the stop display period.

Feature G8. When the game pause determination means determines that the player has resumed the game during the variable display or immediately after the variable display, the stop display period setting means immediately after the stop display period setting means based on the result of the determination. The gaming machine according to feature G7, which comprises means for setting the stop display period of the stop display.

According to the above configuration, when the game is restarted after the game is paused, it can be reflected in the length of the stop display period as soon as possible, and the stop display period can be quickly returned to the period during the game.

Feature G9. The first lottery means (the main control device 81 executes the pass / fail determination process for a normal drawing) for performing the first lottery based on the establishment of the predetermined first condition (the winning of the game ball to the through gate 35). Function) and
Based on the fact that the first lottery is performed by the first lottery means, the predetermined display means (design display device 41, accessory display unit 44) starts variable display of the pattern, and the result of the first lottery is obtained. A function of executing a normal display game time control process by the first display control means (main control device 81) that controls the display of the predetermined display means, with the corresponding stop result being stopped and displayed as one time of the first game time. )When,
A second lottery in which a second lottery different from the first lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition (winning of a game ball to the operating ports 33a and 33b) different from the first condition. Means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process for a special figure by the main control device 81) and
Based on the second lottery being performed by the second lottery means, a variable display of a pattern is displayed on the predetermined display means or a display means different from the predetermined display means (main display unit 43, symbol display device 41). A second display control means (2) that controls the display of the predetermined display means or the different display means, with the start and stop display of the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery as one time of the second game. (Function to execute game times control processing by the main control device 81) and
With
The first display control means
The stop display period setting means for setting the stop display period for performing the stop display (a function of executing the setting process of the normal figure confirmation display time by the main control device 81) and
A means for executing the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means (a function of executing the normal game time control process by the main control device 81), and
With
The stop display period setting means executes the process of steps S4604, S4702 to S4706 by the main control device 81 for setting the stop display period related to the first game based on the execution status of the second game. A gaming machine characterized by having a function).

According to the above configuration, the length of the stop display period of the first game can be changed according to the execution status of the second game. As a result, it is possible to give a fresh impression to the player and provide a novel playability.

In addition, each configuration described in any one of the above-mentioned features G1 to G8 may be applied to the feature G9. In this case, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Feature G10. The first lottery means (the main control device 81 executes the pass / fail determination process for a normal drawing) for performing the first lottery based on the establishment of the predetermined first condition (the winning of the game ball to the through gate 35). Function) and
Based on the fact that the first lottery is performed by the first lottery means, the predetermined display means (design display device 41, accessory display unit 44) starts variable display of the pattern, and the result of the first lottery is obtained. A first display control means (a function of executing a normal game time control process by the main control device 81) that controls the display of the predetermined display means so as to stop and display the corresponding stop result, and
Acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition (winning of a game ball to the operating ports 33a and 33b) different from the first condition (operating port by the main control device 81). (Ability to execute winning process for) and
An acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the special information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers.
Information determination processing is performed to determine whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined information, and when a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information is stored. Information determination means (a function of executing the hit / fail determination process for a special figure by the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the information determination process on the information, and
Based on the information determination processing being performed by the information determination means, variable display of a pattern is started in the predetermined display means or a display means (main display unit 43, symbol display device 41) different from the predetermined display means. A second display control means (game turn control process by the main control device 81) that controls the display of the predetermined display means or the different display means so that the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped and displayed. Function to execute) and
With
The first display control means
The stop display period setting means for setting the stop display period for performing the stop display (a function of executing the setting process of the normal figure confirmation display time by the main control device 81) and
A means for executing the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means (a function of executing the normal game time control process by the main control device 81), and
With
The stop display period setting means sets the stop display period related to the first game based on the storage status of the special information in the acquired information storage means (processes of steps S4605 and S4702 to S4706 by the main control device 81). A gaming machine characterized by having a function to execute.

According to the above configuration, the length of the stop display period of the first game can be changed according to the storage status of the special information regarding the second game. As a result, it is possible to give a fresh impression to the player and provide a novel playability.

<Characteristic H group>
Features H1. Grant determination means (a function of executing the hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) for executing the grant determination as to whether or not to grant the privilege to the player based on the establishment of the predetermined determination conditions.
Based on the grant determination performed by the grant determination means, the production of the game times is started by the predetermined notification means, and then the result notification corresponding to the result of the grant determination is performed, and then the game times are performed. A game time control means (a function of executing a game time control process by the main control device 81) for ending the production, and
Anomaly identification means (a function of executing error handling processing by the main controller 81) capable of identifying a predetermined abnormality occurrence, and
Based on the identification of the occurrence of the predetermined abnormality by the abnormality identifying means, the changing means (stop start by the main control device 81) capable of changing the length of the notification period in which the result notification is performed by the game rotation control means. A function to execute time processing, a function to execute processing during fluctuation by the notification / effect control device 82),
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, the length of the notification period in which the result notification in the game round is performed is changed based on the occurrence of the abnormality. As a result, for example, if the notification period is long, it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that the result notification is overlooked when the result notification of the game is performed while the countermeasure based on the occurrence of the abnormality is being taken. For example, if the notification period is shortened, in a configuration where the length of the entire production of the game is shortened based on the occurrence of an abnormality, only the notification period of the result notification remains for a long time, and the production balance may be lost. It is possible to eliminate the inconvenience that such a shortening effect is not recognized.

Feature H2. The changing means is characterized in that the length of the notification period in which the result notification is performed by the game rotation control means is lengthened based on the identification of the predetermined abnormality occurrence by the abnormality identifying means. The gaming machine described in H1.

According to the above configuration, if the result notification of the game round is performed during the countermeasure based on the occurrence of the abnormality, the inconvenience that the result notification is overlooked can be solved.

Feature H3. An information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined numbers, and
With
The grant determination means has a configuration in which the grant determination is sequentially performed on the special information stored in the information storage means.
The changing means is characterized in that when the predetermined abnormality occurrence is specified by the abnormality identifying means, the special information stored in the information storage means is targeted for changing the notification period of the result notification. The gaming machine according to the feature H1 or the feature H2.

After the abnormality occurs, it is considered that the manager of the game hall or the like takes measures against the abnormality, and the player interrupts the game. Then, after the occurrence of the abnormality, it is considered that new special information will not be acquired until the countermeasure is completed. From that point of view, as in the above configuration, it is sufficient to change the notification period of the result notification for the special information acquired when an abnormality occurs. For example, the notification period of a predetermined number of game times is uniformly changed. It is possible to respond according to the game situation rather than the configuration of doing. In addition, if the notification period of the predetermined number of games is changed uniformly, the processing load itself may be reduced, but for example, the game is played a predetermined number of times even though the countermeasures have been completed. Since the times are not digested, there may be a disadvantage that the notification period of the result notification is changed even after the game is restarted.

Feature H4. The changing means changes the notification period of the result notification, including the special information acquired by the acquiring means from the time when the predetermined abnormality is identified by the abnormality identifying means until the predetermined period elapses. The gaming machine according to feature H3, which is characterized by being targeted.

For example, in a configuration in which special information is acquired on the condition that a game ball is launched into a game area and the game ball enters a predetermined entry portion, the launch of the game ball is stopped based on the occurrence of an abnormality. However, there is a possibility that a game ball that has already been launched may enter the predetermined ball entry portion, and new special information may be acquired. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to change the special information acquired later than the timing when the game is stopped, and it is possible to take measures more in line with the actual situation of the game. Become.

Feature H5. The changing means said, on condition that when the predetermined abnormality occurrence is specified by the abnormality identifying means, the game times executed by the game times controlling means are before the start of the result notification. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the notification period of the result notification in the gaming times executed by the gaming times controlling means can be changed.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the result notification from being overlooked even for the game times being executed. In this case, since it is a condition that the result notification has not been started, the result notification before execution is not required without complicated processing such as changing even the result notification being executed in the game times being executed. It is only necessary to change the length of the notification period of the above, and it is possible to secure more opportunities to confirm the result notification with a simple configuration.

Feature H6. It is provided with an operation specifying means (a function of executing the process of step S5305 by the main control device 81) for specifying the game operation by the player.
In the changing means, after the predetermined abnormality occurrence is identified by the abnormality identifying means, and then the predetermined abnormality occurrence is no longer specified by the abnormality identifying means, the gaming operation by the operation identifying means is specified. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, wherein the change of the notification period of the result notification can be terminated based on the above.

When the player's game operation is performed after the abnormality has not been identified after the abnormality has occurred, the management of the game hall has finished dealing with the abnormality, and the player is ready to resume the game. Can be regarded as Therefore, in such a situation, by setting the configuration to end the change as in the above configuration, the notification period is changed even though the player has resumed the game, which is inconvenient. Can be avoided.

Feature H7. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, wherein the predetermined abnormality is at least an abnormality in which the progress of the gaming times by the gaming times controlling means can be continued.

According to the above configuration, the significance of changing the length of the notification period of the result notification can be guaranteed. That is, if the progress of the game round is stopped based on the occurrence of a predetermined abnormality, it is considered that the result notification is not performed or the result notification is stopped while the result notification is performed, and the length of the notification period of the result notification is long. This is because changing is meaningless.

Feature H8. The changing means is characterized in that the length of the notification period in which the result notification is performed can be changed without changing the duration of the game times executed by the game time control means. The gaming machine according to any one of H7.

According to the above configuration, the duration of the game times is not changed. Therefore, for example, in a configuration in which the effect of the game times is performed by a notification means (display screen or the like) different from the predetermined notification means, the predetermined notification means side. There is no discrepancy between the duration of the game times and the duration of the game times on the different notification means side. As a result, it is possible to avoid giving a sense of discomfort to the player due to the deviation of the production, and it is also necessary to perform a process for eliminating the deviation of the production (for example, a process of extending / shortening either of them). It does not occur and leads to avoiding an increase in processing load.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. A launching means (launching handle 54) that launches a game ball toward the gaming area (gaming area PE) based on a launching operation by the player, and
Starting ball entry portions (upper operating port 33a, lower operating port 33b) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
Grant determination means for executing grant determination as to whether or not to grant a privilege to the player based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry portion (function of executing the hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81). When,
Based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, the production of the game times is started by the predetermined display means (main display unit 43), and the game times are stopped as the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination. The first control means (a function of executing the game time control process by the main control device 81) that causes the game time to be performed by the predetermined display means, with the end of the effect of 1 as one game time.
A second control means (a function of executing a stop start process by the main control device 81) that maintains the result display displayed as the stop result for a predetermined period after the end of the game round by the first control means. When,
Based on the fact that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the result corresponding to the grant of the privilege, the result display by the second control means is performed after the game times corresponding to the grant determination. After the predetermined period has elapsed, the privilege granting means (function of executing the game state transition process by the main control device 81) for granting the privilege, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
It has an operation unit (operation button 77) operated by the player, and has an operation unit (operation button 77).
Based on the operation of the operation unit, the change means (process of step S5501 by the main control device 81) capable of lengthening the length of the predetermined period in which the result display is performed by the second control means. A gaming machine characterized by having a function to execute).

According to the above configuration, the grant determination is made based on the fact that the game ball launched based on the launch operation by the player enters the starting ball entry portion, and the game round is started, and then the result. In a series of games in which the display is performed and the privilege can be given, when the player operates the operation unit, the length of the predetermined period in which the result display continues after the game is performed becomes long. In other words, after the game is played, the period until the privilege is granted becomes longer. As a result, for example, as a player who has started a game round but has to leave his / her seat due to an urgent need, there will be a grace period before the privilege is granted, so the urgent need will be completed. It becomes possible.

In other words, if you have something to do, you shouldn't start the game by firing the game ball, but for example, you can see that the production of the game times will be a big hit and the benefits will be given. If you do, you may want to prepare a drink or go to the bathroom to fully enjoy the jackpot. Then, in the case of a conventional gaming machine, when a gaming ball enters the starting ball entry section, the process from grant determination to gaming times and privilege granting proceeds depending on the gaming machine, so once the game is started, the game is played. It was difficult for the person to control the progress. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, even if the game is started, it is possible to delay the granting of benefits by operating the operation unit, and it is possible to meet the diverse needs of the player. can.

In addition, in order to adjust the length of the period from the start of the game to the granting of the privilege, for example, a configuration in which the length of the production of the game times is adjusted can be considered. However, if this is done, it is necessary to change the production content of the game times in order to extend the length of the period by the operation by the player, and there is a possibility that the processing load will increase. In that respect, if the configuration is such that the length of the predetermined period in which the result display is performed is lengthened, it is only necessary to change the period in which the result display in which the stop display is performed is performed. It becomes possible to play an effect.

Moreover, since the game is not stopped by the operation of the operation unit but the length of the predetermined period is changed, the progress of the game is stopped in the situation where the unexecuted game times remain. It is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the subsequent player cannot play the game because the player is left as it is.

Regarding the "privilege granting means", "a variable ball-entry means provided in the game area and capable of being displaced into an open state in which a game ball is easy to enter and a closed state in which a game ball is less likely to enter than the open state". And a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls based on the fact that the game balls have entered the variable ball entry means. In the configuration of "shifting the variable ball entry means from the closed state to the open state and then to a specific state for executing the variable ball entry control to be in the closed state", the game ball must be entered into the variable ball entry means. Since it becomes impossible to receive the payout of the game ball as a privilege, the significance of extending the predetermined period as described above is further enhanced.

Feature I2. When the operation unit is operated in a situation where the length of the predetermined period is changed by the changing means, it is possible to prevent the change by the changing means. Characteristic The gaming machine according to feature I1.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the predetermined period is kept long. For example, it is conceivable that the change by the change means is applied only to a predetermined game time, and when the application is completed, the change is not automatically made. However, in this case, if the required extension is to be covered by the result display in the predetermined game times, there may be a disadvantage that the extension of one result display becomes too long. Specifically, for example, when it is desired to extend for 4 minutes, the length of the result display after the predetermined game round may be set to 4 minutes. In this case, for example, the player takes 2 minutes. Even if you finish the work later and try to resume the game, you will have to wait for the remaining 2 minutes. On the other hand, for example, if the result display in each of the eight reserved game times is extended to 30 seconds, the result display can be extended for a total of 4 minutes in the same way, and the result is extended in the middle of the game times. It is also possible to prevent the game from being performed, and the degree of freedom of the game is improved as compared with the configuration in which the game is extended uniformly.

Feature I3. When changing the length of the predetermined period, the changing means increases the length of the predetermined period so that the length is within the maximum length of the game times by the first control means. The gaming machine according to the feature I1 or the feature I2.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the result is displayed endlessly and the game is substantially stopped. That is, even if it becomes longer, it is the length of one game, and even if the extension operation is performed and the game machine is left unattended in a situation where unexecuted game times remain, the game times 1 If you wait for the number of times, subsequent players can play the game.

Feature I4. When the length of the predetermined period is changed, the changing means is characterized in that the length of the predetermined period is lengthened so as to be longer than the shortest length of the game times by the first control means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features I1 to I3.

According to the above configuration, it is not an extension that does not give a grace to finish the work, but a grace is given for only one game, and the effect of the feature I1 can be substantially exerted.

Feature I5. Any of features I1 to I4, characterized in that when the length of the predetermined period is changed by the changing means, a means for displaying a specific display indicating that the change has been made together with the result display is provided. The gaming machine described in 1.

According to the above configuration, it is clear to the player and the manager of the game hall that the change is made by the changing means, not that the privilege grant is not started or the next game round is not started due to some error of the game machine. Can be grasped. This makes it possible to prevent unnecessary error handling.

Feature I6. A storage means (operation flag) for storing operation information indicating that the operation unit has been operated is provided.
The changing means displays the result when the operation information is stored in the storage means and the content of the game times by the first control means becomes a predetermined specific content. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, characterized in that the length of the predetermined period is increased.

As a specific content, for example, a content in which a reach display in which a jackpot is confirmed is performed, or a production in which a character that does not appear easily appears. Since there is a high possibility that benefits will be given later, it can be said that the need to change the length of the predetermined period will increase. Therefore, if the above configuration is used, it is possible to set in advance so that there will be a grace period when such specific content is reached, and when the specific content is reached, the operation of the operation unit will be taken into consideration. It is not necessary, and it becomes possible to fully enjoy the game times of specific contents.

Feature I7. Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry unit, and
An information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined numbers, and
With
The grant determination means has a configuration in which the grant determination is sequentially performed on the special information stored in the information storage means.
A destination for specifying information when the predetermined special information stored in the information storage means is subject to determination by the grant determination means at a timing before the predetermined special information is subject to the determination. Equipped with specific means (a function to execute confirmation processing for hold notice by the main control device 81)
Based on the specific result by the prior identification means, the change means displays the result of the special information to be given, which is the target of the grant determination, immediately before the special information corresponding to the game times having the specific content. The gaming machine according to feature I6, wherein the length of the predetermined period can be increased.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to enjoy not only the grace period until the privilege is given after the specific content is given, but also the game times that are the specific content.

Feature I8. The gaming machine according to feature I6 or feature I7, wherein the specific content corresponds to the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means corresponding to the result of granting the privilege.

According to the above configuration, the effect of feature I6 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature I9. When the length of the predetermined period is changed, the changing means increases the length of the predetermined period so as to be the length of the duration of the game times, which is the specific content.
A third control means (a function of executing a stop start process by the notification / effect control device 82) capable of executing the effect of the game times having the specific content in the predetermined period changed by the change means. The gaming machine according to any one of features I6 to I8, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, the specific content is repeatedly implemented using the predetermined period of the result display. As a result, even if a specific content is overlooked, it can be reconfirmed.

Feature I10. Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry unit, and
An information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined numbers, and
With
The grant determination means has a configuration in which the grant determination is sequentially performed on the special information stored in the information storage means.
A destination for specifying information when the predetermined special information stored in the information storage means is subject to determination by the grant determination means at a timing before the predetermined special information is subject to the determination. Equipped with specific means (a function to execute confirmation processing for hold notice by the main control device 81)
Based on the specific result by the prior identification means, the change means displays the result of the special information to be given, which is the target of the grant determination, immediately before the special information corresponding to the game times of the specific content. The length of the predetermined period is increased so that the length of the predetermined period becomes the length of the duration of the game times having the specific content.
A third control means (a function of executing a stop start process by the notification / effect control device 82) capable of executing the effect of the game times having the specific content in the predetermined period changed by the change means. The gaming machine according to any one of features I6 to I9.

According to the above configuration, the production of the specific content of the game is performed in the predetermined period of the result display before the specific content of the game. This makes it possible to achieve an effect equivalent to that of feature I9.

<Characteristic J group>
Features J1. A transition determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) for determining whether or not to shift the gaming state based on the establishment of predetermined determination conditions, and
Based on the fact that the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition correspondence result corresponding to the transition of the game state, the game state transition means (the game state transition process by the main control device 81) for shifting the game state is performed. Function to execute) and
Based on the fact that the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means, the production of the game times is started by the predetermined notification means, and the production of the game times is ended as a stop result corresponding to the result of the transition determination. As one of the game times, a game time control means (a function of executing the game time control process by the main control device 81) that causes the effect of the game time to be performed by the predetermined notification means, and
In a gaming machine equipped with
As the gaming state, an advantageous state (high frequency support mode) and a non-advantageous state (low frequency support mode) are set so that the advantage for the player is relatively high or low.
When the game round control means starts the game round, the game round control means sets the duration of the current game round according to the result of the transition determination (the change display time setting process by the main control device 81). It is provided with a function to execute), and controls the predetermined notification means so as to perform the current game times over the continuation period set by the continuation period setting means.
When the result of the transition determination is the non-advantageous transition correspondence result (normal jackpot result) that causes the transition to the non-advantageous state, a specific period is provided as the continuation period set by the continuation period setting means. Ori
The game rotation control means
The result of the transition determination is the result of the non-advantageous transition, and the first means (notification / effect control device) for displaying the stop result at the first timing in the game times in which the specific period is set as the continuation period. (Function to stop the normal medium symbol sequence by 82) and
The result of the transition determination is the non-advantageous transition correspondence result, and in the game round in which the specific period is set as the continuation period, the stop result is the timing before the first timing, which is the second timing. The second means (a function to stop the middle symbol sequence in the situation where the prior result notification flag and the immediate result notification flag by the notification / effect control device 82 are set) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In the configuration in which the game result is notified through the production of the game times, the branch points that greatly differ in the advantage for the player, such as hit and miss and what kind of hit is hit, should be discriminated at a later timing. By doing so, the degree of attention of the entire game is increased. Based on such a premise, it is considered that it is necessary to notify at a later timing as much as possible whether to shift to an advantageous state or a non-advantageous state in which the advantage for the player is different. In particular, shifting to a non-advantageous state, which is less advantageous to the player, is not the timing of the front side, but the rear side, from the viewpoint of entertaining the game while having the hope of shifting to the advantageous state. It is thought that it should be notified at the timing.

However, there is also an idea that if the current gaming state is in an advantageous state and the game shifts to a non-advantageous state at the end of the game, the benefits of the remaining advantageous state should be maximized. Therefore, with the above configuration, the notification of transition to the non-advantageous state is usually indicated by the stop result at the first timing, but in the special case as described above, it is better than the first timing. Since the stop result indicates the second timing, which is the previous timing, it is possible to use the time difference between the first timing and the second timing to prepare for the non-advantageous state. can. In this way, it is possible to meet the diverse needs of the player and to be useful in realizing a novel playability.

Regarding "first means" and "second means"
"The first means for displaying the stop result based on the fact that the first condition is satisfied in the game times in which the result of the transition determination is the non-advantageous transition correspondence result and the specific period is set as the continuation period. When,
The result of the transition determination is the non-advantageous transition correspondence result, and based on the fact that the second condition that is satisfied before the first condition is satisfied in the game times in which the specific period is set as the continuation period. Second means for displaying the stop result "
May be expressed as. In this case, in each of the following features, "first timing" should be read as "based on the fulfillment of the first condition" and the like, and "second timing" should be read as "based on the fulfillment of the second condition". It is advisable to read it as "te" and apply it.

Feature J2. The game rotation control means according to feature J1, wherein after displaying the stop result by the first means or the second means, the stop result is maintained until the duration elapses. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, once the stop result is displayed by the first means or the second means, it is not overturned, and so-called re-variation cannot be expected. As a result, it is possible to make the player accept the transition to the non-advantageous state and promptly start the preparation before the transition to the non-advantageous state.

Features J3. The gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, wherein the second means displays the stop result at the second timing in the gaming times in the advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, the case where the stop result is displayed at the second timing is the case where the state shifts from the advantageous state to the non-advantageous state. This makes it possible to play the game so that the benefits of the remaining advantageous state can be maximized.

Features J4. A launching means (launching handle 54) that launches a game ball toward the gaming area (gaming area PE) based on a launching operation by the player, and
A ball entry portion (second operating port 134) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and
Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion, and
An information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined numbers, and
With
The transition determination means has a configuration in which the transition determination is sequentially performed on the special information stored in the information storage means.
A variable receiving means (electric accessory 134a) that can switch between a first state in which the game ball is easily received into the ball entry portion and a second state in which the game ball is less likely to be received in the ball entry portion than in the first state.
Variable acceptance control means for executing variable acceptance control for switching the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then switching to the second state (a function of executing electric service support processing by the main control device 81). When,
With
As the control mode of the variable acceptance control by the variable acceptance control means, a high frequency state (high frequency support mode) and a low frequency state so that the frequency of the variable acceptance means in the first state is relatively high or low. (Low frequency support mode) is set,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3, wherein the advantageous state is set to the high frequency state, and the non-advantageous state is set to the low frequency state.

According to the above configuration, by shifting to the non-advantageous state, the frequency of the variable receiving means entering the first state decreases, and the frequency of entering the ball entering portion decreases. Therefore, for example, if the current game state is an advantageous state and the frequency state is high, it is better to launch the game ball so as to enter the ball as much as possible before shifting to the low frequency state. As a person, it will be special. By applying the configuration of the feature J1 to such a gaming machine, the effect of the feature J1 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature J5. A launching means (launching handle 54) that launches a game ball toward the gaming area (gaming area PE) based on a launching operation by the player, and
A first ball entry section (first operating port 133) and a second ball entry section (second operating port 134) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Information to acquire the first special information based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball entry section, and to acquire the second special information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry section. Acquisition means (function to execute information acquisition processing by the main control device 81) and
A first information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the first special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined first predetermined number, and
A second information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the second special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined second predetermined number, and
With
The transition determination means
With respect to the first special information stored in the first information storage means, the first transition determination means (based on the hold information on the first ball entry portion side by the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the first transition determination as the transition determination. Function to execute the hit / fail judgment process) and
With respect to the second special information stored in the second information storage means, a second transition determination means (main control device 81) that sequentially performs a second transition determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first transition determination as the transition determination. (A function to execute the hit / fail judgment process based on the hold information on the second ball entry side) and
With
In the advantageous state, the second ball entry section is easier to enter than the first ball entry section, and in the non-advantageous state, the first ball entry section is more likely to enter than the second ball entry section. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4, which is characterized in that it is easy to play a ball.

According to the above configuration, when the player shifts to the non-advantageous state as a result of dealing with the non-advantageous transition, the first transition determination is performed rather than the second entry portion in which the second transition determination advantageous to the player is performed. The ball entry part is easier to enter. Therefore, for example, when the current situation is in an advantageous state, the ball enters the second ball entry section before it becomes difficult to enter the second ball entry section due to the transition to the non-advantageous state. 2 It is preferable for the player to acquire special information. Therefore, by applying the configuration of the feature J1 to such a gaming machine, the effect of the feature J1 can be suitably exhibited.

Features J6. A launching means (launching handle 54) that launches a game ball toward the gaming area (gaming area PE) based on a launching operation by the player, and
A ball entry portion (second operating port 134) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and
Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entry portion, and
An information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined numbers, and
With
The transition determination means has a configuration in which the transition determination is sequentially performed on the special information stored in the information storage means.
The second means is characterized in that when the number of the special information stored in the information storage means is less than or equal to a specific number less than the predetermined number, the stop result is displayed at the second timing. The gaming machine according to any one of J1 to J5.

According to the above configuration, when the number of special information for which the transfer determination is performed is less than or equal to a specific number less than the predetermined number which is the upper limit of storage, the result of stopping the non-advantageous transfer response result by the second means is obtained. The display will be performed at an early timing. By doing so, for example, in a configuration in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the ball entry portion due to the non-advantageous state, the ball enters the ball entry section as much as possible before shifting to the non-advantageous state. It is possible to make the player acquire special information, and it is possible to relieve the player by displaying the stop result first in this way.

Feature J7. The first means is described in feature J6, characterized in that the stop result is displayed at the first timing when the number of the special information stored in the information storage means is larger than the specific number. Game machine.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to avoid displaying the stop result first even though the number of special information is sufficiently stored. As a result, it is possible to exceptionally display the stop result first from the viewpoint of relieving the player while ensuring the effect of the game times.

Features J8. The launching means launches a game ball at a predetermined cycle.
The gaming machine according to feature J6 or feature J7, wherein the difference between the first timing and the second timing is set to be longer than the predetermined cycle.

According to the above configuration, the game ball is launched for at least one ball by displaying the stop result first at the second timing. By doing this, even though the stop result is displayed first, it is not possible to launch even one game ball, and the inconvenience that the ball does not enter the entry part is avoided. can do.

Features J9. The difference between the first timing and the second timing is set to be longer than the length obtained by multiplying the difference between the predetermined number and the specific number by the predetermined period. The gaming machine described in J8.

According to the above configuration, at least a predetermined number of insufficient game balls will be fired. As a result, the above-mentioned shortage can be covered by the game ball launched after the stop result is displayed.

Features J10. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J9, which comprises means for displaying the remaining duration of the current gaming round when the stopping result is displayed by the second means. ..

According to the above configuration, it is possible to clearly grasp how soon it will shift to the non-advantageous state by displaying the remaining duration. This makes it easier to prepare before the transition to the non-advantageous state.

It should be noted that the above configuration is more preferable if it is provided with "means for updating the remaining duration at predetermined intervals", because the remaining duration that is decreasing every moment can be clearly shown.

Features J11. The predetermined notification means is a display means capable of variablely displaying a plurality of patterns.
The game time control means fluctuates the plurality of patterns as an effect of the game times, and displays a combination of patterns corresponding to the result of the transition determination as the stop result. ,
Any of the features J1 to J10 characterized in that when the stop result is displayed at the second timing by the second means, the speed of the variable display of the plurality of patterns can be changed. The gaming machine described in 1 or 1.

If the speed of the variable display of the symbols is changed as in the above configuration, it is not necessary to change the combination of the symbols in order to stop the combination of the symbols corresponding to the result of the transition determination as the stop result. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that a result different from the result to be displayed is displayed.

For more details on the above configuration,
"The predetermined notification means is a display means capable of variablely displaying a plurality of patterns.
The game time control means fluctuates and displays the plurality of patterns as an effect of the game times, and displays a combination of patterns corresponding to the result of the grant determination as the stop result. ,
When the stop result is displayed at the second timing by the second means, the speed of the variable display of the plurality of symbols is changed so as not to change the combination of the symbols to be stopped as the stop result. Is possible"
May be expressed as.

Features J12. Information acquisition means (a function to execute information acquisition processing by the main control device 81) that acquires special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions, and
An information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined numbers, and
A function of executing a grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) for sequentially executing a grant determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the information storage means corresponds to predetermined grant information. )When,
Based on the grant determination performed by the grant determination means, the production of the game times is started by the predetermined notification means, and then the result notification corresponding to the result of the grant determination is performed, and then the game times are performed. A game time control means (a function of executing a game time control process by the main control device 81) for ending the production, and
When the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is the grant response result corresponding to the grant information, the privilege grant means for granting the privilege to the player (function of executing the game state transition process by the main control device 81). When,
It is a gaming machine equipped with
An effect period setting means (a function of executing a variable display time setting process by the main control device 81) capable of setting an effect period (variable display time) in which the effect of the game time is executed by the game time control means, and
Notification period setting means that can set the notification period for which the result notification is performed corresponding to the result of the grant determination (function for executing variable processing by the notification / effect control device 82, processing at the start of stop by the main control device 81) Function to execute) and
With
The game time control means executes the effect of the game times over the effect period set by the effect period setting means, and then the game is over the notification period set by the notification period setting means. The result notification corresponding to the result of the grant determination for the times is executed.
The privilege granting means has a configuration in which the privilege is granted after the notification period has elapsed.
The notification period setting means is
When the number of the special information stored in the information storage means is the first predetermined number, the first means (normal use by the notification / effect control device 82) for setting the length of the notification period as the first specific period. (Function to stop the middle symbol row) and
When the number of the special information stored in the information storage means is a second predetermined number smaller than the first predetermined number, the length of the notification period is longer than the first specific period. The second means (a function to stop the middle symbol sequence in the situation where the prior result notification flag and the immediate result notification flag by the notification / effect control device 82 are set) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

According to the above configuration, when the number of special information is small, the notification period in which the result notification is performed becomes long, and when the number of special information is large, the period in which the result notification is performed becomes short. In general, the smaller the number of special information, the longer the production period of the game times, so that the situation where the special information is not stored is less likely to occur, or a large amount of special information is stored. In some cases, the speed of digesting special information is improved to facilitate the progress of the game. In that respect, it can be said that the above configuration matches the relationship between the length of the production period of the game and the number of special information. In other words, it can be said that the above-mentioned effect can be expected depending on the length of the notification period, even if the length of the production period of the game times is not set to the conventional one by adopting the above configuration. In this way, if the length of the notification period can be changed according to the number of special information, it is possible to make the game times consisting of a set of the production period and the notification period significantly different from the conventional ones, which is a novelty. It will be very useful for realizing playability.

<Characteristic K group>
Features K1. Judgment means (main control device) for executing a grant determination as to whether or not to execute a specific control (open / close control of the variable winning device 132) for granting a privilege to a player based on the establishment of a predetermined determination condition. Function to execute the hit / fail judgment process by 81) and
When the determination result by the determination means is a specific result corresponding to the execution of the specific control, the specific control means for executing the specific control (the function of executing the large winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81) ,
A function of executing a game turn control process by the main control device 81, which can execute a notification effect for notifying the determination result by a predetermined notification means based on the determination performed by the determination means. )When,
When the determination result by the determination means is the specific result, a specific period (fixed display time, opening) from when the determination result of the determination means is notified by the notification effect means until the specific control is executed. A period setting means for setting the time) (a function of executing the stop start processing by the main controller 81, a function of executing the opening process by the main controller 81), and
With
The period setting means
A first setting means capable of setting a first period as the specific period (for example, a function of setting a first fixed display time when the common hold number CRN is 1 to 6 in the stop start processing by the main controller 81). When,
As the specific period, a second setting means capable of setting a second period shorter than the first period (for example, when the common hold number CRN is 7 to 8 in the stop start processing by the main control device 81, the first determination is made. Function to set the display time) and
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

From the flow of the game that the judgment condition is satisfied, the grant judgment is performed, and the privilege is given according to the judgment result, a high degree of interest is drawn to the notification effect for notifying the result of the grant judgment. Furthermore, based on the premise that the player will feel joy when the privilege is given, it is confirmed that the privilege will be obtained for a specific period from the notification of the judgment result to the grant of the privilege. It can be said that this is a point where the player's attention can be reduced due to the relief. In that respect, in such a specific period, a device has been conventionally made to eliminate the decrease in attention by performing a production that congratulates the granting of benefits. However, even if such an effect is performed, the waiting time for specific control is still the same, and there is a limit to improving the degree of attention.

Therefore, by setting the length of the specific period as the first period or the second period as in the above configuration, the waiting time as described above has a long or short time, and it is possible to apply the long or short time to the production. However, it is possible to make people think that the advantages and disadvantages are related to the subsequent profits (for example, the benefits obtained during the specific control are high or low). As a result, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably increased.

Feature K2. The feature K1 is characterized in that the advantage for the player is different depending on whether the first period is set by the first setting means or the second period is set by the second setting means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, not only does it make us think that the length of a specific period is related to profits, but it is actually related to profits. As a result, it becomes possible to realize a new playability using a specific period, which was conventionally only a waiting time.

The above configuration is, for example,
"In the case where the first period is set by the first setting means and the case where the second period is set by the second setting means, an advantageous event (V winning) that is advantageous to the player is subsequently Probability of occurrence is different "
May be expressed as.

Feature K3. The feature K2 is characterized in that it is more advantageous for the player when the second period is set by the second setting means than when the first period is set by the first setting means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, a shorter waiting time is advantageous for the player. As a result, in a situation where the privilege grant is confirmed and the excitement does not cool down, the specific control is performed in quick succession, and the configuration with less waiting time is more advantageous, and there is a chance that the degree of attention will decrease. You can fully enjoy the game without giving it. On the other hand, a longer waiting time is disadvantageous for the player, but on the premise that the length of the notification effect will be longer as it is advantageous for the player, the waiting time on the disadvantage side will be longer. Even so, it is considered that the total length of the notification effect is not so different from that of the advantageous side, and just because the specific period is long does not mean that it is redundant.

Features K4. The specific control mode is common between the case where the first period is set by the first setting means and the case where the second period is set by the second setting means. The gaming machine according to the feature K2 or the feature K3.

According to the above configuration, regardless of which of the first period and the second period is set, the control mode of the specific control is the same, so that the privilege itself obtained by the specific control does not change. This makes it possible to achieve the effect of feature K2 without significantly changing the configuration of the existing specific control.

Feature K5. Displacement means (shutter 358) that can be displaced to a second position that is different from the first position and is more advantageous to the player than the first position.
Displacement control in which the displacement means is displaced from the first position to the second position and then displaced to the first position at a predetermined cycle based on the notification of the determination result by the determination means. Displacement control means (function to execute V operation processing by the main control device 81) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features K2 to K4.

According to the above configuration, since the displacement control by the displacement control means is performed at a predetermined cycle, the first is a specific period from the notification of the determination result to the start of the specific control. Depending on whether the period is set or the second period is set, the timing at which the displacement means is arranged at the second position that is advantageous to the player may or may not overlap with the specific control. Even in this case, it is possible to make a difference such as at what timing during the specific control the overlap. As a result, it is possible to make a difference in the advantage depending on the length of the specific period.

Feature K6. A launching means (launching handle 54) that launches a game ball toward the gaming area (gaming area PE) based on a launching operation by the player, and
Starting ball entry portions (upper operating port 33a, lower operating port 33b) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
A variable ball entry means (variable winning device 132) that can be displaced into an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a closed state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the open state.
A payout means (payout control device 97) that pays out a predetermined number of game balls based on the game balls entering the variable ball entry means.
A variable ball entry control means (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81) that executes variable ball entry control that changes the variable ball entry means from the closed state to the open state and then changes to the closed state. ,
With
The determination means makes the grant determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the starting ball entry portion.
The specific control is the variable ball entry control by the variable ball entry means.
The displacement means
When arranged at the first position, the game ball that has entered the variable ball entry means is guided to the first region (discharge area 357) that is disadvantageous to the player.
The feature K5, wherein when arranged at the second position, the gaming ball that has entered the variable ball-entry means is guided to a second region (V winning region 356) that is advantageous to the player. Gaming machine.

According to the above configuration, when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means is guided to the first region. The advantage for the player differs depending on whether the player is guided to the second region. As a result, the effect of the feature K5 can be suitably exhibited without significantly changing the existing configuration of paying out the prize ball corresponding to the entry of the ball into the variable entry means.

Feature K7. A launching means (launching handle 54) that launches a game ball toward the gaming area (gaming area PE) based on a launching operation by the player, and
Starting ball entry portions (upper operating port 33a, lower operating port 33b) into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter.
With
The determination means makes the grant determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the starting ball entry portion.
By entering the game ball into the starting ball entry portion, the specific period is set as the first period by the first setting means, and the specific period is set as the second period by the second setting means. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6, characterized in that the state set as is changed.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the grant determination of whether or not to perform the specific control is performed based on the entry into the starting ball entry portion, the length of the specific period is also based on the entry into the starting ball entry portion. Change. By doing so, it is possible to realize a novel game property that is significantly different from the conventional game, such as a jackpot determination being performed when the ball enters the starting ball entry portion.

Feature K8. Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the entry into the starting ball entry section, and
An information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined numbers, and
With
The determination means has a configuration in which the grant determination is sequentially performed on the special information stored in the information storage means.
When the special information stored in the information storage means is less than a specific number, the first period is set by the first setting means, and the special information stored in the information storage means is specified. The gaming machine according to feature K7, wherein the second period is set by the second setting means when the number is equal to or more than the number.

According to the above configuration, the number of special information stored in the configuration in which special information for grant determination is acquired based on the entry into the starting ball entry portion and the special information is stored up to a predetermined number. The length of the specific period is set based on. By doing so, even the so-called special information waiting for the grant judgment can be involved in the game, and the importance of acquiring the special information, that is, entering the ball into the starting ball entry section is increased, and the game is played. The sex can be improved. Moreover, since the specific period related to the specific control is set by using the special information different from the special information that triggered the specific control, there is only a one-to-one relationship between the special information and the specific control. It is possible to provide a novel playability that is significantly different from the playability.

Feature K9. The feature K8 is characterized in that it is more advantageous for the player when the second period is set by the second setting means than when the first period is set by the first setting means. The gaming machine described in.

According to the above configuration, the larger the number of special information stored, the more advantageous it is for the player. By doing so, for example, even if the player grasps that the specific control is performed before or during the notification effect, if the number of special information is small, the starting ball entry section is further reached. It is thought that a game ball is fired to allow the ball to enter. Therefore, it is possible to suppress so-called stoppage.

Feature K10. Based on the result of the determination by the determination means, the notification effect means sets the duration of the notification effect when the notification effect is executed (the process of setting the variation display time by the main control device 81). The notification effect is executed based on the duration set by the duration setting means.
The duration setting means has a longer duration when the determination result by the determination means is a determination result for executing the specific control than when the specific control is not executed. The gaming machine according to feature K9, which is characterized by having a configuration that is easy to set.

In general, a long production is performed in a game time that is a big hit, and a device is made to fully enjoy the production of the game time. However, if it is too long, a player who knows that it will be a big hit in the middle or earlier, or a player who wants to quickly obtain a privilege based on the big hit may feel that the game times are redundant. On the other hand, there are some players who want to enjoy the long production as described above, and it may be difficult to meet the different demands of the two. Therefore, as in the above configuration, the longer the notification effect that is the specific control, the higher the possibility that the second period that is advantageous for the player is set by ensuring the time for acquiring the special information. It can be a meaningful time for both the player who wants to enjoy the production for a long time and the player who feels that the long production is meaningless.

Features K11. A variable receiving means (electric accessory 134a) that can switch between a first state in which a game ball is easily received into the starting ball entry portion and a second state in which the game ball is less likely to be received in the starting ball entry portion than in the first state. ,
Variable acceptance control means for executing variable acceptance control for switching the variable acceptance means from the second state to the first state and then switching to the second state (a function of executing electric service support processing by the main control device 81). When,
With
As the control mode of the variable acceptance control by the variable acceptance control means, a high frequency state (high frequency support mode) and a low frequency state so that the frequency of the variable acceptance means in the first state is relatively high or low. The gaming machine according to feature K9 or feature K10, wherein (low frequency support mode) is set.

As in the above configuration, the ease of accumulating special information changes by using the variable receiving means that assists the ball entering the starting ball entry portion. Specifically, in the high frequency state where the frequency of the first state of accepting the ball entering the starting ball is high, special information is easily acquired, and the frequency of the first state is lower than in the high frequency state. Then, it becomes difficult to obtain special information. Therefore, in the high frequency state, the second period is likely to be set by the second setting means, and in the low frequency state, the first period is likely to be set by the first setting means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the playability by associating not only the frequency with which the grant determination is made but also the length of the specific period and its advantage.

Feature K12. Based on the result of the determination by the determination means, the notification effect means sets the duration of the notification effect when the notification effect is executed (the process of setting the variation display time by the main control device 81). The notification effect is executed based on the duration set by the duration setting means.
When the determination result by the determination means is the determination result of executing the specific control during the high frequency state, the duration setting means is the determination result by the determination means during the low frequency state. The gaming machine according to feature K11, wherein is configured to facilitate setting a shorter duration than when the determination result is such that the specific control is executed.

On the premise that special information is more likely to be accumulated in the high frequency state than in the low frequency state, there is a high possibility that the second period will be set when the specific control is performed. On the other hand, as in the above configuration, if the duration of the notification effect for which the specific control is to be performed is likely to be shorter than in the low frequency state during the high frequency state, the specific control is performed. Even if you try to acquire special information after the start of the notification effect, there may be a situation where it is not in time. By doing so, it is possible to increase the significance of transitioning the game in a state where the special information is stored as close to a predetermined number as possible, which is the upper limit value, and the variable receiving means is the first state during the high frequency state. It is possible to deter the so-called stop-and-shoot action of firing a game ball aiming at the situation.

<Characteristic L group>
Feature L1. Starting ball entry portions (upper operating port 33a, lower operating port 33b) into which a game ball flowing down the game area (gaming area PE) can enter.
Information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing by the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry unit, and
An information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined numbers, and
A variable ball entry means (variable winning devices 32, 132) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the ball cannot enter or cannot enter.
Variable entry control means capable of executing variable entry control that changes the variable entry means from the closed state to the open state and then changes to the closed state (a function of executing a large winning opening opening / closing process by the main control device 81). When,
A function of sequentially executing a migration determination as to whether or not the special information stored in the information storage means corresponds to predetermined migration information (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81). )When,
When the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is a transition result that corresponds to the transition information, the gaming state is changed to a specific state in which the variable entry control is performed by the variable entry control means. The transition means to be migrated (the function of executing the game state transition process by the main control device 81) and
Based on the fact that the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means, the production of the game times is started by the predetermined notification means, and then the result notification corresponding to the result of the transition determination is performed, and then the game times are performed. Game times control means (a function to execute variable display control processing by the notification / effect control device 82) to end the effect, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
It is provided with a period setting means (a function of executing the stop start processing by the main control device 81) for setting a specific period in which the result notification is performed.
The period setting means is such that when the result of the transition determination for the special information is a specific result different from the transition result, the specific period is shifted to the specific state by the transition means, and the variable input means. A gaming machine characterized in that the ball means can be set to have a length of time corresponding to a waiting period until the ball means is switched from the closed state to the open state.

In the flow of a series of game times in which the production of the game times is started based on the transition judgment, the result notification corresponding to the result of the transition judgment is made, and the game times is ended, the result of the transition judgment is If it is a transition result, it shifts to a specific state in which variable entry control is performed by the variable entry means after the game, and if the result of the transition determination is not the transition result, the above game as long as special information is stored in the storage means. The times are performed sequentially. In such playability, while the production of the game times is performed to expect the result of the transition to raise the attention of the player, after the production of the game times, the effect is increased. Since the result of the transition determination that triggered the game round is notified as a result notification, the player can clearly recognize that the result notification is not, for example, a transition result. Then, no matter how exciting the production of the game times, if the result notification is finally performed, only the result notification will be of interest, and the result notification will be used to confirm the hit or miss. There is a possibility that the game will be as playable as the above. On the other hand, if the result notification is not performed after the game play is performed, or if the result notification is difficult to understand, for example, it becomes difficult for the game hall manager or the like to confirm the result of the transition determination. Such inconvenience may occur.

Therefore, in the above configuration, the specific period for notifying the result is set to a length corresponding to the waiting period until the variable ball entry means is switched from the closed state to the open state when the result of the transition determination is the transition result. It is possible to set. Therefore, even if it is notified as a result notification that it is a specific result (outlier result) that is not a transition result, the result may be notified through the fact that the production of the next game round is not started until the specific period elapses. It is possible to see the result notification while having the expectation that the result may be a transition result rather than a specific result (outlier result). With such a configuration, it is not necessary to obscure the result notification, and it is possible to raise the degree of attention until the final timing of the result notification (the start timing of the production of the next game). ..

Feature L2. The period setting means sets the specific period in which the result notification is performed when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the transition result, and the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the specific result. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the result is set shorter than the specific period in which the result notification is performed in a certain case.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to reduce the difference for the waiting period until the variable ball entry means is opened in the case of the transition result. Therefore, it is possible to associate the specific period in the case of the specific result with the specific period and the waiting period in the case of the transition result. Further, in this way, it is not necessary to shorten the waiting period side, and it is possible to sufficiently secure the preparation for controlling the variable ball entry means and the period for producing the effect.

Feature L3. The period setting means is such that the specific period when the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the specific result is the total period of the specific period and the waiting period when the result is the transition result. The gaming machine according to feature L2, which is characterized in that it is set to.

According to the above configuration, the specific period in the case of the specific result and the specific period and the waiting period in the case of the transition result have the same length. As a result, it becomes impossible to determine whether the result is a specific result or a transition result from whether or not the next game round is started and the opening / closing mode of the variable ball entry means. Therefore, it is possible to preferably enhance the effect of obscuring both results.

Feature L4. When the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means is the specific result, the transition means does not shift to the specific state, and the game rotation control means has passed the specific period in which the specific result is notified. In the case, any one of the features L1 to L3, which is characterized in that the production of the game times for the next special information is started on condition that the special information is stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the above configuration, the specific result is a so-called out-of-order result that does not shift to the specific state. Moreover, unlike the so-called small hit result in which the variable ball entry means is opened and closed a smaller number of times than in a specific state, for example, the variable ball entry means is completely removed without being opened and closed. By doing so, the advantage of the transition result that shifts to the specific state and the specific result that does not shift to the specific state are greatly different, and the effect of setting the length of the specific period as the feature L1 is produced. Can be suitably increased.

Feature L5. The game times control means is a means for stopping a specific stop mode that is stopped as the result notification when the result of the transition determination is the transition result, and is stopped when the result of the transition determination is the specific result (notification / The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, which comprises a function of executing the process of step S6503 by the effect control device 82).

According to the above configuration, it is not possible to determine whether the result is a transition result or a specific result from the result notification by the game time control means. This makes it possible to preferably enhance the effect of obscuring both results.

Feature L6. As the determination mode of the transition determination by the transition determination means, a high probability mode and a low probability mode are provided so that the probability of the transition result is relatively high or low.
When the result of the transition determination is the specific result in the low probability mode, the period setting means sets the specific period to be a period of a length corresponding to the waiting period, while the high. When the result of the transition determination is the specific result in the probability mode, the specific period is set so as to be different from the specific period set in the low probability mode. The gaming machine according to any one of L5.

If the player's psychology that he expects a transition result is used only in the low probability mode where the probability of a transition result is low, a specific period is characterized by a specific period like L1. It can be said that the effect of the effect is preferably enhanced. Therefore, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to fully exert the effect of the feature L1 and not to hinder the progress of the game in the high probability mode.

Feature L7. Based on the fact that the transition determination is performed by the transition determination means, the production of the game times is started by the specific notification means (main display unit 43) different from the predetermined notification means, and then the result of the transition determination. The second game time control means (a function of executing the game time control process by the main control device 81) for ending the production of the game time after the result notification corresponding to the above is provided.
When the result of the transition determination is the transition result, the second game times control means notifies the transition result corresponding to the transition result as the result notification, and when the result of the transition determination is the specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L6, characterized in that a specific result notification different from the transition result notification is performed as the result notification.

According to the above configuration, by confirming the result notification by the second game round control means, it is possible to clearly distinguish whether the result of the transition determination is the transition result or the specific result. As a result, it is possible to execute the confirmation work of the result by the manager of the game hall or the like while obtaining the effect of the effect of the configuration of the feature L1.

Regarding the relationship between the "predetermined notification means" and the "specific notification means", for example, if the specific notification means is smaller than the predetermined notification means, the distinctiveness may be different. It is possible to make both the notification means that the player wants to see and the notification means that he wants to show to the manager of the game hall. Further, by making it possible for the game ball to flow down between the predetermined notification means and the specific notification means, even if the player tries to confirm both notification means, the game area will intervene between them. , When the line of sight is transferred from one notification means to the other notification means, the flow of the game ball is distracted, and it is possible to make it difficult to feel a sense of discomfort that the result notifications of both notification means do not match.

<Characteristic M group>
Features M1. An information acquisition means (a function of executing information acquisition processing by the main control device 81) for acquiring determination information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition, and
An information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) that stores the determination information acquired by the information acquisition means up to a predetermined number of predetermined numbers.
With respect to the determination information stored in the information storage means, a grant determination means (a function of executing a hit / fail determination process by the main control device 81) for executing a grant determination as to whether or not to grant a privilege to the player, and
Based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means being the grant response result corresponding to the grant of the privilege, the privilege granting means for granting the privilege to the player (game by the main control device 81). Function to execute state transition processing) and
With
As the game state, a high probability state and a low probability state are set so that the probability that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means becomes the grant correspondence result is relatively high or low.
It is provided with a state setting means (a function of executing a transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode by the main control device 81) for setting the game state to the high probability state.
The state setting means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to set the high probability state according to the number of determination information stored in the information storage means.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine in which determination information is acquired based on the fact that the acquisition condition is satisfied, the determination information is stored in the information storage means, and the determination is made for the determination information. A high-probability state and a low-probability state in which the probability of grant determination is relatively high or low are set, and the setting is performed according to the number of determination information stored in the information storage means. Therefore, it has a completely different playability from the conventional gaming machines that are set to a high-probability state or a low-probability state depending on the result of the grant determination and the type when the privilege is granted based on the result. It becomes possible.

In particular, since the configuration is such that the determination information is performed according to the number of determination information, for example, if the number of determination information is large and the configuration is likely to be in a high probability state, the game is performed in order to satisfy the acquisition condition as much as possible. If it is the opposite configuration, it is possible to make a grant judgment that triggers the acquisition of benefits, but it also realizes a special playability such as making a grant judgment while trying not to satisfy the acquisition conditions as much as possible. It will be possible. In this way, the ease with which benefits are granted differs depending on the relationship with the establishment of the acquisition conditions, so that the player can be involved in the ease with which the benefits are granted, and the interest is improved through active participation in the game. Is planned.

Feature M2. A specific period (a period during which the variable winning device 132 is opened) is set in which a specific event (V winning) that triggers the setting of the high probability state is set by the setting means.
When the number of determination information stored in the information storage means is the first number, the first means capable of generating the specific event in the specific period and the first means.
When the number of determination information stored in the information storage means is a second number different from the first number, the second means for limiting the occurrence of the specific event in the specific period and the second means.
The gaming machine according to the feature M1, which is characterized by the above.

According to the above configuration, a novel game property such as setting a high probability state according to the number of determination information of the feature M1 is easy for the player to understand and is simple as to whether or not a specific event occurs during a specific period. It can be realized by the configuration. As a result, it is clearly understood that the number of determination information is involved in the setting of the high probability state, and the playability of the feature M1 can be fully enjoyed.

Feature M3. The specific event can occur at a specific timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from a predetermined start timing.
The first means is set so that the specific timing is included in the specific period.
The second means is characterized in that the specific timing is not included in the specific period or is set so that the specific timing is less likely to be included than when the specific timing is set by the first means. The gaming machine described in M2.

According to the above configuration, the effect of the feature M2 can be achieved by setting the period such as whether or not the timing at which the specific event can occur is included in the specific period. As a result, it is possible to realize the playability of the feature M1 with a simple and easy-to-understand configuration such as setting a period without requiring complicated control or processing that is difficult to understand visually.

Features M4. The first means sets the waiting period until the specific period starts as the first period, so that the specific period includes the specific timing.
The second means sets the waiting period as a second period different from the first period, so that the specific period does not include the specific timing or is set by the first means. The gaming machine according to feature M3, which is characterized in that it is set so that a specific timing is less likely to be included.

According to the above configuration, the first means and the second means do not make the specific period different, but make the waiting period before the specific period different. As a result, for example, if the accessory is configured to operate in a specific period and the privilege is easily given, it is not necessary to change the operation mode of the accessory. Therefore, it is possible to realize the playability of the feature M1 while ensuring the fairness in appearance.

Feature M5. The state setting means
The number of the determination information stored in the information storage means in the situation where the grant determination is performed by the grant determination means is given the privilege by the privilege granting means based on the result of the grant determination. It is possible to make a difference whether or not to set the high probability state depending on whether the number of determination information is the same as or different from the number of determination information stored in the information storage means in the situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M4.

According to the above configuration, there are cases where the number of judgment information is the same and different in the period from when the grant judgment is made until the privilege is granted based on the result of the grant judgment. , Whether or not to set the high probability state will be different. That is, whether or not the high probability state is reached depends on whether or not the acquisition condition is satisfied in the period from the determination of grant to the grant of the privilege. By doing so, after the grant judgment is made, the so-called waiting time until the privilege is granted is used to set the key part of the game, which is a novelty that has never existed before. It is possible to realize a high level of playability.

Feature M6. As a gaming state, a first gaming state (high frequency support mode) in which the predetermined acquisition condition is easily satisfied and a second gaming state (low frequency support mode) in which the predetermined acquisition condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the first gaming state. ), The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M5, characterized in that.

According to the above configuration, the number of stored determination information that is largely related to the setting of the high probability state differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state. For example, if the configuration is such that the larger the number of stored determination information is, the higher the probability state is set, the first game state in which the predetermined acquisition condition is easily satisfied is set to the higher probability state than the second game state. It will be in an easy state. Further, if the configuration is the opposite, the ease of satisfying the predetermined acquisition condition and the ease of setting the high probability state are in conflict with each other, resulting in a novel sense of playability.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in the other configurations of the feature A group to the feature M group to each configuration of the feature A group to the feature M group described in detail above. However, it is also possible to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means (launching handle 54) operated by a player, a game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the launched game ball. A ball passage (rail portions 51, 52) leading to a predetermined game area (game area PE) and each game part arranged in the game area are provided, and a predetermined passing part (general prize) among the game parts is provided. A gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a mouth 31 or the like.

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol changes start due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then displays the symbol sequence in the final stop. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device that is provided with a ball tray to generate a game, etc. A gaming machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the gaming ball is thrown in.

10 ... Pachinko machine, 32 ... Variable winning device, 33a ... Upper operating port, 33b ... Lower operating port, 34 ... Electric accessory, 35 ... Through gate, 41 ... Design display device, 43 ... Main display, 54 ... Launch handle , 77 ... Operation button, 81 ... Main control device, 82 ... Notification / effect control device, 101 ... Display control device, 133 ... First operating port, 134 ... Second operating port, 232 ... Holding ball storage area, 341 ... No. 1 information area, 342 ... second information area, 356 ... V winning area, 357 ... discharging area.

Claims (3)

An acquisition method for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
An acquisition information storage means that stores the special information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers.
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the given information, and if a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information With respect to the grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination
A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting response result that the special information corresponds to the grant information.
A pattern display means that can display a pattern in a variable manner,
Based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, the pattern display means starts variable display of the symbol, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped and displayed as one of the game times. , A display control means that controls the display of the pattern display means so that each game is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
With
The display control means
Stop display period setting means for setting the stop display period for displaying the stop of the pattern, and
A stop display executing means that executes the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means, and a stop display executing means.
With
The stop display period setting means, when the storage number of the special information in the acquired information storage unit at variable display in or stopped and displayed in the immediately changes, changes the stop display period of the stop immediately display Is possible,
A means for setting the stop display period as the first period when the number of stored items is less than a predetermined number, and
A means for setting the stop display period to a second period shorter than the first period when the number of stored items is equal to or greater than the predetermined number.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with. An acquisition method for acquiring special information based on the establishment of predetermined acquisition conditions,
An acquisition information storage means that stores the special information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number predetermined as a plurality of numbers.
It is determined whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the given information, and if a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the plurality of special information With respect to the grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination
A privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege to a player based on the result of the granting determination by the granting determination means being a granting response result that the special information corresponds to the grant information.
A pattern display means that can display a pattern in a variable manner,
Based on the grant determination being performed by the grant determination means, the symbol display means starts variable display of the symbol, and the stop result corresponding to the result of the grant determination is stopped and displayed as one of the game times. , A display control means that controls the display of the pattern display means so that each game is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
With
The display control means
Stop display period setting means for setting the stop display period for displaying the stop of the pattern, and
A stop display executing means that executes the stop display based on the stop display period set by the stop display period setting means, and a stop display executing means.
With
The stop display period setting means changes the stop display period of the stop display immediately after the change when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means changes during the variable display or the stop display immediately after the variable display. Is possible,
A means for setting the stop display period as the first predetermined period when the number of stored items is larger than a predetermined reference number, and
A means for setting the stop display period to a second predetermined period longer than the first predetermined period when the number of stored items is equal to or less than the reference number.
A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the gaming is performed using a predetermined gaming medium.

Images